Auditorium Addition - Longmont Museum · 09 6813 TILE CARPETING 09 7733 FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED POLYESTER PANELS 09 8400 ACOUSTICAL ROOM COMPONENTS 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123

Construction DocumentsConstruction DocumentsConstruction DocumentsConstruction Documents

Project ManualProject ManualProject ManualProject Manual

VolumeVolumeVolumeVolume 2222

Auditorium AdditionAuditorium AdditionAuditorium AdditionAuditorium Addition Longmont MuseumLongmont MuseumLongmont MuseumLongmont Museum

OZ OZ OZ OZ ArchitectArchitectArchitectArchitectureureureure 11/08/2013

TABLE OF CONTENTS - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 1 OF 2

PROCUREMENT DOCUMENTS INVITATION FOR BID INFORMATION AND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT GENERAL CONDITIONS CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT NOTICE OF AWARD PERFORMANCE BOND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND NOTICE TO PROCEED REQUEST FOR PAYMENT CHANGE ORDER CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATE AND RELEASE NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION ACCEPTANCE NOTICE OF WARRANTY WORK CITY PROJECT FINAL ACCEPTANCE PUBLIC WORKS DEVELOPMENT PERMIT APPLICATION

INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO CONTRACTORS 00 3132 GEOTECHNICAL DATA

CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00 7300 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 1000 SUMMARY 01 2200 UNIT PRICES 01 2300 ALTERNATES 01 2500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 2600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 2900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 3100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 3233 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 7300 EXECUTION 01 7419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 4119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

DIVISION 03 CONCRETE 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

Construction Documents11/08/2013

Auditorium Addition - Longmont Museum511065.00


DIVISION 04 MASONRY 04 2000 UNIT MASONRY 04 4200 EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING

DIVISION 05 METALS 05 1200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 3000 STEEL DECKING 05 4000 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 06 WOOD AND PLASTICS 06 1000 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1600 SHEATHING 06 4023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 1113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION 07 2500 WEATHER BARRIERS 07 4216 INSULATED-CORE METAL WALL PANELS 07 5419 PVC ROOFING SYSTEM 07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 7200 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 8100 APPLIED FIREPROOFING 07 8413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 8446 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS 07 9500 EXPANSION CONTROL

DIVISION 08 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08 1114 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1216 ALUMINUM FRAMES 08 1416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 3113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 4113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4523 FIBERGLASS-SANDWICH-PANEL ASSEMBLIES 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 08 8000 GLAZING 08 8300 MIRRORS

DIVISION 09 FINISHES 09 2216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2900 GYPSUM BOARD 09 3000 TILING 09 5113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5426 LINEAR WOOD CEILINGS 09 6400 WOOD FLOORING 09 6513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 6813 TILE CARPETING 09 7733 FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED POLYESTER PANELS 09 8400 ACOUSTICAL ROOM COMPONENTS 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING




DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10 1400 SIGNAGE 10 2113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 2226 OPERABLE PARTITIONS 10 2613 CORNER GUARDS 10 2800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 4410 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 11 0660 THEATRICAL EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE LIGHTING SYSTEM 11 6173 ADJUSTABLE ACOUSTICAL ABSORPTION

DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS 12 2413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 4813 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12 6100 FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING

DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)

DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS (NOT USED)




TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 2 OF 2

DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 1313 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

DIVISION 22 PLUMBING 22 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 0513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 0519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0533 HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0700 PLUMBING INSULATION 22 1116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 1119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 1123 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 22 1316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 22 1319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 1413 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 1423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 3400 FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22 4000 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 4700 DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS

DIVISION 23 HVAC 23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 0513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0700 HVAC INSULATION 23 0900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 1123 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 23 2300 REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 3113 METAL DUCTS 23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 3423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 3713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 7413 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 7423 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS (30-150 TONS) 23 8126 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 23 8239 UNIT HEATERS




DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 26 0501 MEP 26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0544 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 2200 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 2416 PANELBOARDS 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES 26 2813 FUSES 26 2816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING

DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS 27 4100 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS 27 4113 ARCHITECTURALLY INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS 27 4116 INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS

DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SECURITY AND SAFETY 28 3111 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK 31 1000 SITE CLEARING 31 2000 EARTH MOVING 31 2333 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 2500 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 31 6329 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS

DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 1216 ASPHALT PAVING 32 1313 CONCRETE PAVING 32 1373 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 32 9000 FINE GRADING AND SOIL PREPARATION 32 9200 TURF AND GRASSES 32 9300 PLANTING 32 9350 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 32 9400 PLANTING ACCESSORIES

DIVISION 33 UTILITIES 33 1100 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 3100 SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 33 4100 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS



COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 0500 - 1

SECTION 21 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.2. Mechanical sleeve seals.3. Sleeves.4. Escutcheons.5. Grout.6. Fire-suppression equipment and piping demolition.7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.8. Painting and finishing.9. Concrete bases.10. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:1. Mechanical sleeve seals.




2. Escutcheons.

B. Welding certificates.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

C. Electrical Characteristics for Fire-Suppression Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for fire-suppression installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for fire-suppression items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.




2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless

thickness or specific material is indicated.a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.1. Manufacturers:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.b. Calpico, Inc.c. Metraflex Co.d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: glass-reinforced plastic. Include two for each sealing element.4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates

to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.5 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.




2.6 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.

C. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.

D. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.

E. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.

2.7 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FIRE-SUPPRESSION DEMOLITION

A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" and Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.

B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or

plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or

compatible piping material.3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,

clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.

3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction




loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:1. New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, stamped steel with polished chrome-plated

finish.c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,

stamped-steel type.e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel

type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw.f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with

concealed hinge and set screw or spring clips.g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.h. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw

or spring clips.i. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate

type.2. Existing Piping: Use the following:

a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-case, stamped steel with chrome-plated finish.b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring

clips.c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate,

stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips.d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel

type with concealed hinge and set screw.e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with

concealed concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips.f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with set screw

or spring clips.




g. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-plate type.

M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.

P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board

partitions.c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.

Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements

required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

R. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements


S. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.




T. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal

threading is specified.2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

G. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Painting of fire-suppression systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.5 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in

both directions than supported unit.2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise

indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete

base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting

drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.




7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03.

3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor fire-suppression materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.7 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor fire-suppression materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

3.8 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for fire-suppression equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.

END OF SECTION 21 0500



WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 1313 - 1

SECTION 21 1313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.2. Fire-protection valves.3. Fire-department connections.4. Sprinklers.5. Excess-pressure pumps.6. Alarm devices.7. Manual control stations.8. Control panels.9. Pressure gages.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. Hose connections are included if indicated.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.

B. .

C. Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s), including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

D. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: [10] [20] percent, including

losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.2. Sprinkler system shall be designed in accordance with NEPA 13 and local codes.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.]

B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.




C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

D. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:1. Domestic water piping.2. Compressed air piping.3. HVAC hydronic piping.4. Items penetrating finished ceiling include the following:

a. Lighting fixtures.b. Air outlets and inlets.c.

E. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable.

F. Welding certificates.

G. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

H. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."

I. Field quality-control reports.

J. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications:1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems

and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test

reports by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following:1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."2. NFPA 13R, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up to and

Including Four Stories in Height."3. NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances."




1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated:1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler

service.2. Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Owner's written permission.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with

space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Standard Weight, [Galvanized-] [and] [Black-]Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, [Type E] <Insert type>, [Grade B] <Insert grade>. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

B. Schedule 30,Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135; ASTM A 795/A 795M, Type E; or ASME B36.10M, wrought steel; with wall thickness not less than Schedule 30 and not more than Schedule 40. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

C. ThinwallSteel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, threadable, with wall thickness less than Schedule 30 and equal to or greater than Schedule 10. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

D. Schedule 10, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, Schedule 10 in NPS 5and smaller; and NFPA 13-specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10, plain end.

E. Nonstandard OD, Thinwall Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, thinwall, with plain ends and wall thickness less than Schedule 10.

F. Hybrid Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, lightwall, with wall thickness less than Schedule 10 and greater than Schedule 5.




G. Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard-weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.

H. Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.

I. Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

J. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.

K. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.

L. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.

M. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.

N. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Anvil International, Inc.b. Corcoran Piping System Co.c. National Fittings, Inc.d. Shurjoint Piping Products.e. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.f. Victaulic Company.

2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.3. Uncoated, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron

casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe.4. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern,

unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.

O. Steel Pressure-Seal Fittings: UL 213, FM-approved, 175-psig pressure rating with steel housing, rubber O-rings, and pipe stop; for use with fitting manufacturers' pressure-seal tools.1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:a. Victaulic Company.

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: [AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick] [or] [ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free].1. Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face

gaskets.2. Class 250, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised-Face Flanges: Ring-type

gaskets.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES

A. General Requirements:




1. Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved.2. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 175 psig.3. Minimum Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Piping: 250 psig.

B. Ball Valves:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Anvil International, Inc.b. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: UL 1091 except with ball instead of disc.3. Valves NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.4. Valves NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2: Bronze body with threaded ends or ductile-iron body with

grooved ends.5. Valves NPS 3: Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.

C. Bronze Butterfly Valves:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Fivalco Inc.b. Global Safety Products, Inc.c. Milwaukee Valve Company.

2. Standard: UL 1091.3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig.4. Body Material: Bronze.5. End Connections: Threaded.

D. Iron Butterfly Valves:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Anvil International, Inc.b. Fivalco Inc.c. Global Safety Products, Inc.d. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.e. Milwaukee Valve Company.f. NIBCO INC.g. Pratt, Henry Company.h. Shurjoint Piping Products.i. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.j. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: UL 1091.3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig.4. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.5. Style: Lug or wafer.6. End Connections: Grooved.

E. Check Valves:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. AFAC Inc.b. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary.c. Anvil International, Inc.d. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.




g. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.h. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.i. Fire Protection Products, Inc.j. Fivalco Inc.k. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.l. Groeniger & Company.m. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.n. Matco-Norca.o. Metraflex, Inc.p. Milwaukee Valve Company.q. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division.r. NIBCO INC.s. Potter Roemer.t. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.u. Shurjoint Piping Products.v. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.w. United Brass Works, Inc.x. Venus Fire Protection Ltd.y. Victaulic Company.z. Viking Corporation.aa. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Standard: UL 312.3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.4. Type: Swing check.5. Body Material: Cast iron.6. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

F. Bronze OS&Y Gate Valves:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.c. Milwaukee Valve Company.d. NIBCO INC.e. United Brass Works, Inc.

2. Standard: UL 262.3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig.4. Body Material: Bronze.5. End Connections: Threaded.

G. Iron OS&Y Gate Valves:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary.b. American Valve, Inc.c. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.g. Hammond Valve.h. Milwaukee Valve Company.i. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division.j. NIBCO INC.k. Shurjoint Piping Products.




l. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.m. United Brass Works, Inc.n. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Standard: UL 262.3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.4. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

H. Indicating-Type Butterfly Valves:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Anvil International, Inc.b. Fivalco Inc.c. Global Safety Products, Inc.d. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.e. Milwaukee Valve Company.f. NIBCO INC.g. Shurjoint Piping Products.h. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.i. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: UL 1091.3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.4. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller:

a. Valve Type: Ball or butterfly.b. Body Material: Bronze.c. End Connections: Threaded.

5. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:a. Valve Type: Butterfly.b. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.c. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or wafer.

6. Valve Operation: Integral electrical, 115-V ac, prewired, single-circuit, supervisory switchindicating device.

I. NRS Gate Valves:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary.b. American Valve, Inc.c. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.e. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.f. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division.g. NIBCO INC.h. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

2. Standard: UL 262.3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.4. Body Material: Cast iron with indicator post flange.5. Stem: Nonrising.6. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

2.5 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES

A. General Requirements:




1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing.

2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.

B. Angle Valves:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Fire Protection Products, Inc.b. United Brass Works, Inc.

C. Ball Valves:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Affiliated Distributors.b. Anvil International, Inc.c. Barnett.d. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.e. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.f. Fire Protection Products, Inc.g. Flowserve.h. FNW.i. Jomar International, Ltd.j. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.k. Kitz Corporation.l. Legend Valve.m. Metso Automation USA Inc.n. Milwaukee Valve Company.o. NIBCO INC.p. Potter Roemer.q. Red-White Valve Corporation.r. Southern Manufacturing Group.s. Stewart, M. A. and Sons Ltd.t. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.u. Victaulic Company.v. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

D. Globe Valves:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Fire Protection Products, Inc.b. United Brass Works, Inc.

E. Plug Valves:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:a. Southern Manufacturing Group.

2.6 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. General Requirements:1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide,"

published by FM Global, listing.2. Pressure Rating:

a. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175 psig minimum.




b. High-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 250 psig minimum.3. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.4. Size: Same as connected piping.5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

B. Alarm Valves:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. AFAC Inc.b. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.c. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.d. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.e. Venus Fire Protection Ltd.f. Victaulic Company.g. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL 193.3. Design: For horizontal or vertical installation.4. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure

gages, retarding chamber, and fill-line attachment with strainer.5. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main drain piping.6. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping.

C. Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. AFAC Inc.b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

2. Standard: UL 1726.3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.4. Type: Automatic draining, ball check.5. Size: NPS 3/4.6. End Connections: Threaded.

2.7 FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Exposed-Type, Fire-Department Connection:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. AFAC Inc.b. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc.c. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.d. Fire Protection Products, Inc.e. GMR International Equipment Corporation.f. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.g. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.h. Wilson & Cousins Inc.

2. Standard: UL 405.3. Type: Exposed, projecting, for wall mounting.4. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.5. Body Material: Corrosion-resistant metal.6. Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department

sizes and threads. Include extension pipe nipples, brass lugged swivel connections, and check devices or clappers.




7. Caps: Brass, lugged type, with gasket and chain.8. Escutcheon Plate: Round, brass, wall type.9. Outlet: Back, with pipe threads.10. Number of Inlets: Two.11. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to " AUTO SPKR."12. Finish: Polished chrome plated.13. Outlet Size: NPS 6.

B. Flush-Type, Fire-Department Connection:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. AFAC Inc.b. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc.c. GMR International Equipment Corporation.d. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.e. Potter Roemer.

2. Standard: UL 405.3. Type: Flush, for wall mounting.4. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.5. Body Material: Corrosion-resistant metal.6. Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department

sizes and threads. Include extension pipe nipples, brass lugged swivel connections, and check devices or clappers.

7. Caps: Brass, lugged type, with gasket and chain.8. Escutcheon Plate: Rectangular, brass, wall type.9. Outlet: With pipe threads.10. Body Style: Horizontal.11. Number of Inlets: Two.12. Outlet Location: Back.13. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to " AUTO SPKR."14. Finish: Polished chrome plated.15. Outlet Size: NPS 6.

2.8 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Branch Outlet Fittings:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Anvil International, Inc.b. National Fittings, Inc.c. Shurjoint Piping Products.d. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.e. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: UL 213.3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.5. Type: Mechanical-T and -cross fittings.6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets.7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to

match connected branch piping.8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.

B. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:




1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:a. AGF Manufacturing Inc.b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.d. Victaulic Company.


3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test

valve.5. Size: Same as connected piping.6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.

C. Branch Line Testers:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc.b. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.c. Potter Roemer.

2. Standard: UL 199.3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig.4. Body Material: Brass.5. Size: Same as connected piping.6. Inlet: Threaded.7. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped.8. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.

D. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. AGF Manufacturing Inc.b. Triple R Specialty.c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.d. Victaulic Company.e. Viking Corporation.


3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass.5. Size: Same as connected piping.6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.

E. Adjustable Drop Nipples:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. CECA, LLC.b. Corcoran Piping System Co.c. Merit Manufacturing; a division of Anvil International, Inc.

2. Standard: UL 1474.3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.4. Body Material: Steel pipe with EPDM-rubber O-ring seals.5. Size: Same as connected piping.6. Length: Adjustable.




7. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.

F. Flexible, Sprinkler Hose Fittings:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Fivalco Inc.b. FlexHead Industries, Inc.c. Gateway Tubing, Inc.

2. Standard: UL 1474.3. Type: Flexible hose for connection to sprinkler, and with bracket for connection to ceiling

grid.4. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.5. Size: Same as connected piping, for sprinkler.

2.9 SPRINKLERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. AFAC Inc.2. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.3. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.4. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.5. Venus Fire Protection Ltd.6. Victaulic Company.7. Viking Corporation.

B. General Requirements:1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide,"

published by FM Global, listing.2. Pressure Rating for Residential Sprinklers: 175 psig maximum.

C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:1. Early-Suppression, Fast-Response Applications: UL 1767.2. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.3. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for

"Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by application.

D. Open Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element Removed: UL 199.1. Characteristics:

a. Nominal 1/2-inch Orifice: With Discharge Coefficient K between 5.3 and 5.8.

E. Sprinkler Finishes:1. Chrome plated.2. Bronze.3. Painted.

F. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers.1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.

G. Sprinkler Guards:




1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.c. Victaulic Company.d. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL 199.3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

2.10 ALARM DEVICES

A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.

B. Water-Motor-Operated Alarm:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.c. Victaulic Company.d. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL 753.3. Type: Mechanically operated, with Pelton wheel.4. Alarm Gong: Cast aluminum with red-enamel factory finish.5. Size: 10-inch diameter.6. Components: Shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction.7. Inlet: NPS 3/4.8. Outlet: NPS 1 drain connection.

C. Electrically Operated Alarm Bell:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell company.b. Notifier; a Honeywell company.c. Potter Electric Signal Company.

2. Standard: UL 464.3. Type: Vibrating, metal alarm bell.4. Size: 6-inch minimum- diameter.5. Finish: Red-enamel factory finish, suitable for outdoor use.

D. Water-Flow Indicators:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. ADT Security Services, Inc.b. McDonnell & Miller; ITT Industries.c. Potter Electric Signal Company.d. System Sensor; a Honeywell company.e. Viking Corporation.f. Watts Industries (Canada) Inc.

2. Standard: UL 346.3. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.4. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and

auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.




5. Type: Paddle operated.6. Pressure Rating: 250 psig.7. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.

E. Pressure Switches:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. AFAC Inc.b. Barksdale, Inc.c. Detroit Switch, Inc.d. Potter Electric Signal Company.e. System Sensor; a Honeywell company.f. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.g. United Electric Controls Co.h. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL 346.3. Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature.4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.5. Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.

F. Valve Supervisory Switches:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell company.b. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.c. Potter Electric Signal Company.d. System Sensor; a Honeywell company.

2. Standard: UL 346.3. Type: Electrically supervised.4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.5. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.

2.11 MANUAL CONTROL STATIONS

A. Description: UL listed or FM approved, hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 pipe nipple, and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.

2.12 CONTROL PANELS

A. Description: Single-area, two-area, or single-area cross-zoned control panel as indicated, including NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure, detector, alarm, and solenoid-valve circuitry for operation of deluge valves. Panels contain power supply; battery charger; standby batteries; field-wiring terminal strip; electrically supervised solenoid valves and polarized fire-alarm bell; lamp test facility; single-pole, double-throw auxiliary alarm contacts; and rectifier.1. Panels: UL listed and FM approved when used with thermal detectors and Class A

detector circuit wiring. Electrical characteristics are 120-V ac, 60 Hz, with 24-V dc rechargeable batteries.

2. Manual Control Stations: Electric operation, metal enclosure, labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.

3. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 pipe nipple, and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with




operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.

2.13 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. AMETEK; U.S. Gauge Division.2. Ashcroft, Inc.3. Brecco Corporation.4. WIKA Instrument Corporation.

B. Standard: UL 393.

C. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch diameter.

D. Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 250 psig minimum.

E. Water System Piping Gage: Include "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing.

3.2 SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING

A. Connect sprinkler piping to water-service piping for service entrance to building. Comply with requirements for exterior piping in Division 21 Section "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping."

B. Install shutoff valve,[ backflow preventer,] pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at connection to water-service piping.[ Comply with requirements for backflow preventers in Division 21 Section "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping."]

C. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water service.

3.3 WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTIONS

A. Connect sprinkler piping to building's interior water-distribution piping. Comply with requirements for interior piping in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping."

B. Install shutoff valve,[ backflow preventer,] pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at connection to water-distribution piping.[ Comply with requirements for backflow preventers in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."]

C. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water supply.




3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from

authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans.

B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13.

C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint device materials and installation in NFPA 13.

D. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.

E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

F. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

G. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, and sized and located according to NFPA 13.

H. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

I. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.

J. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection, to drain piping between fire-department connection and check valve. Install drain piping to and spill over floor drain or to outside building.

K. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

L. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.

M. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.

N. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.

3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.




C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

H. Twist-Locked Joints: Insert plain end of steel pipe into plain-end-pipe fitting. Rotate retainer lugs one-quarter turn or tighten retainer pin.

I. Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join lightwall steel pipe and steel pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

J. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for

galvanized-steel pipe.

K. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.

L. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

M. Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join Schedule 5 steel pipe and steel pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

N. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

3.6 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.

C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of check valves in potable-water-supply sources.




D. Specialty Valves:1. General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in main

supply to system.2. Alarm Valves: Include bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line connection.3. Deluge Valves: Install in vertical position, in proper direction of flow, and in main supply

to deluge system. Install trim sets for drain, priming level, alarm connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment.

3.7 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling panels.

B. Install dry-type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.

C. Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings and install hose into bracket on ceiling grid.

3.8 FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-type, fire-department connections.

B. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection.

3.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13.

B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist.2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls

and equipment.3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"

Chapter.4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.5. Start and run excess-pressure pumps.6. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.7. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.8. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department equipment.

C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.




3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.

3.12 DEMONSTRATION

A. [Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train] [Train] Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain [specialty valves] [and] [pressure-maintenance pumps].

3.13 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Piping between Fire-Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with [threaded ends; cast-iron threaded fittings; and threaded] [grooved ends; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved] joints.

B. Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control vales, instead of specified fittings.

C. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 4 and smaller, shall be one of the following:1. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded

fittings; and threaded joints.2. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with cut- or roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end

fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.3. Schedule 10, black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for

steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

D. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 5 and larger, shall be one of the following:1. Schedule 30, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings;

and threaded joints.2. Schedule 30, black-steel pipe with [cut-] [or] [roll-]grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end

fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

3.14 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE

A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Pendent sprinklers.3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.4. Spaces Subject to Freezing: Sidewall, dry sprinklers.

B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.1. Residential Sprinklers: Dull chrome.2. Upright Pendent and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to

view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view.




COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 0500 - 1

SECTION 22 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.2. Transition fittings.3. Dielectric fittings.4. Mechanical sleeve seals.5. Sleeves.6. Escutcheons.7. Grout.8. Plumbing demolition.9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.10. Painting and finishing.11. Concrete bases.12. Supports and anchorages.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.



D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.


F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.2. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.


1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:1. Transition fittings.2. Dielectric fittings.3. Mechanical sleeve seals.



22 0500 - 2 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

4. Escutcheons.






C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.




1.6 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations.


C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access thatare concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

manufacturers specified.













D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.1. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling.2. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling.3. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.

B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC or PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.

C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.

D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC or PVC four-part union. Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.




E. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psigminimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

D. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.1. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig

minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.




2. Sealing Elements: EPDM NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Glass reinforced plastic. Include two for each sealing element.4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates


2.7 SLEEVES








E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

2.8 ESCUTCHEONS


B. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.

C. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.



2.9 GROUT



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLUMBING DEMOLITION


B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or


compatible piping material.3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,









B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.











a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, stamped sheet with polished chrome-plated




concealed hinge and set screw or spring clips.g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw

or spring clips.h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate


a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-cast, stamped-steel with chrome-plated finish.b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring


stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips.




d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.

e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw or spring clips.

f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with set screw or spring clips.

g. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-plate type.







sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board

partitions.c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.

Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.





required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten




bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.








D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal



G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent

cements.2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket

fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.




K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller and at final connection to each piece of

equipment.2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final

connection to each piece of equipment.3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric nipples and flanges to connect piping materials of

dissimilar metals.4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping

materials of dissimilar metals.

3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Painting of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."


3.7 CONCRETE BASES









5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in

Division 03.



B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.



A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.



3.10 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.











COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 0513 - 1

SECTION 22 0513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with:1. Motor controllers.2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in plumbing equipment schedules or Sections.

B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:1. Permanent-split capacitor.2. Split phase.3. Capacitor start, inductor run.4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Bearings: Prelubricated, ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

C. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

D. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open motor power supply circuit when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.



23 0513 - 2 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)




METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0519 - 1

SECTION 22 0519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Liquid-in-glass thermometers.2. Thermowells.3. Dial-type pressure gages.4. Gage attachments.5. Test plugs.6. Test-plug kits.7. Sight flow indicators.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Polyester-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Ernst Flow Industries.b. Marsh Bellofram.c. Miljoco Corporation.d. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.e. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation.f. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.g. Weiss Instruments, Inc.h. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA.

2. Standard: ASME B40.200.3. Case: Polyester; 7-inch nominal size.4. Locking Device: Hand rotatable friction lock with angle adjusting screw to provide 360

degree positioning of thermometer case and stem.5. Case Form: V-shaped.6. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.7. Tube Background: White coated aluminum with baked bold black scale markings

graduated in deg F.8. Window: Heavy glass.9. Stem: Bare aluminum of length to suit installation.10. Connector: 3/4 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads11. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.



22 0519 - 2 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

2.2 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:1. Standard: ASME B40.200.2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI .4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES or CSA.5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.3 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.b. Ashcroft Inc.c. Ernst Flow Industries.d. Flo Fab Inc.e. Marsh Bellofram.f. Miljoco Corporation.g. Noshok.h. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.i. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation.j. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.k. Trerice, H. O. Co.l. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.m. Weiss Instruments, Inc.n. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA.o. Winters Instruments - U.S.

2. Standard: ASME B40.100.3. Case: type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-inch nominal diameter.4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-

outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi.8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.9. Window: plastic.10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1.6 percent of middle half of full scale scale range.

2.4 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.




B. Valves: Brass ball or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

2.5 TEST PLUGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Flow Design, Inc.2. Miljoco Corporation.3. National Meter, Inc.4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.5. Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc.6. Trerice, H. O. Co.7. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.8. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.

D. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.

F. Core Inserts: neoprene self-sealing rubber.

2.6 TEST-PLUG KITS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Flow Design, Inc.2. Miljoco Corporation.3. National Meter, Inc.4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.5. Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc.6. Trerice, H. O. Co.7. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.8. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Furnish one test-plug kit containing two thermometer(s), one pressure gage and adapter, and carrying case. Thermometer sensing elements, pressure gage, and adapter probes shall be of diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.

C. Low-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 25 to 125 deg F.

D. High-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 220 deg F.

E. Pressure Gage: Small, Bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-inch- diameter dial and probe. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 200 psig.

F. Carrying Case: Metal or plastic, with formed instrument padding.



22 0519 - 4 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical position in piping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position.

G. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.

H. Install test plugs in piping tees.

I. Install thermometers in the following locations:1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater.2. Inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger.3. Inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank.

J. Install pressure gages in the following locations:1. Building water service entrance into building.2. Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve.3. Suction and discharge of each domestic water pump.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be one of the following:1. Liquid-in-glass type.

B. Thermometers at inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger shall be one of the following:1. Liquid-in-glass type.

C. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank shall be one of the following:




1. Liquid-in-glass type.

D. be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F.

3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages at discharge of each water service into building shall be the following:1. Direct mounted.

B. Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each water pressure-reducing valve shall be the following:1. Direct mounted.

C. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each domestic water pump shall be the following:1. Direct mounted.

3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi.




GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0523 - 1

SECTION 22 0523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Bronze ball valves.2. Bronze lift check valves.3. Bronze swing check valves.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

F. RS: Rising stem.

G. SWP: Steam working pressure.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.



22 0523 - 2 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

B. Use the following precautions during storage:1. Maintain valve end protection.2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types:1. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller except plug valves.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and

protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

F. Valve-End Connections:1. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606.2. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.3. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.c. Hammond Valve.d. Milwaukee Valve Company.e. NIBCO INC.f. Kitz Corporation

2. Description:a. Standard: MSS SP-110.b. SWP Rating: 150 psig.c. CWP Rating: 600 psig.d. Body Design: Two piece.e. Body Material: Bronze.f. Ends: Threaded.g. Seats: PTFE or TFE.h. Stem: Bronze.



GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0523 - 3

i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.j. Port: Full for 2” and smaller, regular port for 2-1/2” and larger.

2.3 BRONZE LIFT CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Lift Check Valves with Bronze Disc:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.

2. Description:a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1.b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa).c. Body Design: Vertical flow.d. Body Material: ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62, bronze.e. Ends: Threaded.f. Disc: Bronze.

2.4 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.b. Kitz Corporation.c. Milwaukee Valve Company.d. NIBCO INC.e. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.

2. Description:a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3.b. CWP Rating: 200 psig.c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.e. Ends: Threaded.f. Disc: Bronze.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.



22 0523 - 4 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.2. Center-Guided Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:1. Shutoff Service: Ball.2. Throttling Service: Globe or butterfly valves.3. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze or nonmetallic disc.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-

end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3.5 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.3. Ball Valves: One piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim.4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.5. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS.6. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.




HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0529 - 1

SECTION 22 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for plumbing system piping and equipment:1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.2. Equipment supports.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports."


A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.2. Fiberglass pipe hangers.3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.4. Powder-actuated fastener systems.5. Pipe positioning systems.



A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."3. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."4. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:



22 0529 - 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.

B. Manufacturers:1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc.2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports.3. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.4. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.5. Empire Industries, Inc.6. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.7. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.8. Grinnell Corp.9. GS Metals Corp.10. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.11. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.12. PHS Industries, Inc.13. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.14. Tolco Inc.

C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping.

2.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel shapes.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.




B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or

insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.2. .

G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to

NPS 20.

H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments.5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend

pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist

construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles.4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads

are considerable and rod sizes are large.6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge.8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads.10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:




a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with

insulation that matches adjoining insulation.2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to

prevent crushing insulation.3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

K. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

L. Use powder-actuated fasteners instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.

M. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

C. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

D. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

E. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

F. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

G. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.

H. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.




b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields

shall span an arc of 180 degrees.a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours

of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods.







HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0533 - 1

SECTION 22 0533 - HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes plumbing piping heat tracing for freeze prevention, domestic hot-water-temperature maintenance, and snow and ice melting on roofs and in gutters and downspouts with the following electric heating cables:1. Plastic insulated, series resistance.2. Self-regulating, parallel resistance.3. Constant wattage.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated.1. Schedule heating capacity, length of cable, spacing, and electrical power requirement for

each electric heating cable required.

B. Shop Drawings: For electric heating cable. Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work.1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric heating cables to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace electric heating cable that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SELF-REGULATING, PARALLEL-RESISTANCE HEATING CABLES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. BH Thermal Corporation.2. Chromalox, Inc.; Wiegard Industrial Division; Emerson Electric Company.3. Delta-Therm Corporation.



22 0533 - 2 HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING

4. Easy Heat Inc.5. Nelson Heat Trace.6. Pyrotenax; a division of Tyco Thermal Controls.7. Raychem; a division of Tyco Thermal Controls.8. Thermon Manufacturing Co.9. Trasor Corp.

B. Heating Element: Pair of parallel stranded copper bus wires embedded in crosslinked conductive polymer core, which varies heat output in response to temperature along its length. Terminate with waterproof, factory-assembled nonheating leads with connectors at one end, and seal the opposite end watertight. Cable shall be capable of crossing over itself once without overheating.

C. Electrical Insulating Jacket: Flame-retardant polyolefin.

D. Cable Cover: Stainless-steel braid, and polyolefin outer jacket with UV inhibitor].

E. Maximum Operating Temperature (Power On): 150 deg F.

F. Maximum Exposure Temperature (Power Off): 185 deg F.

G. Maximum Operating Temperature: 300 deg F.

2.2 CONTROLS

A. Precipitation and Temperature Sensor for Snow Melting on Roofs and in Gutters:1. Microprocessor-based control with manual on, automatic, and standby/reset switch.2. Precipitation and temperature sensors shall sense the surface conditions of roof and

gutters and shall be programmed to energize the cable as follows:a. Temperature Span: 34 to 44 deg F.b. Adjustable Delay Off Span: 30 to 90 minutes.c. Energize Cables: Following two-minute delay if ambient temperature is below set

point and precipitation is detected.d. De-Energize Cables: On detection of a dry surface plus time delay.

3. Corrosion-proof and waterproof enclosure suitable for outdoor mounting, for controls and precipitation and temperature sensors.

4. Minimum 30-A contactor to energize cable or close other contactors.5. Precipitation sensor shall be freestanding.6. Provide relay with contacts to indicate operational status, on or off, for interface with

central HVAC control system workstation.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Cable Installation Accessories: Fiberglass tape, heat-conductive putty, cable ties, silicone end seals and splice kits, and installation clips all furnished by manufacturer, or as recommended in writing by manufacturer.

B. Warning Labels: Refer to Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

C. Warning Tape: Continuously printed "Electrical Tracing"; vinyl, at least 3 mils thick, and with pressure-sensitive, permanent, waterproof, self-adhesive back.1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: 3/4 inch

minimum.



HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0533 - 3

2. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: 1-1/2 inches minimum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces and substrates to receive electric heating cables for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.1. Ensure surfaces and pipes in contact with electric heating cables are free of burrs and

sharp protrusions.2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Install the following types of electric heating cable for the applications described:1. Snow and Ice Melting on Roofs and in Gutters and Downspouts: Self-regulating, parallel-

resistance heating cable.2. Temperature Maintenance for Domestic Hot Water: Self-regulating, parallel-resistance

heating cable.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install electric heating cable across expansion, construction, and control joints according to manufacturer's written recommendations using cable protection conduit and slack cable to allow movement without damage to cable.

B. Electric Heating Cable Installation for Snow and Ice Melting on Roofs and in Gutters and Downspouts: Install on roof and in gutters and downspouts with clips furnished by manufacturer that are compatible with roof, gutters, and downspouts.

C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

D. Protect installed heating cables, including nonheating leads, from damage.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Testing: Perform tests after cable installation but before application of coverings such as insulation, wall or ceiling construction, or concrete.1. Test cables for electrical continuity and insulation integrity before energizing.2. Test cables to verify rating and power input. Energize and measure voltage and current

simultaneously.

B. Repeat tests for continuity, insulation resistance, and input power after applying thermal insulation on pipe-mounting cables.



22 0533 - 4 HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.




IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0553 - 1

SECTION 22 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Equipment labels.2. Warning signs and labels.3. Pipe labels.4. Valve tags.5. Warning tags.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:1. Material and Thickness: anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having

predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:



23 0553 - 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: Black.3. Background Color: White.4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than




C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inchbond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inchthick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Black.

C. Background Color: Yellow.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.




B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both

directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.

2.4 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.1. Tag Material: Brass, 1-1/2” round, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, predrilled or stamped

holes for attachment hardware.2. Fasteners: Brass beaded chain and S-hook.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.5 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches.2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT

OPERATE."4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

C. Label equipment as tagged on the schedules or per the Owner’s equipment labeling system.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09.




B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:1. Near each valve and control device.2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 feet along each run.

C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:1. Domestic Cold Water Piping:

a. Background Color: Green.b. Letter Color: White.c. Pipe Label: CW

2. Domestic Hot Water Piping:a. Background Color: Green.b. Letter Color: White.c. Pipe Label: HW

3. Domestic Hot Water Circulation Piping:a. Background Color: Green.b. Letter Color: White.c. Pipe Label: HWC

D. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 25 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.

3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: 1-1/2”

a. Domestic Cold Water: (BLDG.)-CWV-##.b. Domestic Hot Water: (BLDG.)-HWV-##.c. Domestic Hot Water Circulation: (BLDG.)-HWCV-##.

3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.




PLUMBING INSULATION 22 0700 - 1

SECTION 22 0700 - PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Insulation Materials:

a. Mineral fiber.2. Insulating cements.3. Adhesives.4. Mastics.5. Lagging adhesives.6. Sealants.7. Factory-applied jackets.8. Tapes.9. Securements.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).

B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 50 or less.2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."



22 0700 - 2 PLUMBING INSULATION

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing Coordination Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.6 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.c. Knauf Insulation; 1000(Pipe Insulation.d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

1. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.

B. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M.




2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.1. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.1. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when


C. ASJ Adhesive and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.1. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when


D. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.1. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when


2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when


B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services.1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film

thickness.2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.4. Color: White.5. Color: White.

2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less

when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-

resistant lagging cloths over equipment and pipe insulation.3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F.4. Color: White.

2.6 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.4. Color: White or gray




5. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.4. Color: White.5. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when


2.7 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.1. Width: 3 inches.2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.4. Elongation: 2 percent.5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.1. Width: 2 inches.2. Thickness: 6 mils.3. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.4. Elongation: 500 percent.5. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of

defects.2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an

epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.




2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.




2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:1. Vibration-control devices.2. Testing agency labels and stamps.3. Nameplates and data plates.4. Manholes.5. Handholes.6. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface


3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.




4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping"irestopping

and fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with

continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same

material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.




8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same

thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.6 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten

bands without deforming insulation materials.2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions

with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with

outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple

longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation.3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at

least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.




C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when

available.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when

available.2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without

disturbing insulation.3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.7 FINISHES

A. Equipment and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections.1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material

and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:1. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-

applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance.

2. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, twolocations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.9 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation one the following:1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.2. Underground piping.3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.




3.10 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Cold Water, NPS 1 and smaller:1. Mineral-fiber, preformed pipe insulation: 1/2 inch.

B. Domestic Cold Water, NPS 1-1/4 and larger:1. Mineral-fiber, preformed pipe insulation: 1 inch.

C. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water, NPS 1-1/4 and smaller:1. Mineral-fiber, preformed pipe insulation: 1 inch.

D. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water, NPS 1-12 and larger:1. Mineral-fiber, preformed pipe insulation: 1-1/2 inch.

E. Horizontal Stormwater and Overflow, including drain bodies, all sizes:1. Mineral-fiber, preformed pipe insulation: 1 inch.

F. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water Below 60 Degrees F, all sizes:1. Mineral-fiber, preformed pipe insulation: 1/2 inch.




DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 1116 - 1

SECTION 22 1116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and

specialties inside the building.2. Encasement for piping.3. Specialty valves.4. Flexible connectors.5. Water meters furnished by utility company for installation by Contractor.6. Wall penetration systems.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following products:1. Specialty valves.2. Flexible connectors.3. Backflow preventers and vacuum breakers.4. Sleeves and sleeve seals.5. Water penetration systems.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.


A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water

service.2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Owner's written permission.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.



22 1116 - 2 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L and ASTM B 88, Type M water tube, drawn temper.1. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.2. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.4. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-

socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.5. Grooved-Joint Copper-Tube Appurtenances:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1) Anvil International.2) Shurjoint Piping Products.3) Victaulic Company.

b. Copper Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75 copper tube or ASTM B 584 bronze castings.

c. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gaskets suitable for hot and cold water, and bolts and nuts.

B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K water tube, annealed temper.1. Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty metal valves.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves, drain valves, backflow preventers, and vacuum breakers.

2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.2. Flexicraft Industries.3. Flex Pression, Ltd.4. Flex-Weld, Inc.5. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.




6. Mercer Rubber Co.7. Metraflex, Inc.8. Proco Products, Inc.9. Tozen Corporation.10. Unaflex, Inc.11. Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan company

B. Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 250 psig.2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper tube.3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.

C. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 250 psig.2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple.3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

D. Install underground copper tube in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

E. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.

F. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

G. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for pressure-reducing valves.

H. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.




I. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements.

J. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

K. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

L. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

M. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.

N. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

O. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

P. Install piping free of sags and bends.

Q. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

R. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.

S. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping from each plumbing pump and packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages.

T. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Pumps" for thermostats.

U. Install thermometers on outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.


A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cutthreads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

D. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter.




E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.


A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations.

B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches.

D. Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for calibrated balancing valves.

3.5 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:1. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.2. NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.

3.6 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.

D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.

3.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION

A. Install flexible connectors in suction and discharge piping connections to each domestic water pump

B. Install bronze-hose flexible connectors in copper domestic water tubing.




C. Install stainless-steel-hose flexible connectors in steel domestic water piping.

3.8 WATER METER INSTALLATION

A. Rough-in domestic water piping for water meter installation , and install water metersaccording to utility company's requirements.

B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility company.

C. Install water meters according to AWWA M6, utility company's requirements, and the following:

D. Install displacement-type water meters with shutoff valve on water-meter inlet. Install valve on water-meter outlet and valved bypass around meter unless prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Install turbine-type water meters with shutoff valve on water-meter inlet. Install valve on water-meter outlet and valved bypass around meter unless prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Install compound-type water meters with shutoff valves on water-meter inlet and outlet and on valved bypass around meter. Support meters, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers.

G. Install remote registration system according to standards of utility company and of authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation.1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.3. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:1. NPS 1-3/4: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 1 and NPS 1 1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

F. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.10 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.




B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than sizes of water heater connections.2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for connection sizes.

3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.11 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls as specified in 220500.

3.12 SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at water-service piping entries into building as specified in 220500.

3.13 WALL PENETRATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install wall penetration systems in new, exterior concrete walls.

B. Assemble wall penetration system components with sleeve pipe. Install so that end of sleeve pipe and face of housing are flush with wall. Adjust locking devices to secure sleeve pipe in housing.

3.14 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation.

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.



B. Piping Inspections:1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and

approved by authorities having jurisdiction.2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection

must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.




b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Piping Tests:1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound

and that piping is full of water.2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.16 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide flow of hot water in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during

installation.6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use.8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.17 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potabledomestic water piping as follows:1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or

repaired before using.2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if

methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:




a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm

of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm

of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from

system after the standing time.d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat

procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

B. Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows:1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or

repaired before using.2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are

not prescribed, follow procedures described below:a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at

outlets.b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat

procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.18 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Below Ground Domestic Water Piping, NPS 3 and Smaller:1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K, No Joints.

D. Above Ground Domestic Water Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Hard Copper Tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; Cast- or wrought-copper solder-joint fittings;

soldered joints.

E. Above Ground Domestic Water Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: 1. Hard Copper Tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; Cast- or wrought-copper solder-joint fittings;

soldered joints.

3.19 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or gate

valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or

ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Memory-stop balancing valves.4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.




B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.




DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 1119 - 1

SECTION 22 1119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:1. Vacuum breakers.2. Backflow preventers.3. Water pressure-reducing valves.4. Balancing valves.5. Temperature-actuated water mixing valves.6. Strainers.7. Hose bibbs.8. Wall hydrants.9. Drain valves.10. Water hammer arresters.11. Air vents.12. Trap-seal primer valves.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise indicated.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.


D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



B. NSF Compliance:1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic

domestic water piping components.2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1

through 9."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:



22 1119 - 2 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:a. Ames Co.b. Cash Acme.c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.d. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc.b. Cash Acme.c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.d. Legend Valve.e. MIFAB, Inc.f. Prier Products, Inc.g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.h. Woodford Manufacturing Company.i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.j. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1011.3. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.4. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.5. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated.

2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Ames Co.b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.d. Flomatic Corporation.e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

B. Reduced-Pressure-Detector, Fire-Protection Backflow-Preventer Assemblies:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Ames Co.b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

C. Backflow-Preventer Test Kits :1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.c. Flomatic Corporation.




d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test-procedure instructions.

2.3 BALANCING VALVES

A. Copper-Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valves:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Armstrong International, Inc.b. Flo Fab Inc.c. ITT Industries; Bell & Gossett Div.d. NIBCO INC.e. TAC Americas.f. Taco, Inc.g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

2. Type: Ball valve with two readout ports and memory setting indicator.3. Body: bronze,4. Size: Same as connected piping, but not larger than NPS 2.5. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.

B. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.

2.4 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Primary, Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Armstrong International, Inc.b. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc.c. Leonard Valve Company.d. Powers; a Watts Industries Co.e. Symmons Industries, Inc.f. Bradley

B. Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.b. Honeywell Water Controls.c. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc.d. Leonard Valve Company.e. Powers; a Watts Industries Co.f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.h. Bradley

2.5 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated.2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with

AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.




3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller;flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated.5. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.

2.6 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Josam Company.b. MIFAB, Inc.c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.f. Woodford Manufacturing Company.g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Description: Refer to schedule on plans.

2.7 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.3. Size: NPS 3/4.4. Body: Copper alloy.5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7

and cap with brass chain.

2.8 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water Hammer Arresters:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. AMTROL, Inc.b. Josam Company.c. MIFAB, Inc.d. PPP Inc.e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.h. Watts Drainage Products Inc.i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Description: Refer to schedule on plans.

2.9 AIR VENTS

A. Bolted-Construction Automatic Air Vents:1. Body: Bronze.2. Pressure Rating: 125-psig minimum pressure rating at 140 deg F.




3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.5. Size: NPS 1/2 minimum inlet.6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.

B. Welded-Construction Automatic Air Vents:1. Body: Stainless steel.2. Pressure Rating: 150-psig minimum pressure rating.3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.5. Size: NPS 3/8 minimum inlet.6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.

2.10 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER VALVES

A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. MIFAB, Inc.b. PPP Inc.c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1018.3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum.4. Body: Bronze.5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not

chrome finished.

B. Drainage-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:a. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

2. Standard: ASSE 1044, lavatory P-trap with NPS 3/8 minimum, trap makeup connection.3. Size: NPS 1-1/4 minimum.4. Material: Chrome-plated, cast brass.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap

fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.




3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

C. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.

D. Install water control valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with globe valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.

E. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.

F. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.1. Install thermometers and water regulators if specified.2. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.

G. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve, water pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, and pump.

H. Install nonfreeze, nondraining-type post hydrants set in concrete or pavement.

I. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.

J. Install air vents at high points of water piping. Install drain piping and discharge onto floor drain.

K. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.

L. Install drainage-type, trap-seal primer valves as lavatory trap with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following:1. .2. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers.3. Double-check backflow-prevention assemblies.4. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves.

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to




identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:1. Test each pressure vacuum breaker reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer and

double-check, detector-assembly backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves.




DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 22 1123 - 1

SECTION 22 1123 - DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. In-line, sealless centrifugal pumps.2. Horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include materials of construction, rated capacities, certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water pumps to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.


A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.

1.6 COORDINATION


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 IN-LINE, SEALLESS CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Armstrong Pumps Inc.2. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Corporation.3. Grundfos Pumps Corp.



22 1123 - 2 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

4. TACO Incorporated.5. WILO USA LLC - WILO Canada Inc.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, close-coupled, canned-motor, sealless, overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps.

C. Pump Construction:1. Pump and Motor Assembly: Hermetically sealed, replaceable-cartridge type with motor

and impeller on common shaft and designed for installation with pump and motor shaft horizontal.

2. Casing: Bronze, with threaded or companion-flange connections.3. Impeller: Plastic.4. Motor: Single speed, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 IN-LINE, CLOSE-COUPLED CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Armstrong Pumps Inc.2. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Corporation.3. PACO Pumps; Grundfos Pumps Corporation, U.S.A.4. TACO Incorporated.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, single-stage, close-coupled, overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps designed for installation with pump and motor shaft mounted horizontal.

C. Pump Construction:1. Casing: Radially split with threaded companion-flange connections for pumps with

NPS 2 pipe connections and flanged connections for pumps with NPS 2-1/2 pipe connections.

2. Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, closed, and keyed to shaft.3. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft with deflector, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve.

Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal.4. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic seat,

and rubber bellows and gasket.5. Bearings: Oil-lubricated; bronze-journal or ball type.6. Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft

misalignment.

D. Motor: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings; and resiliently or rigidly mounted to pump casing.

2.3 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 22 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load

will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical

devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.



DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 22 1123 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of domestic-water-piping system to verify actual locations of connections before pump installation.

3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4.

B. Install in-line, sealless centrifugal pumps with shaft horizontal unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps with shaft(s) horizontal.

D. Install vertically mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps with shaft vertical.

E. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers with vertical-limit stop of size required to support pump weight.1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 22 Section

"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Fabricate brackets or supports as required.

2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

F. Install pressure switches in water supply piping.

G. Install thermostats in hot-water return piping.

H. Install timers as shown on the plans.

I. Install time-delay relays in piping between water heaters and hot-water storage tanks.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater than size of pump nozzles.1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in suction and discharge piping of the

following pumps:a. Comply with requirements for flexible connectors specified in Division 22 Section

"Domestic Water Piping."2. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of each pump, and check, shutoff, and

throttling valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves same size as connected piping. Comply with requirements for valves specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" and comply with requirements for strainers specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

3. Install pressure gage at suction of each pump and pressure gage at discharge of each pump. Install at integral pressure-gage tappings where provided or install pressure-gage connectors in suction and discharge piping around pumps. Comply with requirements for



22 1123 - 4 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

pressure gages and snubbers specified in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

D. Comply with Division 26 Sections for electrical connections, and wiring methods.

E. Interlock pump between water heater and hot-water storage tank with water heater burner and time-delay relay.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification of pumps.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.2. Check piping connections for tightness.3. Clean strainers on suction piping.4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication.b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is

free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for

operation.6. Start motor.7. Open discharge valve slowly.8. Adjust temperature settings on thermostats.9. Adjust timer settings.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust domestic water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjust initial temperature set points.

C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.




SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 22 1316 - 1

SECTION 22 1316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building:1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.2. Special pipe fittings.3. Encasement for underground metal piping.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

D. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

E. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

F. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated:1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.2. Sanitary Sewer, Force-Main Piping: 50 psig.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.



B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.



22 1316 - 2 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the



A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

2.3 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. Sovent Stack Fittings: ASME B16.45 or ASSE 1043, hubless, cast-iron aerator and deaerator drainage fittings.

C. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.1. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel

corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.a. Manufacturers:

1) ANACO.2) Fernco, Inc.3) Ideal Div.; Stant Corp.4) Mission Rubber Co.5) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.

2. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.a. Manufacturers:

1) ANACO.2) Clamp-All Corp.3) Ideal Div.; Stant Corp.4) Mission Rubber Co.5) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.

D. Rigid, Unshielded Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type, reducing- or transition-type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.1. Manufacturers:

a. ANACO.

2.4 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.1. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper,

solder-joint fittings.

B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper.




1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder-joint end.3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket,

metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

2.5 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste,

and vent patterns.

B. Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer:1. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.6 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING

A. Description: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105, high-density, crosslaminated PE film of 0.004-inchor LLDPE film of 0.008-inch minimum thickness.

B. Form: Sheet or tube.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Below Ground Soil, Waste and Vent Piping, All sizes:1. Solid wall schedule 40 PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

B. Above Ground Soil, Waste and Vent Piping, NPS 4 and smaller:1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steel couplings;

and coupled joints.


A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

B. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers.

D. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary force-main piping.

E. Install underground, steel, force-main piping. Install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.




F. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

G. Install wall-penetration fitting at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight.

H. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

I. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

J. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

K. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unlessotherwise indicated:1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and

smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

L. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows:1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.

M. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing.

N. Install underground PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.

O. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

B. Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.




C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following:1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.c. Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.

F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than

required by plumbing code.2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,

but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than required by plumbing code.4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated,

and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2and larger.





A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe

tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

E. Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main piping

until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.



3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.




B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.9 PROTECTION

A. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint.




SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 1319 - 1

SECTION 22 1319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:1. Cleanouts.2. Floor drains.3. Roof flashing assemblies.4. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.5. Flashing materials.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

B. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.

C. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

D. PP: Polypropylene plastic.

E. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories for the following:1. Floor Drains.


A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary piping specialty components.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.



22 1319 - 2 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Cultures: Provide 1-gal. bottles of bacteria culture recommended by manufacturer of

FOG disposal systems equal to 200 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 2 1-gal. bottles.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Josam Company; Josam Div.b. MIFAB, Inc.c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.3.1 for stainless steel for cleanout test tee.3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping

B. Metal Floor Cleanouts:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Josam Company; Josam Div.b. Oatey.c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.f. Watts Drainage Products Inc.g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Josam Company; Josam Div.b. MIFAB, Inc.c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Commercial Enameling Co.b. Josam Company; Josam Div.c. MIFAB, Inc.d. Prier Products, Inc.




e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.g. Watts Drainage Products Inc.h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2.3 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES

A. Roof Flashing Assemblies:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div.b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.

B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inchthick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 8 inches from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting.1. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.2. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap.3. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Open Drains:1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot,

cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.

B. Deep-Seal Traps:1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping

and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.

a. NPS 2: 4-inchminimum water seal.b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inchminimum water seal.

C. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal

primer valve connection.2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.

D. Air-Gap Fittings:1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between

installed inlet and outlet piping.2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.3. Inlet: Opening in top of body.4. Outlet: Larger than inlet.5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated

indirect waste piping.

E. Sleeve Flashing Device :1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device, that forms sleeve for

pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top of fitting that will extend 2 inches above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.




2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.

F. Stack Flashing Fittings:1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating

roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

2.5 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:1. General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness.2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0469-inch thickness.3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness.

B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:1. General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft..2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft..

C. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.

D. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil minimum thickness.

E. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

G. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.

H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.

PART 3 - EXECUTION1. .

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless

larger cleanout is indicated.2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for

larger piping.4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.




C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set

with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-

inch total depression.b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-

inch total depression.3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and

adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless

otherwise indicated.

F. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

G. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

H. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors and stacks at floor penetrations.

I. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 2 inches above floor.

J. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.

K. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection.1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

L. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system.

M. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane.

N. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.

O. Install frost-resistant vent terminals on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inchclearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.

P. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy access and maintenance.

Q. Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.




R. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.

S. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.

T. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

3.4 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker.

Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner.2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and

skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around

sleeve.3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches

around specialty.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.

G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.


A. Tests and Inspections:1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist.2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls

and equipment.




3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.




FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 1413 - 1

SECTION 22 1413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping inside the building:1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.2. Special pipe fittings.3. Encasement for underground metal piping.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

B. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working-pressure, unless otherwise indicated:1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.



B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the



A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.



22 1413 - 2 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

2.3 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.1. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel

corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.a. Manufacturers:

1) ANACO.2) Fernco, Inc.3) Ideal Div.; Stant Corp.4) Mission Rubber Co.5) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.

2. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.a. Manufacturers:

1) ANACO.2) Clamp-All Corp.3) Ideal Div.; Stant Corp.4) Mission Rubber Co.5) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.

3. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Cast-Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48/A 48M, two-piece, cast-iron housing; stainless-steel bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.a. Manufacturers:

1) MG Piping Products Co.

C. Rigid, Unshielded Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type, reducing- or transition-type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.1. Manufacturers:

a. ANACO.

2.4 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

B. Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer:1. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.5 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING

A. Description: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105, high-density, crosslaminated PE film of 0.004-inchor LLDPE film of 0.008-inch minimum thickness.

B. Form: Sheet or tube.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.


A. Below Ground Storm Drainage Piping, all sizes:1. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

B. Above Ground Storm Drainage Piping, all sizes:1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steel couplings;

and coupled joints.


A. Storm sewer and drainage piping outside the building are specified in Division 33 Section "Storm Utility Drainage Piping."

B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common WorkResults for Plumbing."

C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm sewers. Cleanouts are specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."

D. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm drainage force-main piping.

E. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

F. Install wall-penetration fitting system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight.

G. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

H. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

I. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

J. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:



22 1413 - 4 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

1. Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.

K. Install force mains at elevations indicated.

L. Install engineered controlled-flow storm drainage piping in locations indicated.

M. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing.

N. Install underground PVC storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.

O. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

B. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Piping Coupled Joints: Join according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.

C. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.


A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following:1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.c. Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:1. NPS 6: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod.

F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.




3.6 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.

D. Connect force-main piping to the following:1. Storm Sewer: To exterior force main or storm manhole.2.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in.2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe

tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.



3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.




STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 1423 - 1

SECTION 22 1423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Roof drains.2. Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties.3. Cleanouts.4. Flashing materials.

1.2 SUBMITTALS



A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL ROOF DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron, General-Purpose Roof Drains:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Josam Company.b. Marathon Roofing Products.c. MIFAB, Inc.d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.e. Tyler Pipe.f. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2.2 CLEANOUTS

A. Floor Cleanouts:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Josam Company.b. Oatey.c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.e. Tyler Pipe.f. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

B. Test Tees:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Josam Company.



22 1423 - 2 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

b. MIFAB, Inc.c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.d. Tyler Pipe.e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M and ASTM A 74, ASTM A 888, or CISPI 301, for cleanout test tees.

3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.4. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil-pipe T-branch or hubless, cast-iron soil-

pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.5. Closure Plug: Countersunk or raised head, brass.6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.

C. Wall Cleanouts:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Josam Company.b. MIFAB, Inc.c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.d. Tyler Pipe.e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M, for cleanouts. Include wall access.3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.4. Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil-pipe test tee as required to match connected

piping.5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.6. Wall Access: Round, chrome or paintable cover plate with screw.7. Wall Access: Round, wall-installation frame and cover.

2.3 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, 12 oz./sq. ft..

B. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-inch minimum thickness unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.

C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil minimum thickness.

D. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

F. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written installation instructions. Roofing materials are specified in Division 07 Sections.



STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 1423 - 3

1. Install flashing collar or flange of roof drain to prevent leakage between drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

2. Install expansion joints, if indicated, in roof drain outlets.3. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.

B.

C. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following instructions unless otherwise indicated:1. Use cleanouts the same size as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger

drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.2. Locate cleanouts at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.3. Locate cleanouts at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100

feet for larger piping.4. Locate cleanouts at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

D. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

E. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

F. Install test tees in vertical conductors and near floor.

G. Install wall cleanouts in vertical conductors. Install access door in wall if indicated.

H. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors at concrete floor penetrations.

I. Install sleeve flashing device with each conductor passing through floors with waterproof membrane.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece of metal unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of 6.0-lb/sq. ft. lead sheets, 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker.

Solder joints of 4.0-lb/sq. ft. lead sheets, 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner.2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching the pipe size, with a minimum length of 10 inches

and with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around

sleeve.3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches

around specialty.



22 1423 - 4 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

E. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.




FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22 3400 - 1

SECTION 22 3400 - FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following fuel-fired water heaters:1. Commercial, high-efficiency, gas water heaters.2. Compression tanks.3. Water heater accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.


C. Product Certificates: For each type of water heater, signed by product manufacturer.

D. Source quality-control test reports.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water heaters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004.

E. ASME Compliance:



22 3400 - 2 FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

1. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

2. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, finned-tube water heaters to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV.

F. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9" for all components that will be in contact with potable water.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural Drawings.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fuel-fired water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.b. Faulty operation of controls.c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion:a. Commercial, Gas Water Heaters:

1) Storage Tank: Five years.2) Controls and Other Components: Five years.

b. Compression Tanks: One year(s).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.


2.2 COMMERCIAL, GAS WATER HEATERS

A. Commercial, High-Efficiency, Gas Water Heaters: Comply with ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3.1. Manufacturers:

a. AERCO International.b. Bradford White Corporation.c. Heat Transfer Products, Inc.d. Lochinvar Corporation.e. Patterson-Kelley.f. RBI Water Heaters; a Mestek, Inc. Company.g. Smith, A. O. Water Products Company.h. State Industries, Inc.

2. Description: Manufacturer's proprietary design to provide at least 95 percent combustion efficiency at optimum operating conditions. Following features and attributes




may be modified or omitted if water heater otherwise complies with requirements for performance.

3. Storage-Tank Construction: ASME-code steel with 150-psig minimum working-pressure rating.a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. Attach tappings to

tank before testing.1) NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.2) NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel

and stainless-steel flanges, and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.

b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.

c. Lining: Glass complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending lining into and through tank fittings and outlets.

4. Factory-Installed, Storage-Tank Appurtenances:a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.b. Dip Tube: Provide unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank.c. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005.d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Surround entire storage tank

except connections and controls.e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.f. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.

Include one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

5. Burner or Heat Exchanger: Comply with UL 795 or approved testing agency requirements for high-efficiency water heaters and for natural-gas fuel.

6. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.7. Safety Controls: Automatic, high-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices or

systems.8. Building Automation System Interface: Normally closed dry contacts for enabling and

disabling water heater.9. Draft Hood: Draft diverter; complying with ANSI Z21.12.

2.3 COMPRESSION TANKS

A. Description: Steel, pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-installed, butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating pressure at tank.1. Manufacturers:

a. AMTROL Inc.b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.c. Flexcon Industries.d. Honeywell Sparco.e. Myers, F. E.; Pentair Pump Group (The).f. Smith, A. O.; Aqua-Air Div.g. State Industries, Inc.h. Taco, Inc.i. Watts Regulator Co.j. Wessels Co.

2. Construction:a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.

Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank

linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.




c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.

2.4 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15/CGA 9.1, manually operated. Furnish for installation in piping.

B. Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18, appliance type. Include pressure rating, capacity, and pressure differential required between gas supply and water heater.

C. Gas Automatic Valves: ANSI Z21.21, appliance, electrically operated, on-off automatic valve.

D. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select each relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.1. Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.2. Oil-Fired Water Heaters: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3.

E. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Provide dimensions not less than base of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4.

F. Piping Manifold Kits: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated inlet and outlet piping arrangement for multiple-unit installation. Include piping and valves for field assembly that is capable of isolating each water heater and of providing balanced flow through each water heater.

G. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and inspect water heater storage tanks, specified to be ASME-code construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Hydrostatically test water heater storage tanks before shipment to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating.

C. Prepare test reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases.1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation on stand,

bracket, suspended platform, or direct on floor is indicated.2. Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common

Work Results for Plumbing."

B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

C. Install gas water heaters according to NFPA 54.




D. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters without shutoff valves.

E. Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas water heaters without gas pressure regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas pressure at burner.

F. Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters, if required for operation of safety control.

G. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater, relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

H. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for hose-end drain valves.

I. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.

J. Install pressure gage(s) on outlet piping of commercial, fuel-fired water heater piping. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages.

K. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple water heaters. Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each water heater. Include shutoff valve and thermometer in each water heater inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each water heater outlet. Refer to Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty valves and to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.

L. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.

M. Fill water heaters with water.

N. Charge compression tanks with air.

O. Provide atmospheric vacuum breaker on cold water supply piping to each water heater storage tank, located at an elevation higher than the top of the tank.

3.2 CONNECTIONS


B. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for easy removal of water heaters.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."





A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper operation.3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls

and equipment.

C. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain water heaters. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."




PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 4000 - 1

SECTION 22 4000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components:1. Faucets.2. Flushometers.3. Toilet seats.4. Water closets.5. Urinals.6. Lavatories.7. Commercial sinks.8. Service basins.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities.

B. Cast Polymer: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material. This material includes cultured-marble and solid-surface materials.

C. Cultured Marble: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material with surface coating.

D. Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are included where indicated.

E. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

F. PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic.

G. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

H. Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-, impact-, scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



22 4000 - 2 PLUMBING FIXTURES

C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category through one source from a single manufacturer.1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single

manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category.


C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

E. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

F. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.

G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures:1. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M.2. Plastic Mop-Service Basins: ANSI Z124.6.3. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.4. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.

H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatoryand sink faucets:1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M.2. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025.3. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.4. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.5. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.6. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.7. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61.8. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.9. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.10. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1.11. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.

I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings:1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1.3. Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409.4. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.




5. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.

J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components:1. .2. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6.3. Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3.4. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.5. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.6. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.7. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.8. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size

installed.2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size

installed.3. Flushometer Valve, Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed,

but no fewer than 12 of each type.4. Provide hinged-top wood or metal box, or individual metal boxes, with separate

compartments for each type and size of extra materials listed above.5. Toilet Seats: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LAVATORY FAUCETS

A. Lavatory Faucets:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. American Standard Companies, Inc.b. Bradley Corporation.c. Delta Faucet Company.d. Kohler Co.e. Moen, Inc.f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation.g. Symmons Industries, Inc.h. T&S Brass.

2.2 SINK FAUCETS

A. Sink Faucets:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. American Standard Companies, Inc.b. Bradley Corporation.c. Chicago Faucets.d. Delta Faucet Company.e. Elkay Manufacturing Co.f. Just Manufacturing Company.




g. Kohler Co.h. Moen, Inc.i. Speakman Company.j. Symmons Industries, Inc.k. T&S Brass.l. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation.

2.3 FLUSHOMETERS

A. Flushometers:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Coyne & Delany Co.b. Sloan Valve Company.c. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation.d. TOTO USA, Inc.

2.4 TOILET SEATS

A. Toilet Seats, Insert drawing designation:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. American Standard Companies, Inc.b. Bemis Manufacturing Company.c. Centoco Manufacturing Corp.d. Church Seats.e. Kohler Co.f. Olsonite Corp.g. Sanderson Plumbing Products, Inc.; Beneke Div.

2.5 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Engineered Brass Co.b. Insul-Tect Products Co.; a Subsidiary of MVG Molded Products.c. McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc.d. Plumberex Specialty Products Inc.e. TCI Products.f. TRUEBRO, Inc.g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.

B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:a. TRUEBRO, Inc.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements.




2.6 FIXTURE SUPPORTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Josam Company.2. MIFAB Manufacturing Inc.3. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.4. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.5. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc.6. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

B. Water-Closet Supports:1. Description: Combination carrier designed for accessible and standard, as indicated,

mounting height of wall-mounting, water-closet-type fixture. Include single or double, vertical or horizontal, hub-and-spigot or hubless waste fitting as required for piping arrangement; faceplates; couplings with gaskets; feet; and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include additional extension coupling, faceplate, and feet for installation in wide pipe space.

C. Urinal Supports:1. Description: Type I, urinal carrier with fixture support plates and coupling with seal and

fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture for wall-mounting, urinal-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.

2. Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.

D. Lavatory Supports:1. Description: Type II, lavatory carrier with concealed arms and tie rod for wall-mounting,

lavatory-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.2. Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.

E. Sink Supports:1. Description: Type II, sink carrier with hanger plate, bearing studs, and tie rod for sink-

type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.

2.7 WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closets:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products.b. American Standard Companies, Inc.c. Kohler Co.d. TOTO USA, Inc.e. Zurn plumbing products group.

2.8 URINALS

A. Urinals:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. American Standard Companies, Inc.b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products.c. Kohler Co.d. Xloan Valve Company.




e. TOTO USA, Inc.f. Zurn plumbing products group.

2.9 LAVATORIES

A. Lavatories:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. American Standard Companies, Inc.b. Bradley Corporation.c. Kohler Co.d. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products.e. TOTO USA, Inc.

2.10 COMMERCIAL SINKS

A. Commercial Sinks:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Advance Tabco.b. Elkay Manufacturing Co.c. Just Manufacturing Company.d. Moen.

2.11 SERVICE BASINS

A. Service Basins:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Acorn Engineering Company.b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products.c. Florestone Products Co., Inc.d. Precast Terrazzo Enterprises, Inc.e. Stern-Williams Co., Inc.f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.

B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.




1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.

C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.

D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building substrate.

E. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.

F. Install floor-mounting, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate and wall bracket and onto waste fitting seals.

G. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.

H. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

I. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture.

Valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

J. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system.

K. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage system.

L. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.

M. Install toilet seats on water closets.

N. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

O. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

P. Install traps on fixture outlets.1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.

Q. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

R. Set service basins in leveling bed of cement grout. Grout is specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."




S. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.




A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.

B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.

C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream.

C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

D. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Do the following:1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers

and spouts.2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.

B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.




3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.




DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 22 4700 - 1

SECTION 22 4700 - DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following water coolers and related components:1. Electric water coolers.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible Water Cooler: Fixture that can be approached and used by people with disabilities.

B. Cast Polymer: Dense, cast-filled-polymer plastic.

C. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of fixture.

D. Fixture: Drinking fountain or water cooler unless one is specifically indicated.

E. Water Cooler: Electrically powered fixture for generating and delivering cooled drinking water.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each fixture indicated. Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories.



D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act" ; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act" ; for fixtures for people with disabilities.

C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

D. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI's "Directory of Certified Drinking Water Coolers" for style classifications.

E. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI 1010, "Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers," for water coolers and with ARI's "Directory of Certified Drinking Water Coolers" for type and style classifications.



22 4700 - 2 DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS

F. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 34, "Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants," for water coolers. Provide HFC 134a (tetrafluoroethane) refrigerant, unless otherwise indicated.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Filter Cartridges: Equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each type and size

indicated, but no fewer than 5 of each.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS

A. Water Coolers:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Acorn.b. Elkay Manufacturing Co.c. Halsey Taylor.d. Haws Corporation.

2.2 FIXTURE SUPPORTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Josam Co.2. MIFAB Manufacturing, Inc.3. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.4. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.5. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc.6. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

B. Description: ASME A112.6.1M, water cooler carriers. Include vertical, steel uprights with feet and tie rods and bearing plates with mounting studs matching fixture to be supported.1. Type I: Hanger-type carrier with two vertical uprights.2. Type II: Bilevel, hanger-type carrier with three vertical uprights.3. Supports for Accessible Fixtures: Include rectangular, vertical, steel uprights instead of

steel pipe uprights.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation. Verify that sizes and locations of piping and types of supports match those indicated.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.




DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 22 4700 - 3

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Use mounting frames for recessed water coolers, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Set remote water coolers on floor, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Use chrome-plated brass or copper tube, fittings, and valves in locations exposed to view. Plain copper tube, fittings, and valves may be used in concealed locations.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate and attach wall-mounting fixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install mounting frames affixed to building construction and attach recessed water coolers to mounting frames, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install fixtures level and plumb. For fixtures indicated for children, install at height required by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Use ball, gate, or globe valve. Install valves in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

E. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage system.

F. Install pipe escutcheons at wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

G. Seal joints between fixtures and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.4 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.




A. Water Cooler Testing: After electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. Test and adjust controls and safeties.



22 4700 - 4 DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS

1. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.2. Report test results in writing.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.

B. Adjust water cooler temperature settings.

3.7 CLEANING

A. After completing fixture installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.




COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 0500 - 1

SECTION 23 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.2. Transition fittings.3. Dielectric fittings.4. Mechanical sleeve seals.5. Sleeves.6. Escutcheons.7. Grout.8. HVAC demolition.9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.10. Painting and finishing.11. Concrete bases.12. Supports and anchorages.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.



D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.


F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.2. PE: Polyethylene plastic.


1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:1. Transition fittings.2. Dielectric fittings.3. Mechanical sleeve seals.



23 0500 - 2 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

4. Escutcheons.


1.4 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Prepare a 3-D model as the result of coordination meetings held amongst all trades involved in the project. Meetings shall resolve conflicts between systems prior to construction to reduce coordination in the field.

B. From the 3-D model prepare plans, drawn to ¼” – 1’-0” scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved1. Fabrication, assembly and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components,

and attachments to other work.2. Establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field

applied jackets and finishes for space required for maintenance.3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes4. Elevation of top of ducts.5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.6. Pipe layout indicating sizes, configuration, and slope if required.7. Elevation of top of pipes.8. Dimensions of main pipe runs from building grid lines9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project11. Location for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, access doors and

panels.12. Location for pipe accessories, including isolation valves, balancing valves, control valves,

access doors and panels.13. Suspended ceiling components such as lighting fixtures, air inlets and outlets, and fire

protection sprinklers.14. Structural members to which duct will be attached





C. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.







1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installations.


C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the











D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.




G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.

I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.

2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.

B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.

C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107 and CPVC four-part union. Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.


A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psigminimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.1. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig

minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.







2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Glass reinforced plastic. Include two for each sealing element.4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates


2.7 SLEEVES





E.

F. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

2.8 ESCUTCHEONS


B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips], and chrome-plated finish.



2.9 GROUT






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HVAC DEMOLITION


B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or


compatible piping material.3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug

remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork

material.5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,






B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.














a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated




concealed hinge and set screw or spring clips.g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw

or spring clips.h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate


a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring


stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips.d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel

type with concealed hinge and set screw.e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with

concealed hinge and set screw or spring clips.f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with set screw

or spring clips.g. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-plate

type.







sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.




b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board partitions.

c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.













D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.




E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal



G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent

cements.2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket

fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection

to each piece of equipment.2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final

connection to each piece of equipment.3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of

dissimilar metals.4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping

materials of dissimilar metals.




3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."


3.7 CONCRETE BASES






5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in

Division 03.



B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.



A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.






3.10 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.











COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 0513 - 1

SECTION 23 0513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturerfor field installation.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with:1. Motor controllers.2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.

B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level and rated for operation up to 6600 feet above sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

E. Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings up through 5 HP. Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading for motors over 5 HP.

F. Temperature Rise: Class B.



23 0513 - 2 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

G. Insulation: Class F.

H. Code Letter Designation:1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

I. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: 1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and

tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.

2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 for thermally protected motors.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:1. Permanent-split capacitor.2. Split phase.3. Capacitor start, inductor run.4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Bearings: Prelubricated, ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

C. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

D. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open motor power supply circuit when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)





SECTION 23 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Equipment labels.2. Warning signs and labels.3. Warning tags.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

D. .

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:1. Material and Thickness: anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having

predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than




B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,

1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.2. Letter Color: Black.3. Background Color: White.




4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than




C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inchbond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inchthick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Black.

C. Background Color: Yellow.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches.2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT

OPERATE."




4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

C. Label equipment as tagged on the schedules or per the Owner’s equipment labeling system.

3.3 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.




TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - 1

SECTION 23 0593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems.b. Dual-duct systems.c. Variable-air-volume systems.d. Multizone systems.e. Induction-unit systems.

2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:a. Domestic hot water recirculation systems.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: Within 15 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 90 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

D. Certified TAB reports.

E. Sample report forms.

F. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:1. Instrument type and make.2. Serial number.3. Application.4. Dates of use.5. Dates of calibration.



23 0593 - 2 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC


A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC NEBB or TABB.1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC NEBB or

TABB.2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC NEBB or

TABB as a TAB technician.

B. TAB Conference: Meet with Construction Manager and Commissioning Authority on approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Require the participation of the TAB field supervisor and technicians. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.1. Agenda Items:

a. The Contract Documents examination report.b. The TAB plan.c. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.d. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

C. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB

reports.2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures

specified and referenced in this Specification.

D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Construction Manageror Commissioning Authority.

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."


A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.

B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests have been satisfactorily completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TAB SPECIALISTS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, engage one of the following:




1. Checkpoint.2. Finn & Associates.3. TAB Services.4. Griffith Engineering.5. JPG Engineering.6. Double T Balancing.7. Jedi Balancing.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.

F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects

that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

I. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.

K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations.

L. .




M. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

N. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.6. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and

access to balancing devices is provided.7. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be

met.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" ASHRAE 111 NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems"SMACNA's and/or "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section.1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing."

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness

as used to construct ducts.2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with

requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,

coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.




D. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

H. Check for airflow blockages.

I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

J. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

K. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.1. Measure total airflow.

a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and

upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as

possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions.

d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.

3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.

4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat-recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.

5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions.

6. Obtain approval from Construction Manager or Commissioning Authority for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance.

7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.




1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube

traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.

2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written

instructions and calculating factors.

D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals.1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated

quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

3.7 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRCULATION SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.2. Check liquid level in expansion tank.3. Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow.5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at

fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open.

6. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.

7. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRCULATION SYSTEMS

A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-displacement pumps:1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read

pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.a. If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain approval

from Construction Manager or Commissioning Authority and comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Pumps."




2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved.a. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in

overload conditions.3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the

system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.

4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.

C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop

relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow.

E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over

indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow.

3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.

G. Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing.

H. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.2. Motor horsepower rating.3. Motor rpm.4. Efficiency rating.5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data.

3.10 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS

A. Verify proper rotation of fans.




B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.

C. Record compressor data.

3.11 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS

A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan.2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate

information.3. Check the refrigerant charge.4. Check the condition of filters.5. Check the condition of coils.6. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap.7. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.8. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements

taken. Report deficiencies.

B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished. Verify the following:1. New filters are installed.2. Coils are clean and fins combed.3. Drain pans are clean.4. Fans are clean.5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.

C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work.1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and

determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils.2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face

velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer.

3. If calculations increase or decrease the air flow rates and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.

4. Balance each air outlet.

3.12 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.

3.13 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.




B. Status Reports: Prepare biweekly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.14 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the

certified testing and balancing engineer.2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:1. Pump curves.2. Fan curves.3. Manufacturers' test data.4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and

product data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:1. Title page.2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.3. Project name.4. Project location.5. Architect's name and address.6. Engineer's name and address.7. Contractor's name and address.8. Report date.9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report.11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.b. Notable characteristics of systems.c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.b. Conditions of filters.c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.




2. Water and steam flow rates.3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.5. Terminal units.6. Balancing stations.7. Position of balancing devices.

E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.b. Location.c. Make and type.d. Model number and unit size.e. Manufacturer's serial number.f. Unit arrangement and class.g. Discharge arrangement.h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.j. Number, make, and size of belts.k. Number, type, and size of filters.

2. Motor Data:a. Motor make, and frame type and size.b. Horsepower and rpm.c. Volts, phase, and hertz.d. Full-load amperage and service factor.e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):a. Total air flow rate in cfm.b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.c. Fan rpm.d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.i. Outdoor airflow in cfm.j. Return airflow in cfm.k. Outdoor-air damper position.l. Return-air damper position.m. Vortex damper position.

F. Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup equipment reports, include the following:1. Unit Data:

a. System identification.b. Location.c. Make and type.d. Model number and unit size.e. Manufacturer's serial number.f. Fuel type in input data.g. Output capacity in Btu/h.h. Ignition type.i. Burner-control types.




j. Motor horsepower and rpm.k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz.l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor.m. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.n. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.

2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):a. Total air flow rate in cfm.b. Entering-air temperature in deg F.c. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.d. Air temperature differential in deg F.e. Entering-air static pressure in inches wg.f. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg.g. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg.h. Low-fire fuel input in Btu/h.i. High-fire fuel input in Btu/h.j. Manifold pressure in psig.k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg F.l. Operating set point in Btu/h.m. Motor voltage at each connection.n. Motor amperage for each phase.o. Heating value of fuel in Btu/h.

G. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:1. Fan Data:

a. System identification.b. Location.c. Make and type.d. Model number and size.e. Manufacturer's serial number.f. Arrangement and class.g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.

2. Motor Data:a. Motor make, and frame type and size.b. Horsepower and rpm.c. Volts, phase, and hertz.d. Full-load amperage and service factor.e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.g. Number, make, and size of belts.

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):a. Total airflow rate in cfm.b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.c. Fan rpm.d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.

H. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit number.b. Location and zone.c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.




e. Duct size in inches.f. Duct area in sq. ft..g. Indicated air flow rate in cfm.h. Indicated velocity in fpm.i. Actual air flow rate in cfm.j. Actual average velocity in fpm.k. Barometric pressure in psig.

I. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and include the following:1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.b. Location.c. Service.d. Make and size.e. Model number and serial number.f. Water flow rate in gpm.g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig.i. Pump rpm.j. Impeller diameter in inches.k. Motor make and frame size.l. Motor horsepower and rpm.m. Voltage at each connection.n. Amperage for each phase.o. Full-load amperage and service factor.p. Seal type.

2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):a. Static head in feet of head or psig.b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig.c. Actual impeller size in inches.d. Full-open flow rate in gpm.e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig.f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig.g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig.h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig.i. Final water flow rate in gpm.j. Voltage at each connection.k. Amperage for each phase.

J. Instrument Calibration Reports:1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make.b. Serial number.c. Application.d. Dates of use.e. Dates of calibration.

3.15 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check

measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the final report.




2. Check the following for each system:a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the

reading to the set point.d. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.e. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.

B. Final Inspection:1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that

testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Construction Manager or Commissioning Authority.

2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Construction Manager or Commissioning Authority.

3. Construction Manager or Commissioning Authority shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.

4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."

5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails, proceed as follows:1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing

device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.


3.16 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.




HVAC INSULATION 23 0700 - 1

SECTION 23 0700 - HVAC INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Insulation Materials:2. Insulating cements.3. Adhesives.4. Mastics.5. Lagging adhesives.6. Sealants.7. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh.8. Field-applied cloths.9. Field-applied jackets.10. Tapes.11. Securements.12. Corner angles.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).

B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.



A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 50 or less.2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.



23 0700 - 2 HVAC INSULATION

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing Coordination Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.6 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Flexible Elastomeric:1. Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for

tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.

G. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation:1. Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Type II complying with

ASTM C 553; Type II, and ASTM C 1290, with factory-applied FSK jacket.2. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:




a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.b. Johns Manville; Microlite.c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.

B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.

C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.1. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when


C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.1. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when


D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.1. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when


E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.1. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when


2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when


B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services.1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film

thickness.2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.4. Color: White.

C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness.




2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight.4. Color: White.

D. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness.2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F.3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight.4. Color: White.

E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F.3. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight.4. Color: White.

2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less

when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-

resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation.3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F.4. Color: White.

2.6 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.4. Color: White or gray.5. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when


B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.4. Color: Aluminum or grey.5. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when


C. ASJ Flashing Sealants and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.4. Color: White.5. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when





2.7 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.1. Width: 3 inches.2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.4. Elongation: 2 percent.5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.1. Width: 3 inches.2. Thickness: 6.5 mils.3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.4. Elongation: 2 percent.5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.1. Width: 2 inches.2. Thickness: 3.7 mils.3. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.4. Elongation: 5 percent.5. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.

2.8 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015

inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing or closed seal.2. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch

thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing or closed seal.3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to

accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully

annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.

2. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:a. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches

square.b. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-

diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated

capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

3. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated,




securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:a. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter.b. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation

indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches.c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated

capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

4. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:a. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.b. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-

diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.c. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.

5. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inchthick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.a. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to

ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.6. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-

thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.

D. Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy, 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel or 0.062-inchsoft-annealed, galvanized steel.

2.9 CORNER ANGLES

A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14.

B. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or 316.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of

defects.2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.




B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an

epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.




K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.

Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:1. Vibration-control devices.2. Testing agency labels and stamps.3. Nameplates and data plates.4. Manholes.5. Handholes.6. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface


3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.




2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping"irestopping

and fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated. For

penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.

2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.3. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation.3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive

to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when

available.2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet

insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.




4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

3.6 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit

area, for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and

transitions.3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,

capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal

centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-

barrier seal.b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot

intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

3.7 FINISHES

A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections.




1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.


C. Tests and Inspections:1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and

insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

2. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance.

3. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, twolocations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.9 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Items Not Insulated:1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and

ASHRAE 90.1.2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.3. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.4. Flexible connectors.5. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

3.10 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed supply-air duct insulation:1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 3/4-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.




B. Exposed supply-air duct insulation:1. Not insulated.

C. Return-air duct insulation:1. Not insulated.

D. Exhaust-air duct insulation for exhaust systems connected to exhaust fans:1. Not insulated.

E. Return-air plenum insulation:1. Not insulated.

3.11 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F:1. All Pipe Sizes:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping:1. All Pipe Sizes:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.

C. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing:1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall b:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.




SECTION 23 0900 – INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 1

SECTION 23 0900 – INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

PART 1: GENERAL

1.0 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION

A. Division 23 - Ductwork Accessories:1. Automatic Dampers

1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION

B. Division 23 - Rooftop Air Handling Equipment:1. Thermostats2. Sensors3. Controllers

1.3 PRODUCTS NOT FURNISHED OR INSTALLED BUT INTEGRATED WITH THE WORK OF THIS SECTION

A. Division 23 – Rooftop Air Conditioning Equipment1. Discharge Air Temperature Control2. Economizer Control3. Air volume control

1.4 RELATED SECTIONS

A. The General Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements are a part of these Specifications and shall be used in conjunction with this Section as a part of the Contract Documents. Consult them for further instructions pertaining to this work. The Contractor is bound by the provisions of Division 0 and Division 1.

B. The following sections constitute related work:1. Division 23 - Basic Mechanical Requirements2. Division 23 - Air Distribution Materials and Methods3. Division 23 - Refrigeration Piping4. Division 23 - Valves, Fittings, and Piping Accessories5. Division 23 - Refrigeration Equipment6. Division 23 - Air Handling Equipment7. Division 23 - Air Distribution8. Division 23 - Test and Balance9. Division 26 - Basic Electrical Requirements10. Division 26 - Basic Electrical Materials11. Division 26 - General Wiring12. Division 26 - Equipment and Motor Wiring13. Division 26 - Uninterruptible Power Supply14. Division 26 - Emergency Systems15. Division 26 - Fire Alarm Systems

1.5 DESCRIPTION

General: The system shall be an enterprise-level multiple building control system as indicated on the drawings and described in the specifications. Control functions within a building site shall be performed by localized direct digital controls linked through a peer-to-peer network of building controllers. The systemshall provide a web-based user interface and be designed to integrate multiple BACnet-based systems



230900 - 2 SECTION 23 0900 – INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

together, collect, store and display historical data and provide enterprise-wide or multiple building facilities management capabilities from a central storage and operational location.

An operator shall be able to logon to the system using a standard web browser, and without requiring system vendor-proprietary software installed on the user’s PC.

A. Direct Digital Control (DDC) technology shall be used to provide the functions necessary for control of systems defined for control on this project.

B. The control system shall accommodate simultaneous multiple user operation. Access to the control system data should be limited by operator password. An operator shall be able to log onto any workstation of the control system and have access to all designated data.

C. The control system shall be designed such that each mechanical system will operate under stand-alone control. As such, in the event of a network communication failure, or the loss of other controllers, the control system shall continue to independently operate the unaffected equipment.

D. Communication between the control panels and all workstations shall be over a high-speed network. All nodes on this network shall be peers. A network communications card shall be provided for each building control panel provided as part of the system installation.

1.6 APPROVED CONTROL SYSTEM CONTRACTORS AND MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Control System Contractors and Manufacturers:

Manufacturer Name Product LineContractor Name/Address

Contact

Trane Tracer ES Trane Tony Lanphier 303-889-9237

1. The above list of manufacturers applies to centralized server software, operator workstation configuration tool software, building controller software, the custom application programming language, Building Controllers, Custom Application Controllers, and Application Specific Controllers. All other products specified herein (i.e., sensors, valves, dampers, and actuators) need not be manufactured by the above manufacturers.


A. System Installer Qualifications1. The Installer shall have an established working relationship with the Control System

Manufacturer of not less than three years.2. The Installer shall have successfully completed Control System Manufacturer's classes

on the control system. The Installer shall present for review the certification of completed training, including the hours of instruction and course outlines upon request.

3. The installer shall have an office within 60 miles of the project site and provide 24-hourresponse in the event of a customer call.

1.8 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of all codes and ordinances of local, state and federal authorities. As a minimum, the installation shall comply with the current editions in effect 30 days prior to receipt of bids of the following codes: 1. National Electric Code (NEC)2. International Building Code (IBC)




3. International Mechanical Code (IMC)4. Underwriters Laboratories: Products shall be UL-916-PAZX listed.5. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004 (BACnet)6. ANSI/EIA/CEA-709.1 (LonTalk)

1.9 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Data values displayed on web pages (that represent live data) shall automatically refresh at a minimum rate of every 10 seconds in the browser without refreshing the entire page.

B. Data on web pages must be returned and updated on a given web page within [10] seconds on average after the web page is initially delivered, subject to network loading.

C. Graphic Display. The system shall display a graphic with a minimum of [20] dynamic points with current data displayed within [20] seconds of the request.

D. Graphic Refresh. The system shall update all dynamic points with current data within [30] seconds.

E. Object Command. The maximum time between the command of a binary object by the operator and the reaction by the device shall be [10] seconds. Analog objects shall start to adjust within [10] seconds.

F. Object Scan. All changes of state and change of analog values shall be transmitted over the high-speed network such that any data used or displayed at a controller or workstation will be current, within the prior [60] seconds.

G. Alarm Response Time. The maximum time from when an object goes into alarm to when it is viewable on an operator workstation web page shall not exceed [45] seconds.

H. Program Execution Frequency. Custom and standard applications shall be capable of running as often as once every [5] seconds. The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control.

I. Performance. Programmable Controllers shall be able to execute DDC PID control loops at a selectable frequency from at least once every [5] seconds. The controller shall scan and update the process value and output generated by this calculation at this same frequency.

J. Multiple Alarm Annunciation. Any authorized operator shall be able to view alarms through a web page interface, with up to [40]unlimited concurrent users accessing the system alarm data.




K. Reporting Accuracy. Table 1 lists minimum acceptable reporting accuracies for all values reported by the specified system.

Table 1Reporting Accuracy

Measured Variable Reported AccuracySpace Temperature ±0.5°C [±1°F]Ducted Air ±1.0°C [±2°F]Outside Air ±1.0°C [±2°F]Water Temperature ±0.5°C [±1°F]Delta-T ±0.15°C[±0.25°F]Relative Humidity ±5% RH Water Flow ±5% of full scaleAir Flow (terminal) ±10% of reading *Note 1Air Flow (measuring stations) ±5% of readingAir Pressure (ducts) ±25 Pa [±0.1 "W.G.]Air Pressure (space) ±3 Pa [±0.01 "W.G.]Water Pressure ±2% of full scale *Note 2Electrical Power ± 5% of reading *Note 3Carbon Monoxide (CO) ± 5% of readingCarbon Dioxide (CO2) ± 50 PPM

Note 1: (10%-100% of scale) (cannot read accurately below 10%)Note 2: for both absolute and differential pressureNote 3: * not including utility supplied meters

1.10 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall provide shop drawings and manufacturers’ standard specification data sheets on all hardware and software to be provided. No work may begin on any segment of this project until the Engineer and Owner have reviewed submittals for conformity with the plan and specifications. [Six (6)] copies are required. All shop drawings shall be provided to the Owner electronically as .dwg file formats.

B. Quantities of items submitted shall be reviewed by the Engineer and Owner. Such review shall not relieve the contractor from furnishing quantities required for completion.

C. Provide the Engineer and Owner, any additional information or data which is deemed necessary to determine compliance with these specifications or which is deemed valuable in documenting the system to be installed.

D. Submit the following within a maximum of [60] days of contract award:1. A complete bill of materials of equipment to be used indicating quantity, manufacturer and

model number.2. A schedule of all control valves including the valve size, model number (including pattern

and connections), flow, CV, pressure rating, and location.3. A schedule of all control dampers. This shall include the damper size, pressure drop,

manufacturer and model number.4. Provide manufacturers cut sheets for major system components. When manufacturer's

cut sheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product, the data specifically applicable to the project shall be highlighted or clearly indicated by other means. Each submitted piece of literature and drawings shall clearly reference the specification and/or drawing that the submittal is being submitted to cover. Include:




a) Centralized server hardware and softwareb) Building Controllersc) Custom Application Controllersd) Application Specific Controllerse) Operator Interface Computer(s) as specifiedf) Configuration and service software programsg) Portable Operator Workstation(s) or Service software PCs as specifiedh) Auxiliary Control Devicesi) Proposed control system riser diagram showing system configuration, device locations,

addresses, and cablingj) Detailed termination drawings showing all required field and factory terminations.

Terminal numbers shall be clearly labeledk) Points list showing all system objects, and the proposed English language object namesl) Sequence of operations for each system under control. This sequence shall be specific

for the use of the Control System being provided for this projectm) Color prints of proposed graphics with a list of points for display Submittal graphics will

meet the standards of the city

E. Project Record Documents. Upon completion of installation submit three (3) copies of record (as-built) documents. The documents shall be submitted for approval prior to final completion and include:1. Project Record Drawings. These shall be as-built versions of the submittal shop drawings.

One set of electronic media including CAD .DWG drawing files shall also be provided.2. Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists.3. Operating and Maintenance (O & M) Manual. These shall be as-built versions of the

submittal product data. In addition to that required for the submittals, the O & M manual shall include:

a) Names, address and 24-hour telephone numbers of Contractors installing equipment, and the control systems and service representative of each.

b) Operators Manual with procedures of operating the control systems including logging on/off, alarm handling, producing point reports, trending data, overriding computer control, and changing set points and other variables.

c) Programming Manual with a description of the programming language including syntax, statement descriptions including algorithms and calculations used, point database creation and modification, program creation and modification, and use of the editor.

d) Engineering, Installation and Maintenance Manual(s) that explains how to design and install new points, panels, and other hardware; preventative maintenance and calibration procedures; how to debug hardware problems; and how to repair or replace hardware.

e) A listing and documentation of all custom software created using the programming language including the point database. One set of magnetic media containing files of the software and database shall also be provided.

f) One set of electronic media containing files of all color-graphic screens created for the project.

g) Complete original issue documentation, installation, and maintenance information for all third party hardware provided including computer equipment and sensors.

h) Complete original issue media for all software provided including operating systems, programming language, operator workstation software, and graphics software.

i) Licenses and warranty documents for all equipment and systems.j) Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for all system components including

a schedule of tasks, time between tasks, and task descriptions.k) All new graphics that have been added will have “Hyperlinks” applied to return the user to

either the floor plan graphic or “Main Menu” graphic screen. Hyperlinks from standard Trane equipment graphics will return to the floor plan graphic or “Main Menu”

l) All Tracer Summit graphics specific to each building will be modified and web page imaged for incorporation into the server.




m) Graphical representation of point or system alarms display in “RED” n) Graphical representation of “BOPS” change of state are indicated by a “Green Light”o) Graphical representation of pump failures indicate in “Flashing RED” and run normal will

be indicated in GREEN.

F. Training Materials: The Contractor shall provide a course outline and training material for all training classes at least six weeks prior to the first class. The Owner reserves the right to modify any or all of the training course outline and training materials. Review and approval by Owner and Engineer shall be completed at least 3 weeks prior to first class.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Warrant all work as follows:1. Labor & materials for control system specified shall be warranted free from defects for a

period of twelve (12) months after final completion acceptance by the Owner. Control System failures during the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no charge or reduction in service to the Owner. The Contractor shall respond to the Owner's request for warranty service within 24 hours during customary business hours.

2. At the end of the final start-up/testing, if equipment and systems are operating satisfactorily to the Owner and Engineer, the Owner shall sign certificates certifying that the control system's operation has been tested and accepted in accordance with the terms of this specification. The date of Owner's acceptance shall be the start of warranty.

3. Central server and configuration tool software, project specific software, graphics, database, and firmware updates shall be provided to the Owner at no charge during warranty period. Written authorization by Owner must, however, be granted prior to the installation of such changes.

4. The system provider shall provide a web-accessible on-line resource that provides the Owner access to a question/answer forum, graphics library, user tips, upgrades, and manufacturer training schedules.

1.12 OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL

A. All project-developed hardware and software shall become the property of the Owner. These items include but are not limited to:1. Project graphic images2. Record drawings3. Project database4. Project-specific application programming code5. All documentation

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. All products used in this installation shall be new, currently under manufacture, and shall be applied in similar installations for a minimum of 2 years. The installation shall not be used as a test site for any new products unless explicitly approved by the Owner’s representative in writing. Spare parts shall be available for at least 5 years after completion of this contract.

2.2 COMMUNICATION

A. This project shall comprise of a network utilizing high-speed BACnet over IP communications between the Central Server, Building Controllers and the Operator PC Workstations




B. The Owner will provide all communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routers necessary for the internetwork. An active 10BaseT jack will be provided adjacent to each Building Control Panel and PC Workstation for connection to this network.

C. All Building Controllers shall have a communications port to allow for communications with other building controllers, service software PCs, and the centralized server. The connection shall be an Ethernet network interface node. Service software connections at a building controller may be optionally provided through an RS-232 port for Point to Point connection.

D. All database values (i.e., points, software variable, custom program variables) of any one building controller shall be readable by any other building controller on the internetwork. An operator/installer shall not be required to set up any communications services to perform internetwork value passing.

2.3 OPERATOR INTERFACE

A. Operator Interface. Owner will access BAS daily operations through use of any designatedworkstations setup through system security functions. PC hardware shall be provided by the owner and must meet the standards described in section B below. Each workstation shall be able to access all operator-level information in the system through use of a standard Microsoft Internet Explorer web browser. These workstations shall reside on the enterprise-wide network as the central server and building controllers.

2.4 APPLICATION AND CONTROL SOFTWARE

A. Furnish the following applications software for building and energy management. All software applications shall reside and run in the system controllers. Editing of applications shall occur at operator workstations served web-based user interface pages.

B. Scheduling. Provide the capability to schedule each object or group of objects in the system. Each of these schedules shall include the capability for start, stop, and optimal start actions. When a group of objects are scheduled together, provide the capability to define advances and delays for each member.

C. Optimal Start. The scheduling application shall support an optimal start algorithm. This shall calculate the thermal characteristics of a zone and start the equipment prior to occupancy to achieve the desired space temperature at the specified occupancy time. The algorithm shall calculate separate sets of heating and cooling rates for zones that have been unoccupied for less than and greater than 24 hours. Provide the ability to modify the start algorithm based on outdoor air temperature. Provide an early start limit in minutes to prevent the system from starting before an operator determined time limit.

D. Maintenance Management. The system shall monitor equipment status and generate maintenance messages based upon user designated run time, starts, and/or calendar date limits.

E. PID Control. A PID (proportional-integral-derivative) algorithm with direct or reverse action and anti-wind-up shall be supplied. The algorithm shall calculate a time-varying analog value used to position an output or stage a series of outputs. The controlled variable, set-point, and PID gains shall be user-selectable. The setpoint shall optionally be chosen to be a reset schedule.

F. Timed Override. A standard application shall be utilized to enable/disable temperature control when a user selects on/cancel at the zone sensor, workstation, or the operator display. The amount of time that the override takes precedence will be selectable from the workstation.




G. Staggered Start. This application shall prevent all controlled equipment from simultaneously restarting after a power outage. The order in which equipment (or groups of equipment) is started, along with the time delay between starts shall be user-selectable.

H. Anti-Short Cycling. All binary output points shall be protected from short cycling. This feature shall allow minimum on-time and off-time to be selected.

2.5 CUSTOM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS

A. General. Provide Custom Application Controllers to provide the performance specified in section 1 of this division. Each of these panels shall meet the following requirements.1. The Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database,

and programming requirements.2. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real time clock or be able to receive a

network broadcast time from a NetClock.3. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output

communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point information and allow central monitoring and alarms.

4. The Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall assume a predetermined failure mode, and generate an alarm notification.

5. Custom application controllers shall communicate using LonTalk. Controllers shall use FTT-10 transceivers. All communications shall be with the use of LonMark-approved SNVTs.

B. Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.

1. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in NEMA 1 type enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 0° C to 50° C [32° F to 120° F].

2. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within NEMA 4 type waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40° C to 70° C [-40° F to 158°F].

C. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communications, and processor. All low voltage wiring connections shall be made such that the controller electronics can be removed and/or replaced without disconnection of field termination wiring.

D. Memory. The Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss for at least 72 hours.

E. Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage.

2.6 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS

A. General. Application specific controllers (ASC) are microprocessor-based DDC controllers, which through hardware or firmware design are dedicated to control a specific piece of equipment. They are not fully user programmable, but are customized for operation within the confines of the equipment they are designed to serve.1. Each ASC shall be capable of stand-alone operation and shall continue to provide control

functions without being connected to the network. 2. Each ASC will contain sufficient I/O capacity to control the target system.




B. Environment. The hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.1. Controller used in conditioned ambient spaces shall be mounted in NEMA 1 type rated

enclosures. Controllers located where not to be disturbed by building activity (such as above ceiling grid), may be provided with plenum-rated enclosures and non-enclosed wiring connections for plenum cabling. All controllers shall be rated for operation at 0° C to 50° C [32° F to 120° F].

2. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within NEMA 4 type waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40° C to 65° C [-40° F to 150°F].

C. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power and communications. All wiring connections shall be clearly labeled and made to be field removable.

D. Memory. The Application Specific Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss for at least 90 days.

E. Immunity to Power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80%.

F. Transformer. Power supply for the ASC must be rated at minimum of 125% of ASC power consumption, and shall be fused or current limiting type.

G. Application Specific Controllers shall communicate using LonTalk. Controllers shall use FTT-10 transceivers. All communications shall follow LonMark profiles. ASCs which do not have a profile that applies must comply with LonMark standards, utilize SNVTs for all listed points, and be provided with a XIF file for self-documentation.

2.7 INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE

A. Hard-wired inputs and outputs may tie into the system through Building, Custom, or Application Specific Controllers.

B. All input points and output points shall be protected such that shorting of the point to itself, another point, or ground will cause no damage to the controller. All input and output points shall be protected from voltage up to 24V of any duration, such that contact with this voltage will cause no damage to the controller.

C. Binary inputs shall allow the monitoring of on/off signals from remote devices. The binary inputs shall provide a wetting current of at least 12 mA to be compatible with commonly available control devices.

D. Binary outputs shall provide for on/off operation. Terminal unit and zone control applications may use 2 outputs for drive-open, drive-close (tri-state) modulating control.

2.8 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES

A. Motorized dampers, unless otherwise specified elsewhere, shall be as follows:1. Damper frames shall be 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal or 1/8" extruded aluminum with

reinforced corner bracing.2. Damper blades shall not exceed 8" in width or 48" in length. Blades are to be suitable for

medium velocity performance (2,000 fpm). Blades shall be not less than 16 gauge.3. Damper shaft bearings shall be as recommended by manufacturer for application.4. All blade edges and top and bottom of the frame shall be provided with compressible

seals. Side seals shall be compressible stainless steel. The blade seals shall provide for a maximum leakage rate of 10 CFM per square foot at 2.5" w.c. differential pressure.




5. All leakage testing and pressure ratings will be based on AMCA Publication 500.6. Individual damper sections shall not be larger than 48" x 60". Provide a minimum of one

damper actuator per section.

B. Control dampers shall be parallel or opposed blade types as scheduled on drawings.

C. Electric damper actuators.1. The actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent

damage to the actuator throughout the rotation of the actuator. 2. Where shown, for power-failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical, spring return

mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing. 3. All rotary spring return actuators shall be capable of both clockwise or counter clockwise

spring return operation. Linear actuators shall spring return to the retracted position.4. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0-10 VDC or 0-20 mA control signal and provide a 2-

10 VDC or 4-20 mA operating range. 5. All non-spring return actuators shall have an external manual gear release to allow

manual positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered. Spring return actuators with more than 60 in-lb. torque capacity shall have a manual crank for this purpose.

6. Actuators shall be provided with a conduit fitting and a minimum 1m electrical cable and shall be pre-wired to eliminate the necessity of opening the actuator housing to make electrical connections.

7. Actuators shall be Underwriters Laboratories Standard 873 listed.8. Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full stroke cycles at the actuator's

rated torque.

D. Temperature Sensors1. Temperature sensors shall be Resistance Temperature Device (RTD) or Thermistor.2. Duct sensors shall be rigid or averaging as shown. Averaging sensors shall be a

minimum of 1.5m [5 feet] in length.3. Immersion sensors shall be provided with a separable stainless steel well. Pressure

rating of well is to be consistent with the system pressure in which it is to be installed.4. Space sensors shall be equipped with set-point adjustment, override switch, display,

and/or communication port as shown on the drawings.5. Provide matched temperature sensors for differential temperature measurement.

Differential accuracy shall be within 0.1 C [0.2 F].

E. Static Pressure Sensors1. Sensor shall have linear output signal. Zero and span shall be field-adjustable.2. Sensor sensing elements shall withstand continuous operating conditions plus or minus

50% greater than calibrated span without damage.3. Water pressure sensor shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction, proof pressure

of 150 psi minimum. Sensor shall be complete with 4-20 mA output, required mounting brackets, and block and bleed valves. Mount in location accessible for service.

4. Water differential pressure sensor shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction, proof pressure of 150 psi minimum. Over-range limit (DP) and maximum static pressure shall be 3,000 psi. Transmitter shall be complete with 4-20 mA output, required mounting brackets, and five-valve manifold. Mount in a location accessible for service.

F. Low Limit Thermostats1. Safety low limit thermostats shall be vapor pressure type with an element 6m [20 ft]

minimum length. Element shall respond to the lowest temperature sensed by any one foot section.

2. Low limit shall be manual reset only.




G. Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Sensors1. Carbon Dioxide sensors shall measure CO2 in PPM in a range of 0-2000 ppm. Accuracy

shall be +/- 3% of reading with stability within 5% over 5 years. Sensors shall be duct or space mounted as indicated in the sequence of operation.

H. Flow Switches1. Flow-proving switches shall be either paddle or differential pressure type, as shown.2. Paddle type switches (water service only) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting with pilot

duty rating (125 VA minimum). Adjustable sensitivity with NEMA 1 Type enclosure unless otherwise specified.

3. Differential pressure type switches (air or water service) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum), NEMA 1 Type enclosure, with scale range and differential suitable for intended application, or as specified.

4. Current sensing relays may be used for flow sensing or terminal devices.

I. Relays1. Control relays shall be UL listed plug-in type with dust cover. Contact rating,

configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application.2. Time delay relays shall be UL listed solid-state plug-in type with adjustable time delay.

Delay shall be adjustable plus or minus 200% (minimum) from set-point shown on plans. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application. Provide NEMA 1 Type enclosure when not installed in local control panel.

J. Transformers and Power Supplies1. Control transformers shall be UL listed, Class 2 current-limiting type, or shall be furnished

with over-current protection in both primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service.2. Unit output shall match the required output current and voltage requirements. Current

output shall allow for a 50% safety factor. Output ripple shall be 3.0 mV maximum Peak-to-Peak. Regulation shall be 0.10% line and load combined, with 50 microsecond response time for 50% load changes. Unit shall have built-in over-voltage protection.

3. Unit shall operate between 0° C and 50° C.4. Unit shall be UL recognized.

K. Current Switches1. Current-operated switches shall be self-powered, solid state with adjustable trip current.

The switches shall be selected to match the current of the application and output requirements of the DDC system.

L. Local Control Panels1. All indoor control cabinets shall be fully enclosed NEMA 1 Type construction with hinged

door, and removable sub-panels or electrical sub-assemblies. 2. Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices shall be pre-wired with

color-coded stranded conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or tie-wrapped. Terminals for field connections shall be UL listed for 600-volt service, individually identified per control/interlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control terminations for field connection shall be individually identified per control drawings.

3. Provide on/off power switch with over-current protection for control power sources to each local panel.

4. All wiring that is exposed below finished ceiling shall be mounted in EMT conduit to a minimum of 10 feet above finished floor.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION




A. The project plans shall be thoroughly examined for control device and equipment locations, and any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started.

B. The contractor shall inspect the site to verify that equipment is installable as shown, and any dis-crepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started.

C. Contractor shall provide a Site Assessment Report that provides information about the feasibility of the Customer’s existing IT and Building Automation System infrastructure to support the enterprise-wide system capabilities.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by his/her work or workers, and shall be liable for all damage thus caused.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for his/her work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted. The Contractor shall protect his/her work against theft or damage, and shall carefully store material and equipment received on site that is not immediately installed. The Contractor shall close all open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects.

3.3 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP

A. Install equipment, piping, wiring/conduit parallel to building lines (i.e. horizontal, vertical, and parallel to walls) wherever possible.

B. Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.

C. Install all equipment in readily accessible location as defined by chapter 1 article 100 part A of the NEC. Control panels shall be attached to structural walls unless mounted in equipment enclosure specifically designed for that purpose. Panels shall be mounted to allow for unobstructed access for service.

D. Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds.

E. All equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with acceptable industry specifications and standards for performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in strict adherence to local codes and standard practices.


A. All work, materials and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of applicable local, state, and federal codes and ordinances as identified in Part 1 of this Section.

B. Contractor shall continually monitor the field installation for code compliance and quality of workmanship. All visible piping and or wiring runs shall be installed parallel to building lines and properly supported.

C. Contractor shall arrange for field inspections by local and/or state authorities having jurisdiction over the work.




3.5 WIRING

A. All control and interlock wiring shall comply with the national and local electrical codes and Division 26 of these specifications. Where the requirements of this section differ with those in Division 26, the requirements of this section shall take precedence.

B. Where Class 2 wires are in concealed and accessible locations including ceiling return air plenums, approved cables not in raceway may be used provided that circuits meet NEC Class 2 (current-limited) requirements. (Low-voltage power circuits shall be sub-fused when required to meet Class 2 current-limit.)

C. All cables shall be UL listed for application, i.e., cables used in ceiling plenums shall be UL listed specifically for that purpose.

D. Do not install Class 2 wiring in conduit containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containing high voltage may not be used for low voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two (e.g. relays and transformers).

E. Where class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring shall be run parallel along a surface or perpendicular to it, and bundled, using approved wire ties at no greater than 3 m [10 ft] intervals. Such bundled cable shall be fastened to the structure, using specified fasteners, at 1.5 m [5 ft] intervals or more often to achieve a neat and workmanlike result.

F. All wire-to-device connections shall be made at a terminal blocks or terminal strip. All wire-to wire connections shall be at a terminal block, or with a crimped connector. All wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to permit access and prevent restriction to devices and terminals.

G. Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring shall be 120V. If only higher voltages are available, the Control System Contractor shall provide step down transformers.

H. All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, where possible. Any required splices shall be made only within an approved junction box or other approved protective device.

I. Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors. Maintain fire rating at all penetrations in accordance with other sections of this specification and local codes.

J. Size of conduit and size and type of wire shall be the design responsibility of the Control System Contractor, in keeping with the manufacturer's recommendation and NEC.

K. Control and status relays are to be located in designated enclosures only. These relays may also be located within packaged equipment control panel enclosures. These relays shall not be located within Class 1 starter enclosures.




L. Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations for all communication and network cabling. Network or communication cabling shall be run separately from other wiring.

CABLE/STATION/MDF/MDF EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION

The following specifications are acceptable for use:

Cable:Comscope-Uniprise or Systimax

Comscope-Uniprise/Systimax Cat 3: 4-pr AWG24 Color:Blue

Comscope-Uniprise/Systimax Cat 6: 4-pr AWG24 Color:Gray

Comscope-Uniprise/Systimax Cat 6: 4-pr AWG24 Color: White

Station Products: Comscope-Uniprise/Systimax

Patch Cords:Comscope-Uniprise/Systimax

MDF Products:CPI equipment racks,

Product installation completed by certified installer.

20 year Structure Cable system manufacturer warranty

M. Adhere to Division 26 requirements for installation of raceway.

N. This Contractor shall terminate all control and/or interlock wiring and shall maintain updated (as-built) wiring diagrams with terminations identified at the job site. A copy of all as-built documents shall be turned over to the owner upon project completion.

O. Flexible metal conduits and liquid-tight, flexible metal conduits shall not exceed 3' in length and shall be supported at each end. Flexible metal conduit less than 1/2" electrical trade size shall not be used. In areas exposed to moisture, including chiller and boiler rooms, liquid-tight, flexible metal conduits shall be used.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF SENSORS

A. Install sensors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Mount sensors rigidly and adequate for the environment within which the sensor operates.

C. Room temperature sensors shall be installed on concealed junction boxes properly supported by the wall framing.

D. All wires attached to sensors shall be air sealed in their conduits or in the wall to stop air transmitted from other areas affecting sensor readings.

E. Install duct static pressure tap with tube end facing directly down-stream of air flow.

F. Sensors used in mixing plenums, and hot and cold decks shall be of the averaging type. Averaging sensors shall be installed in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct. Each bend shall be supported with a capillary clip.

G. All pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in wells. Install all liquid temperature sensors with heat conducting fluid in thermal wells.

H. Wiring for space sensors shall be concealed in building walls. EMT conduit is acceptable within mechanical and service rooms.

I. Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north wall complete with sun shield at designated location.




3.7 CONTROL DAMPER INSTALLATION

A. Damper submittals shall be coordinated for type, quantity, and size to ensure compatibility with sheet metal design.

B. Duct openings shall be free of any obstruction or irregularities that might interfere with blade or linkage rotation or actuator mounting. Duct openings shall measure 1/4" larger than damper dimensions and shall be square, straight, and level.

C. Individual damper sections, as well as entire multiple section assemblies, must be completely square and free from racking, twisting, or bending. Measure diagonally from upper corners to opposite lower corners of each damper section. Both dimensions must be equal ±1/8".

D. Follow manufacturer's instructions for field installation of control dampers. Unless specifically designed for vertical blade application, dampers must be mounted with blade axis horizontal.

E. Install extended shaft or jackshaft per manufacturer's instructions. (Typically, a sticker on the damper face shows recommended extended shaft location. Attach shaft on labeled side of damper to that blade.)

F. Damper blades, axles, and linkage must operate without binding. Before system operation, cycle damper after installation to assure proper operation. On multiple section assemblies, all sections must open and close simultaneously.

G. Provide a visible and accessible indication of damper position on the drive shaft end.

H. Support duct-work in area of damper when required to prevent sagging due to damper weight.

I. After installation of low-leakage dampers with seals, caulk between frame and duct or opening to prevent leakage around perimeter of damper.

3.8 DUCT SMOKE DETECTION

A. Provide complete submittal data to controls system contractor for coordination of duct smoke detector interface to HVAC systems. This contractor shall provide a dry-contact alarm output in the same room as the HVAC equipment to be controlled.

i. FLOW SWITCH INSTALLATION

B. Use correct paddle for pipe diameter.

C. Install and adjust flow switch in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

D. Assure correct flow direction and alignment.

E. Mount in horizontal piping - flow switch on top of the pipe.

ii. ACTUATORS

A. Mount and link control damper actuators per manufacturer's instructions.1. To compress seals when spring return actuators are used on normally closed dampers,

power actuator to approximately 5 degrees open position, manually close the damper, and then tighten the linkage.

2. Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates damper smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed positions.




3. Valves - Actuators shall be mounted on valves with adapters approved by the actuator manufacturer. Actuators and adapters shall be mounted following manufacturer's recommendations.

iii. WARNING LABELS

A. Affix labels on each starter and equipment automatically controlled through the DDC System. Warning label shall indicate the following:

CAUTION

This equipment is operating under automatic control and may start or stop at any time without warning. Switch disconnect to “Off” position before servicing.

B. Affix labels to motor starters and control panels that are connected to multiple power sources utilizing separate disconnects. Labels shall indicate the following:

CAUTION

This equipment is fed from more than one power source with separate disconnects.Disconnect all power sources before servicing.

iv. IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING

A. All wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels, shall be labeled at each end within 2" of termination with a cable identifier and other descriptive information.

B. Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument or item served.

C. Identify control panels with minimum 1-cm (1/2”) letters on nameplates.

D. Identify all other control components with permanent labels. Identifiers shall match record documents. All plug-in components shall be labeled such that removal of the component does not remove the label.

v. CONTROLLERS

A. Provide a separate Controller for each major piece of HVAC equipment. A custom application controller may control more than one system provided that all points associated with that system are assigned to the same controller. Points used for control loop reset such as outside air orspace temperature are exempt from this requirement.

B. Building Controllers and Custom Application Controllers shall be selected to provide a minimum of [15%] spare I/O point capacity for each point type found at each location. If input points are not universal, [15%] of each type is required. If outputs are not universal, [15%] of each type is required. A minimum of one spare is required for each type of point used.1. Future use of spare capacity shall require providing the field device, field wiring, points

database definition, and custom software. No additional Controller boards or point modules shall be required to implement use of these spare points.




vi. PROGRAMMING

A. Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and trend logging. There shall be a minimum of 25% of available memory in building controllers free for future use.

B. Point Naming: System point names shall be modular in design, allowing easy operator interface without the use of a written point index.

C. Software Programming1. Provide programming for the system as written in the specifications and adhere to the

sequence strategies provided. All other system programming necessary for the operation of the system but not specified in this document shall also be provided by the Control System Contractor. Imbed into any custom-written control programs sufficient comment statements or inherent flow diagrams to clearly describe each section of the program. The comment statements shall reflect the language used in the sequence of operations.

D. Operators' Interface1. Standard Graphics. Provide graphics for each major piece of equipment and floor plan in

the building. This includes each, Air Handler and , Boiler. These standard graphics shall show all points dynamically as specified in the points list.

2. The controls contractor shall provide all the labor necessary to install, initialize, start-up, and trouble-shoot all operator interface software and their functions as described in this section. This includes any operating system software, the operator interface database, and any third party software installation and integration required for successful operation of the operator interface.

3. As part of this execution phase, the controls contractor will perform a complete test of the operator interface. Test duration shall be a minimum of [16] hours on-site. Tests shall be made in the presence of the Owner or Owner's representative.

E. Demonstration: A complete demonstration and readout of the capabilities of the monitoring and control system shall be performed. The contractor shall dedicate a minimum of 8 hours on-site with the Owner and his representatives for a complete functional demonstration of all the system requirements. This demonstration constitutes a joint acceptance inspection, and permits acceptance of the delivered system for on-line operation.

3.9 CLEANING

A. This contractor shall clean up all debris resulting from his or her activities daily. The contractor shall remove all cartons, containers, crates, etc. under his control as soon as their contents have been removed. Waste shall be collected and placed in a location designated by the Construction Manager, General Contractor., or Owner.

B. At the completion of work in any area, the Contractor shall clean all of his/her work, equipment, etc., making it free from dust, dirt and debris, etc.

C. At the completion of work, all equipment furnished under this Section shall be checked for paint damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. Any metal cabinet or enclosure that has been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.

3.10 TRAINING

A. Provide a minimum of [1] classroom training sessions, [8] hours total, throughout the contract period for personnel designated by the Owner.




B. Train the designated staff of Owner's representative and Owner to enable them to proficiently operate the system; create, modify and delete programming; add, remove and modify physical points for the system, and perform routine diagnostic and troubleshooting procedures.

C. Additional training shall be available in courses designed to meet objectives as divided into three logical groupings; participants may attend one or more of these, depending on the level of knowledge required:1. Day-to-day Operators2. Advanced Operators3. System Managers/Administrators

D. Provide course outline and materials as per Part 1 of this Section. The instructor(s) shall provide one copy of training material per student.

E. The instructor(s) shall be factory-trained instructors experienced in presenting this material.

F. Classroom training shall be done using a network of working controllers representative of the installed hardware or at the customer’s site.

3.11 ACCEPTANCE

A. The control systems will not be accepted as meeting the requirements of Completion until all tests described in this specification have been performed to the satisfaction of both the Engineer and Owner. Any tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the Contractor may be exempt from the Completion requirements if stated as such in writing by the Owner's representative. Such tests shall then be performed as part of the warranty.

ANNEX 1: INSTRUCTIONS TO OTHER CONTRACTORS

Place this in the section of the specification noted in 1.1.A.1.


ADD APPROPRIATE SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FROM APPLIED OR UNITARY SEQUENCE TEXT FILES HERE.



FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 23 1123 - 1

SECTION 23 1123 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.2. Piping specialties.3. Piping and tubing joining materials.4. Valves.5. Pressure regulators.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.




A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.2. Service Regulators: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

B. Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig or less.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following:1. Piping specialties.2. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of

selected models.3. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities.4. Dielectric fittings.5. Mechanical sleeve seals.6. Escutcheons.



D. Operation and Maintenance Data: To include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



23 1123 - 2 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING


A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.



A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging coating, and protect from direct sunlight.

D. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight.


A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located.

B. Interruption of Existing Natural-Gas Service: Do not interrupt natural-gas service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide purging and startup of natural-gas supply according to requirements indicated:1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of natural-gas

service.2. Do not proceed with interruption of natural-gas service without Owner's written

permission.

1.8 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.




2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding.

3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends.

4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:a. Material Group: 1.1.b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe.c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground.d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings,

and spiral-wound metal gaskets.e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel

underground.5. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of

epoxy, adhesive, and PE.a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.

6. Mechanical Couplings:a. Steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish.b. Buna-nitrile seals.c. Steel bolts, washers, and nuts.d. Coupling shall be capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or

steel pipe to steel pipe.e. Steel body couplings installed underground on plastic pipe shall be factory

equipped with anode.

2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24.2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69.3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75.4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating.5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig.6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel.7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.8. Maximum Length: 72 inches.

B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41.1. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector.2. Nitrile seals.3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected.4. For indoor or outdoor applications.5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.

C. Y-Pattern Strainers:1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2

and larger.3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50

percent free area.4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.




D. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end connection.


A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. See "Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.

B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.1. CWP Rating: 125 psig.2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller.

6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body.

C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Comply with ASME B16.38.1. CWP Rating: 125 psig.2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges.3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Manual Gas Shutoff Valve

Schedule" Articles.4. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.

D. Two-Piece, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company.b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc.d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.4. Port: Full for 2” and smaller, Regular for 2-1/2” and larger.5. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.6. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.7. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.8. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"

Articles.9. CWP Rating: 600 psig.10. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction.




11. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

E. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Lee Brass Company.b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.3. Plug: Bronze.4. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"

Articles.5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated.6. Pressure Class: 125 psig.7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction.8. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

F. Cast-Iron, Nonlubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.b. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div.c. Xomox Corporation; a Crane company.

2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B.3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron.4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic.5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas.6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"


authorities having jurisdiction.10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

G. Cast-Iron, Lubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Flowserve.b. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc.c. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.d. Milliken Valve Company.e. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div.f. R&M Energy Systems, A Unit of Robbins & Myers, Inc.

2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B.3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron.4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic.5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas.6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"


authorities having jurisdiction.




10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. General Requirements:1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas.2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components.3. Elevation compensator.4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for regulators

NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

B. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Canadian Meter Company Inc.b. Eaton Corporation; Controls Div.c. Harper Wyman Co.d. Maxitrol Company.e. SCP, Inc.

2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum.3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber.6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.7. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish.8. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by

authorities having jurisdiction.9. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig .


A. Dielectric Unions:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.b. Central Plastics Company.c. Hart Industries International, Inc.d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.e. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.f. Wilkins; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig.3. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials.4. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas.5. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint,

plain, or welded end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Dielectric Flanges:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.b. Central Plastics Company.c. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.d. Wilkins; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig.




3. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials.4. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas.5. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint,


C. Dielectric-Flange Kits:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.b. Calpico Inc.c. Central Plastics Company.d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig.3. Companion-flange assembly for field assembly.4. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or PE bolt

sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.5. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas.6. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint,



A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inchesdeep; colored yellow.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.

B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code to determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected.

C. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.




B. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.1. If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches below finished grade, install it in

containment conduit.

C. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints.2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating

manufacturer.3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.

D. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

E. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.

F. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

G. Locate valves for easy access.



J. Install escutcheons at penetrations of interior walls, ceilings, and floors as specified in 230500.




K. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

L. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

M. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements.

N. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.

Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.

O. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

P. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.

Q. Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed natural-gas piping and piping installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of steel pipe with welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from containment conduit to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be

installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit.2. In Floors: Install natural-gas piping with welded joints and protective coating in cast-in-

place concrete floors. Cover piping to be cast in concrete slabs with minimum of 1-1/2 inches of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other metallic structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not embed piping in concrete slabs containing quick-set additives or cinder aggregate.

3. In Floor Channels: Install natural-gas piping in floor channels. Channels must have cover and be open to space above cover for ventilation.

4. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls from physical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports.a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not require striker

barriers.5. Prohibited Locations:

a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts.

b. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions.

R. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

S. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

T. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.




U. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.

V. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve.


A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel connector.

B. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing.


A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints:1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe.4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal



D. Welded Joints:1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and

welding operators.2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds

and where damage to coating occurs during construction.

E. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas service. Install gasket concentrically positioned.

F. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not overtighten.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.




5. NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.

C. Install hangers for horizontal, corrugated stainless-steel tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:1. NPS 3/8: Maximum span, 48 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.2. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.3. NPS 3/4 and Larger: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.

B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.

D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment.

E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance.


A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for piping and valve identification.

B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.



B. Tests and Inspections:1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54, the International Fuel Gas

Code and authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.11 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Underground natural-gas piping outside of building footprint shall be one of the following:1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints for 2” and smaller2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints for 2-1/2” and larger.3. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping

B. Aboveground natural-gas piping:1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints for 2” and smaller.2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints for 2-1/2” and larger.




3.12 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 0.5 PSIG

A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be one of the following:1. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with mechanical fittings having socket or threaded ends

to match adjacent piping.2. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

B. Aboveground, distribution piping:1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints for 2” and smaller.2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints for 2-1/2” and larger.

3.13 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller at service meter:1. Bronze plug valve.

B. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger at service meter shall be one of the following:1. Bronze plug valve.2. Cast-iron, nonlubricated plug valve.

C. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller:1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.

D. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be one of the following:1. Bronze plug valve.2. Cast-iron, lubricated plug valve.

E. Valves in branch piping for single appliance:1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim for 2” and smaller.2. Bronze or cast-iron plug valve for 2-1/2” and larger.




METAL DUCTS 23 3113 - 1

SECTION 23 3113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings.3. Sheet metal materials.4. Duct liner.5. Sealants and gaskets.6. Hangers and supports.


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:1. Liners and adhesives.2. Sealants and gaskets.

B. Shop Drawings:1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections,

components, and attachments to other work.2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes.4. Elevation of top of ducts.5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.6. Fittings.7. Reinforcement and spacing.8. Seam and joint construction.9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and

panels.12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration

isolation.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal:1. Sheet metal thicknesses.2. Joint and seam construction and sealing.3. Reinforcement details and spacing.4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.



23 3113 - 2 METAL DUCTS

D. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction,

building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout.

2. Suspended ceiling components.3. Structural members to which duct will be attached.4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction.6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures.b. Air outlets and inlets.c. Speakers.d. Sprinklers.e. Access panels.f. Perimeter moldings.

E. Field quality-control reports.


A. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systemsand Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."

B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."




2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round Duct," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct and Fittings," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal

seams.2. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with butt-

welded longitudinal seams.

D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials duct construction methods. Sheet metal thickness is dictated by SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible”, or 20 gauge whichever is greater. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum

ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inchminimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.4 DUCT LINER

A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."




1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group.b. Johns Manville.c. Knauf Insulation.d. Owens Corning.

2. Maximum Thermal Conductivity:a. Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature.b. Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature.

3. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems.

4. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916.a. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less

when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Insulation Pins and Washers:1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully

annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.

2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inchthick galvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

C. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-19, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive

coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.

2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.

3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive.4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-

edge overlapping.5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,

unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary.6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm.7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not

exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.

8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:a. Fan discharges.b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than

2500 fpm or where indicated.9. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as

specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer shell without compressing insulation.a. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall open

area of 23 percent.




10. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.

2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone

activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.2. Tape Width: 4 inches.3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.4. Water resistant.5. Mold and mildew resistant.6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.7. Service: Indoor and outdoor.8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum.10. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when


C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:1. Application Method: Brush on.2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.4. Water resistant.5. Mold and mildew resistant.6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:1. Application Method: Brush on.2. Base: Synthetic rubber resin.3. Solvent: Toluene and heptane.4. Solids Content: Minimum 60 percent.5. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 60.6. Water resistant.7. Mold and mildew resistant.8. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).9. VOC: Maximum 395 g/L.10. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.11. Service: Indoor or outdoor.12. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum sheets.




E. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.2. Type: S.3. Grade: NS.4. Class: 25.5. Use: O.6. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when


F. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

G. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be

rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings

and fitting spigots.

2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

E. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

F. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

G. Trapeze and Riser Supports:1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.




D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.

3.3 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."




2. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class B.

3. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal Class A.

4. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.5. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B.6. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal

Class C.7. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal

Class B.8. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for

slabs more than 4 inches thick.4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for

slabs less than 4 inches thick.5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.




3.6 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.



B. Leakage Tests:1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for

each test.2. Test the following systems:

a. Ducts with a Pressure Class Higher Than 3-Inch wg: Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class.

3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.

4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation.5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section

being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.

6. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness

according to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems."a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media

shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.8 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

3.9 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel.1. Underground Ducts: Concrete-encased, PVC-coated, galvanized sheet steel with thicker

coating on duct exterior.

B. Supply Ducts:1. Ducts Connected to Constant-Volume Air-Handling Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg.b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 4.




d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 2.

C. Return Ducts:1. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg for plenum return, 3-inch wg for ducted return.

b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 8.d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 4.

D. Exhaust Ducts:1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:

a. Pressure Class: Negative 1-inch wg .b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure.c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 8.d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 4.

E. Intermediate Reinforcement:1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel or carbon steel coated with zinc-chromate

primer.2. PVC-Coated Ducts:

a. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.b. Not Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.

3. Stainless-Steel Ducts:a. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.b. Not Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.

4. Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum.

F. Liner:1. Supply Air Ducts: All rectangular ducts, Type I, 1 inch thick.2. Return Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick.3. Exhaust Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick for first 10 feet from fan.4. Supply Fan Plenums: None.5. Return- and Exhaust-Fan Plenums: Fibrous glass, Type II, 1 inches thick.6. Transfer Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick.

G. Elbow Configuration:1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows."a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio.2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct





2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows."a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct


3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-3, "Round Duct Elbows."a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments.1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three

segments for 90-degree elbow.2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments

for 90-degree elbow.3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments

for 90-degree elbow.4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.

b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam.

H. Branch Configuration:1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible," Figure 2-6, "Branch Connections."a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.

2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap.b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap.c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.




AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 3300 - 1

SECTION 23 3300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.2. Manual volume dampers.3. Fire dampers.4. Smoke dampers.5. Combination fire and smoke dampers.6. Flange connectors.7. Duct silencers.8. Turning vanes.9. Duct-mounted access doors.10. Flexible connectors.11. Flexible ducts.12. Duct accessory hardware.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.1. For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data. Include

breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings.

B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved.

C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.

1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.



23 3300 - 2 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inchminimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.2. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.4. Duro Dyne Inc.5. Greenheck Fan Corporation.6. Lloyd Industries, Inc.7. Nailor Industries Inc.8. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.9. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.10. Ruskin Company.11. SEMCO Incorporated.12. Vent Products Company, Inc.

B. Description: Gravity balanced.

C. Maximum Air Velocity: 3000 fpm.

D. Maximum System Pressure: 2-inch wg.

E. Frame: 0.052-inchthick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.

F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, maximum 6-inch width, 0.025-inchthick, roll-formed aluminum with sealed edges.

G. Blade Action: Parallel.

H. Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl, mechanically locked.

I. Blade Axles:1. Material: Galvanized steel.2. Diameter: 0.20 inch.




J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

L. Bearings: Synthetic pivot bushings.

M. Accessories:1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.3. Electric actuators.4. Chain pulls.5. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted.6. Screen Material: Galvanized steel.7. Screen Type: Bird.8. 90-degree stops.

2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.d. Greenheck Fan Corporatione. McGill AirFlow LLC.f. METALAIRE, Inc.g. Nailor Industries Inc.h. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.i. Ruskin Company.j. Trox USA Inc.k. Vent Products Company, Inc.

2. Standard leakage rating.3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.4. Frames:

a. Hat-shaped, galvanized-steel channels, 0.064-inch minimum thickness.b. Mitered and welded corners.c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

5. Blades:a. Multiple or single blade.b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.

6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.7. Bearings:

a. Molded synthetic.b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full

length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

B. Jackshaft:1. Size: 1-inch diameter.2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on

supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.




3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in multiple-damper assembly.

C. Damper Hardware:1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inchthick zinc-plated steel,

and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.4 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.2. Greenheck Fan Corporation.3. McGill AirFlow LLC.4. METALAIRE, Inc.5. Nailor Industries Inc.6. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.7. Ruskin Company.

B. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.

C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 4000-fpm velocity.

D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours.

E. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inchthick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch thick, as indicated, and of length to suit

application.2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of

perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must comply with sleeve requirements.

G. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

H. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inchthick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inchthick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.

I. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.

J. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.

2.5 SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.2. Greenheck Fan Corporation.3. McGill AirFlow LLC.4. METALAIRE, Inc.




5. Nailor Industries Inc.6. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.7. Ruskin Company.

B. General Requirements: Label according to UL 555S by an NRTL.

C. Frame: 16 gage galvanized steel formed into a 5” x 1” structural hat channel. Top and bottom frame members on dampers less than 17” high shall be low profile design to maximize the free area of these smaller dampers. Frame shall be 4-piece construction with 1 ½” (minimum) integral overlapping gusset reinforcements in each corner to assure square corners and provide maximum resistance to racking.

D. Blades: 16 gage galvanized steel with full length structural reinforcement and double skin airfoil shape. Each blade shall be symmetrical relative to its axle pivot point, presenting identical performance characteristics with air flowing in either direction through the damper. Provide symmetrical blades of varying sizes as required to completely fill the damper opening.

E. Blade Stops: Each blade stop (at top and bottom of damper frame) shall occupy no more than ½” of the damper opening area to allow for maximum free area and to minimize pressure loss across the damper.

F. Blade Seals: Extruded silicone rubber permanently bonded to blade edges.

G. Jamb Seals: Flexible stainless steel compression type.

H. Linkage: Concealed in jamb.

I. Axles: Minimum 1/2” diameter plated steel.

J. Bearings: Sintered bronze.

K. Leakage: Class I.

L. Temperature Rating: 350 deg F.

M. Differential Pressure Rating: 4” WG

N. Minimum Velocity Rating: 3000 FPM

O. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inchthick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall or floor application.

P. Damper Motors: two-position action, mounted outside air stream.

Q. Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz .

2.6 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.2. Greenheck Fan Corporation.3. McGill AirFlow LLC.4. METALAIRE, Inc.




5. Nailor Industries Inc.6. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.7. Ruskin Company.

B. Frame: 16 gage galvanized steel formed into a 5” x 1” structural hat channel. Top and bottom frame members on dampers less than 17” high shall be low profile design to maximize the free area of these smaller dampers. Frame shall be 4-piece construction with 1 ½” (minimum) integral overlapping gusset reinforcements in each corner to assure square corners and provide maximum resistance to racking.

C. Blades: 16 gage galvanized steel with full length structural reinforcement and double skin airfoil shape. Each blade shall be symmetrical relative to its axle pivot point, presenting identical performance characteristics with air flowing in either direction through the damper. Provide symmetrical blades of varying sizes as required to completely fill the damper opening.

D. Blade Stops: Each blade stop (at top and bottom of damper frame) shall occupy no more than ½” of the damper opening area to allow for maximum free area and to minimize pressure loss across the damper.

E. Blade Seals: Extruded silicone rubber permanently bonded to blade edges.

F. Jamb Seals: Flexible stainless steel compression type.

G. Linkage: Concealed in jamb.

H. Axles: Minimum 1/2” diameter plated steel.

I. Bearings: Sintered bronze.

J. Leakage: Class I.

K. Temperature Rating: 350 deg F.

L. Differential Pressure Rating: 4” WG

M. Minimum Velocity Rating: 3000 FPM

N. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inchthick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall or floor application.

O. Damper Motors: two-position action, located outside air stream.

P. Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz .

2.7 FLANGE CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc.3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components.




C. Material: Galvanized steel.

D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.

2.8 DUCT SILENCERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Industrial Noise Control, Inc.2. McGill AirFlow LLC.3. Ruskin Company.4. Vibro-Acoustics.5. Price HVAC. 6. IAC.

B. General Requirements:1. Factory fabricated.2. Fire-Performance Characteristics: Adhesives, sealants, packing materials, and

accessory materials shall have flame-spread index not exceeding 25 and smoke-developed index not exceeding 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

3. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

C. Shape:1. Rectangular straight with splitters or baffles.2. Round straight with center bodies or pods.3. Rectangular elbow with splitters or baffles.4. Round elbow with center bodies or pods.5. Rectangular transitional with splitters or baffles.

D. Rectangular Silencer Outer Casing: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90, galvanized sheet steel, 0.034 inch thick.

E. Round Silencer Outer Casing: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90, galvanized sheet steel.1. Sheet Metal Thickness for Units up to 24 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch thick.2. Sheet Metal Thickness for Units 26 through 40 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch thick.3. Sheet Metal Thickness for Units 42 through 52 Inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch thick.4. Sheet Metal Thickness for Units 54 through 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch thick.

F. Inner Casing and Baffles: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 galvanized sheet metal, 0.034 inch thick, and with 1/8-inch- diameter perforations.

G. Connection Sizes: Match connecting ductwork unless otherwise indicated.

H. Principal Sound-Absorbing Mechanism:1. Controlled impedance membranes and broadly tuned resonators without absorptive

media.2. Dissipative type with fill material.

a. Fill Material: Inert and vermin-proof fibrous material, packed under not less than 5 percent compression Moisture-proof nonfibrous material.

b. Erosion Barrier: Polymer bag enclosing fill, and heat sealed before assembly.3. Lining: None .




I. Fabricate silencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, rattle, or otherwise react to system pressure variations. Do not use mechanical fasteners for unit assemblies.1. Lock form and seal or continuously weld joints .2. Suspended Units: Factory-installed suspension hooks or lugs attached to frame in

quantities and spaced to prevent deflection or distortion.3. Reinforcement: Cross or trapeze angles for rigid suspension.

J. Accessories:1. Factory-installed end caps to prevent contamination during shipping.

K. Source Quality Control: Test according to ASTM E 477.1. Record acoustic ratings, including dynamic insertion loss and generated-noise power

levels with an airflow of at least 2000-fpm face velocity.2. Leak Test: Test units for airtightness at 200 percent of associated fan static pressure or

6-inch wg static pressure, whichever is greater.

2.9 TURNING VANES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.2. Duro Dyne Inc.3. METALAIRE, Inc.4. SEMCO Incorporated.5. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated

faces and fibrous-glass fill.

C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

E. Vane Construction: Single or Double wall as required by duct size.

F. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger dimensions.

2.10 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.3. Ductmate Industries, Inc.4. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.5. Greenheck Fan Corporation.6. McGill AirFlow LLC.7. Nailor Industries Inc.




8. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.9. Ventfabrics, Inc.10. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 2-11, "Access Panels - Round Duct."1. Door:

a. Double wall, rectangular.b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct

pressure class.c. Vision panel.d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches.d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two compression

latches with outside and inside handles.

C. Pressure Relief Access Door:1. Door and Frame Material: Galvanized sheet steel.2. Door: Double wall with insulation fill with metal thickness applicable for duct pressure

class.3. Operation: Open outward for positive-pressure ducts and inward for negative-pressure

ducts.4. Factory set at 10-inch wg.5. Doors close when pressures are within set-point range.6. Hinge: Continuous piano.7. Latches: Cam.8. Seal: Neoprene or foam rubber.9. Insulation Fill: 1-inchthick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.

2.11 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.2. Flame Gard, Inc.3. 3M.

B. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.

C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch carbon steel.

D. Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.

E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for minimum 2000 deg F.

F. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.




2.12 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.2. Duro Dyne Inc.3. Ventfabrics, Inc.4. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 5-3/4 inches wide attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inchthick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inchthick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd..2. Minimum Tensile Strength: 500 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling.3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F.

G. High-Temperature System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone rubber.1. Minimum Weight: 16 oz./sq. yd..2. Tensile Strength: 285 lbf/inch in the warp and 185 lbf/inch in the filling.3. Service Temperature: Minus 67 to plus 500 deg F.

H. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct.1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of

30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the

spring at rated load.3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at

start and stop.

2.13 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.2. Hart & Cooley




3. McGill AirFlow LLC.

B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black poylyester film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-barrier film.1. Pressure Rating: 6-inch wg positive for 12” diameter and under, 4-inch wg positive for

14” diameter and over.2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F.4. Insulation R-Value: 6.0.

C. Flexible Duct Connectors:1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a

worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.

2.14 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.

E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing.

H. Connect ducts to duct silencers rigidly.




I. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:1. On both sides of duct coils.2. Upstream from duct filters.3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.4. At drain pans and seals.5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and

equipment.6. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.

Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.

7. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing.8. Upstream from turning vanes.9. Upstream or downstream from duct silencers.10. Control devices requiring inspection.11. Elsewhere as indicated.

J. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

K. Access Door Sizes:1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.

L. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

M. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

N. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

O. Connect terminal units directly to supply ducts .

P. Other than at diffusers, do not use flexible ducts to change directions.

Q. Connect air terminal devices to ducts with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped in place.

R. Air terminal devices above hard ceilings shall be hard connections. Flexible ducts are not allowed.

S. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with stainless steel clamps.

T. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

U. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start and stop of fans.





A. Tests and Inspections:1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be

performed.3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of

movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed.4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and

damper.




HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 3423 - 1

SECTION 23 3423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:1. Centrifugal roof ventilators.2. Propeller fans.


A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on actual Project site elevations.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated and include the following:1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.6. Roof curbs.7. Fan speed controllers.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:1. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations.2. Ceiling suspension assembly members.3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.4. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,

access panels, and special moldings.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.





23 3423 - 2 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.

D. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.


A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp.2. Carnes Company HVAC.3. Greenheck.4. Loren Cook Company.5. Penn Ventilation.6. Twin City Fan Company

B. Description: Direct- or belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories.

C. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.1. Hinged Subbase: Galvanized-steel hinged arrangement permitting service and

maintenance.




D. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.

E. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features:1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.

F. Accessories:1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50

percent.2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan

housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.3. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire.4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base;

factory set to close when fan stops.5. Motorized Dampers: Parallel-blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator;

wired to close when fan stops.

G. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inchthick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base.1. Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting flange.2. Overall Height: 18 inches.3. Sound Curb: Curb with sound-absorbing insulation matrix.4. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope.5. Metal Liner: Galvanized steel.6. Mounting Pedestal: Galvanized steel with removable access panel.7. Vented Curb: Unlined with louvered vents in vertical sides.8.

2.2 PROPELLER FANS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp.2. Greenheck.3. Carnes Company HVAC.4. .5. Loren Cook Company.6. Penn Ventilation.

B. Description: Direct driven propeller fans consisting of fan blades, hub, housing, orifice ring, motor, drive assembly, and accessories.

C. Housing: Galvanized-steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with baked-enamel finish coat applied after assembly.

D. Steel Fan Wheels: Formed-steel blades riveted to heavy-gage steel spider bolted to cast-iron hub.

E. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, extruded-aluminum, airfoil blades fastened to cast-aluminum hub; factory set pitch angle of blades.




F. Accessories:1. Gravity Shutters: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame; interlocked blades with nylon

bearings.2. Motor-Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel, complying with OSHA specifications,

removable for maintenance.3. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.4. Weathershield Hood: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.5. Weathershield Front Guard: Galvanized steel with expanded metal screen.6. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50

percent.7. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan

housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.8. Spark Arrestance Class: A .

2.3 MOTORS

A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.


A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

B. Support units using spring isolators having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration- and seismic-control devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."1. Secure vibration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in

concrete base.

C. Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

D. Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases designed to withstand, without damage to equipment, the seismic force required by code. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

E. Secure roof-mounting fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. Refer to Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.




F. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

G. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

H. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.




A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. Adjust belt tension.6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to

indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.




C. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

E. Lubricate bearings.




DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 3713 - 1

SECTION 23 3713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Grilles, registers, and diffusers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and

performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location,

quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

B. Source quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company.2. Carnes.3. Hart & Cooley Inc.4. METALAIRE, Inc.5. Nailor Industries Inc.6. Price Industries.7. Titus.8. Tuttle & Bailey.9. Krueger.

B. Refer to schedule on drawings for descriptions of grilles, registers, and diffusers.


A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.




23 3713 - 2 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.




PACKAGED, ROOFTOP AIR-HANDLING UNITS (1.5 TO 25 TONS) 23 7413 - 1

SECTION 23 7413 - PACKAGED, ROOFTOP AIR-HANDLING UNITS (1.5 TO 25 TONS)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged, outdoor, central-station air-handling units (rooftop units) with the following components and accessories:1. Direct-expansion cooling.2. Gas furnace.3. Economizer outdoor- and return-air damper section.4. Integral, space temperature controls.5. Roof curbs.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct-digital controls.

B. ECM: Electrically commutated motor.

C. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the outdoor-air stream to reject heat during cooling operations and to absorb heat during heating operations. "Outdoor air" is defined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the system.

D. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant-Coil Fan: The outdoor-air refrigerant-coil fan in RTUs. "Outdoor air" is defined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the system.

E. RTU: Rooftop unit. As used in this Section, this abbreviation means packaged, outdoor, central-station air-handling units. This abbreviation is used regardless of whether the unit is mounted on the roof or on a concrete base on ground.

F. Supply-Air Fan: The fan providing supply air to conditioned space. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.

G. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the supply-air stream to absorb heat (provide cooling) during cooling operations and to reject heat (provide heating) during heating operations. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each RTU, including rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.




23 7413 - 2 PACKAGED, ROOFTOP AIR-HANDLING UNITS (1.5 TO 25 TONS)

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For RTUs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



A. ARI Compliance:1. Comply with ARI 210/240 and ARI 340/360 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for

RTUs.2. Comply with ARI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs.

B. ASHRAE Compliance:1. Comply with ASHRAE 15 for refrigeration system safety.2. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils.3. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

E. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995.

F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace components of RTUs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years

from date of Substantial Completion.2. Warranty Period for Gas Furnace Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not

less than five years from date of Substantial Completion.3. Warranty Period for Solid-State Ignition Modules: Manufacturer's standard, but not less

than three years from date of Substantial Completion.4. Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three

years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Fan Belts: One set for each belt-driven fan.2. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by:




1. Trane; American Standard Companies, Inc.

2.2 CASINGA. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, phosphatized, and finished with an air-dry paint coating with re-

movable access panels. Structural members shall be 16 gauge with access doors and remov-able panels of minimum 20 gauge.

B. Units cabinet surface shall be tested 1000 hours in salt spray test in compliance with ASTM B117.

C. Cabinet construction shall allow for all service/ maintenance from one side of the unit.

D. Cabinet top cover shall be one piece construction or where seams exits, it shall be double-hemmed and gasket-sealed.

E. Access Panels: Water- and air-tight panels with handles shall provide access to filters, heating section, return air fan section, supply air fan section, evaporator coil section, and unit control section.

F. Downflow unit's base pans shall have a raised 1 1/8 inch high lip around the supply and return openings for water integrity.

G. Insulation: Provide 1/2 inch thick coated fiberglass insulation on all exterior panels in contact with the return and conditioned air stream.

H. Provide openings either on side of unit or thru the base for power, control and gas connec-tions.

I. The base of the unit shall have provisions for forklift and crane lifting

2.3 FANS

A. Belt-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, single-speed motor installed on an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the casing. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted-steel fan scrolls.

B. Condenser-Coil Fan: Propeller, mounted on shaft of permanently lubricated motor.

C. Fan Motor: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

2.4 COILS

A. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil:1. Aluminum-plate fin and seamless internally grooved copper tube in steel casing with

equalizing-type vertical distributor.2. Polymer strip shall prevent all copper coil from contacting steel coil frame or condensate

pan.3. Coil Split: Interlaced.4. Condensate Drain Pan: Stainless steel formed with pitch and drain

connections complying with ASHRAE 62.1-2004.




B. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil:1. Aluminum-plate fin and seamless internally grooved copper tube in steel casing with

equalizing-type vertical distributor.

2.5 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS

A. Number of Refrigerant Circuits: Two.

B. Compressor: Hermetic, scroll, mounted on vibration isolators; with internal overcurrent and high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crankcase heater.

C. Refrigeration Specialties:1. Refrigerant: R-410A.2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element.3. Refrigerant filter/dryer.4. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch.5. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch.6. Minimum off-time relay.7. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload.8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines.9. Low-ambient kit high-pressure sensor.10. Hot-gas reheat solenoid valve with a replaceable magnetic coil.11. Four-way reversing valve with a replaceable magnetic coil, thermostatic expansion valves

with bypass check valves, and a suction line accumulator.

2.6 AIR FILTRATION

A. Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.1. Glass Fiber: MERV 5.2. Pleated: MERV 7.

2.7 GAS FURNACE

A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired; complying with ANSI Z21.47 and NFPA 54.1. CSA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of CSA.

B. Burners: Stainless steel.1. Fuel: Natural gas.2. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark or hot-surface igniter with flame sensor.3. High-Altitude Model : For Project elevations more than 2000 feet above sea level.

C. Heat-Exchanger and Drain Pan: Stainless steel.

D. Venting: Gravity vented with vertical extension.

E. Safety Controls:1. Gas Control Valve: Modulating.2. Gas Train: Single-body, regulated, redundant, 24-V ac gas valve assembly containing

pilot solenoid valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff.




2.8 DAMPERS

A. Outdoor- and Return-Air Mixing Dampers: Parallel- or opposed-blade galvanized-steel dampers mechanically fastened to cadmium plated for galvanized-steel operating rod in reinforced cabinet. Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously.1. Damper Motor: Modulating with adjustable minimum position.2. Relief-Air Damper: Gravity actuated or motorized, as required by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-

2004, with bird screen and hood.

2.9 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTION

A. Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in overcurrent protection.

2.10 CONTROLS

A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."

B. Basic Unit Controls:1. Control-voltage transformer.2. Wall-mounted thermostat or sensor with the following features:

a. Heat-cool-off switch.b. Fan on-auto switch.c. Fan-speed switch.d. Automatic changeover.e. Adjustable deadband.f. Concealed set point.g. Concealed indication.h. Unoccupied-period-override push button.i. Data entry and access port to input temperatureset points, occupied and

unoccupied periods, and output room temperature], supply-air temperature, operating mode, and status.

C. DDC Controller:1. Controller shall have volatile-memory backup.2. Safety Control Operation:

a. Smoke Detectors: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if smoke is detected. Provide additional contacts for alarm interface to fire alarm control panel.

b. Firestats: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if air greater than 130 deg Fenters unit. Provide additional contacts for alarm interface to fire alarm control panel.

c. Fire Alarm Control Panel Interface: Provide control interface to coordinate with operating sequence described in Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm."

d. Low-Discharge Temperature: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if supply air temperature is less than 40 deg F.

e. Defrost Control for Condenser Coil: Pressure differential switch to initiate defrost sequence.

3. Scheduled Operation: Occupied and unoccupied periods on 365-day clock with a minimum of four programmable periods per day.

4. Unoccupied Period:a. Heating Setback: 10 deg F.b. Cooling Setback: System off.




c. Override Operation: Two hours.5. Supply Fan Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Run fan continuously.b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle fan to maintain setback temperature.

6. Refrigerant Circuit Operation:a. Occupied Periods: Cycle or stage compressors to match compressor output to

cooling load to maintain room temperature. Cycle condenser fans to maintain maximum hot-gas pressure. Operate low-ambient control kit to maintain minimum hot-gas pressure.

b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle compressors and condenser fans for heating to maintain setback temperature.

c. Switch reversing valve for heating or cooling mode on air-to-air heat pump.d. .

7. Gas Furnace Operation:a. Occupied Periods: Modulate burner to maintain room temperature.b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle burner to maintain setback temperature.c. .

8. Economizer Outdoor-Air Damper Operation:a. Occupied Periods: Open to position indicated on the schedule, and maximum 100

percent of the fan capacity to comply with ASHRAE Cycle II. Controller shall permit air-side economizer operation when outdoor air is less than 60 deg F. Use outdoor-air temperature to adjust mixing damper. .During economizer cycle operation, lock out cooling.

b. Unoccupied Periods: Close outdoor-air damper and open return-air damper.

D. Interface Requirements for HVAC Instrumentation and Control System:1. Interface relay for scheduled operation.2. Interface relay to provide indication of fault at the central workstation and diagnostic code

storage.3. Provide BACnet compatible interface for central HVAC control workstation for the

following:a. Adjusting set points.b. Monitoring supply fan start, stop, and operation.c. Inquiring data to include supply- and room-air temperature.d. Monitoring occupied and unoccupied operations.e. Monitoring constant and variable motor loads.f. Monitoring cooling load.g. Monitoring economizer cycles.

2.11 ACCESSORIES

A. Duplex, 115-V, ground-fault-interrupter outlet with 15-A overcurrent protection. Include transformer if required. Outlet shall be energized even if the unit main disconnect is open.

B. Coil guards of painted, galvanized-steel wire.

C. Hail guards of galvanized steel, painted to match casing.

2.12 ROOF CURBS

A. Type: Vibration isolation curb.

B. Materials: Galvanized steel with corrosion-protection coating, watertight gaskets, and factory-installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards.




1. Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.a. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I or II.b. Thickness: 2 inches.

2. Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of curb.a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment,

mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet.

c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have air-stream surface coated with a temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric depending on service air velocity.

d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

C. Curb Height: 14 inches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of RTUs.

B. Examine roughing-in for RTUs to verify actual locations of piping and duct connections before equipment installation.

C. Examine roofs for suitable conditions where RTUs will be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure or concrete base, level and secure, according to NRCA's "Low-Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual," Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts." or ARI Guideline B. Install RTUs on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest roof drain or area drain.

B. Install piping adjacent to RTUs to allow service and maintenance.1. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section "Facility Natural-

Gas Piping.” Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with union and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.

C. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:1. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb.




2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under entire roof curb.

3. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

4. Install return-air duct continuously through roof structure.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. Report results in writing.

C. Tests and Inspections:1. After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for

compliance with requirements.2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation.4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls

and equipment.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

B. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing RTU and air-distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filters.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain RTUs. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."




PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS (30-150 TONS) 23 7423 - 1

SECTION 23 7423 - PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS (30-150 TONS)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Packaged rooftop unit.

B. Heat exchanger.

C. Refrigeration components.

D. Unit operating controls.

E. Roof curb.

F. Electrical power connections.

G. Operation and maintenance service.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.

B. AHRI 360 - Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment.

C. ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-1999 - Energy Standard for New Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit drawings indicating components, dimensions, weights and loadings, required clearances, and location and size of field connections.

B. Submit product data indicating rated capacities, weights, accessories, service clearances and electrical requirements.

C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit operation and maintenance data.

B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, start-up and operating instructions, installation instructions, and maintenance procedures.

1.5 HANDLING

A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting units.

B. Protect units from physical damage. Leave factory shipping covers in place until installation.



23 7423 - 2 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS (30-150 TONS)

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Provide a full parts warranty for one year from start-up or 18 months from shipment, whichever occurs first (ALL EQUIPMENT).

B. Provide 5 year extended warranty for compressors.

C. Provide 10 year limited warranty for heat exchanger.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Unit shall conform to cULus for construction of packaged air conditioner and shall have cULus label affixed to rooftop package. 1. In the event the unit is not cULus approved, the manufacturer shall, at his expense,

provide for a field inspection by a cULus representative to verify conformance to cULus standards. If necessary, contractor shall perform required modifications to the unit to comply with cULus, as directed by the cULus representative, at no additional expense to the Owner.

B. Gas-fired heating rooftop units 400 MBH and smaller shall conform to ANSI Z21.47/Canadian Standards Association (CAN/CSA-2.3) for construction of packaged air conditioner.

C. Gas-fired heating rooftop units larger than 400 MBH shall conform to UL795/Canadian Standards Association (CAN/CSA-3.2) for construction of packaged air conditioner.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide one set of filters.

B. Furnish complete set of fan belts per applicable motor.

1.9 SUMMARY

A. The contractor shall furnish and install packaged rooftop air conditioning unit(s) as shown and as scheduled on the contract documents. The unit(s) shall be installed in accordance with this specification and perform at the conditions specified, scheduled or as shown on the contract drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. GENERAL1. Manufacturer of packaged unitary rooftop products shall have had a minimum of five

years successful experience in the manufacture and service support of the rooftop packages specified herein. Manufacturers with less than five years experience in the production of rooftop units of the sizes and types specified shall not be acceptable.

B. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS1. Trane.




2.2 GENERAL UNIT DESCRIPTION

A. Unit(s) furnished and installed shall be packaged rooftops as specified on the contract documents and within these specifications. Cooling capacity ratings shall be based upon AHRI Standard 360. Unit(s) shall consist of insulated weathertight casing with compressors, air cooled condenser coil, condenser fans, evaporator coil, filters, supply and/or exhaust fan motors and drives, and unit controls

B. Unit(s) shall be single piece construction as manufactured at the factory. Package units shall be constructed for installation on a roof curb providing full perimeter support under air handler section and pedestal support under condenser section.

C. Unit(s) shall be factory run tested to include the operation of all fans, compressors, heat exchangers, and control sequences.

D. Unit(s) shall have labels, decals, and/or tags to aid in the service of the unit and indicate caution areas.

2.3 UNIT CASING

A. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, phosphatized, and finished with an air-dry paint coating durable enough to withstand a minimum of 500 consecutive-hour salt spray applications in accordance with standard ASTM B 117. Structural members shall be heavy gauge with access doors and removable panels of heavy gauge steel. Roof panels shall be sloped to provide positive drainage of rain water / melting snow away from the cabinet.

B. Access Doors: Fully gasketed hinged doors with fluted knob fasteners and chained "tie-backs" to provide access to filters, heating section, return/exhaust air fan section, supply air fan section and evaporator coil section.

C. Insulation: Provide 1/2 inch thick coated fiberglass internal liner on all exterior panels in contact with the conditioned air stream.

2.4 AIR FILTERS

A. Air Filters: Filters shall mount integral within unit casing and be accessible via hinged access panels. Filters shall be MERV 8.

2.5 FANS - SUPPLY - AND OR RETURN

A. Supply fans shall be double-inlet, forward-curved fans mounted on a common shaft with fixed sheave drive. Fans shall be factory-tested to reach rated rpm before the fan shaft passesthrough first critical speed. Fan shaft shall be mounted on two grease lubricated ball bearings designed for 200,000 hours average life. Optional extended grease lines shall allow greasing ofbearings from unit filter section. Fan motor and fan assembly shall be mounted on common base to allow consistent belt tension with no relative motion between fan and motor shafts. Entire assembly shall be resiliently mounted to the cabinet.

B. Supply fan shall be single width, single inlet 9-blade plenum fan. Fan blades shall be aluminum backward-inclined airfoil. Plenum fans shall be direct-driven. Entire assembly shall becompletely isolated from unit and fan board by 2” deflection spring isolation. Multiple fan widths shall be available to optimize efficiency. Fan shall not require routine maintenance such as fanbearing lubrication, belt tensioning and replacement, sheave alignment, and setscrew torque checks.




C. Provide forward curved exhaust fans with fixed-pitch sheave drive assemblies. Dynamically balance all fans and the unit's running fan assembly (fan mounted on actual shaft, bearings and in scroll housing) to assure smooth operation of the fan and its associated assembly. Balancing of the fan only shall not be acceptable.

D. Provide airfoil return fans with fixed-pitch sheave drive assemblies. Dynamically balance all fans and the unit's running fan assembly (fan mounted on actual shaft, bearings and in scroll housing) to assure smooth operation of the fan and its associated assembly. Balancing of the fan only shall not be acceptable.

E. Mount fan motor(s) and fan on a common base assembly and isolated from unit with spring isolators. Provide thrust restraint isolation on the fan housing/fan board to assure smooth fan startup transition and operation.

F. Fan shaft shall be mounted on grease lubricated ball bearings with extended grease lines.

G. Motor shall be Premium Efficiency, Inverter Duty Rated. Motor shall have a standard T-frame and a minimum service factor of 1.15. All drive components shall be accessible without the use of scaffolds or ladders, to facilitate periodic maintenance checks and for operator safety.

2.6 GAS FIRED HEATING SECTION

A. Provide gas-fired heating section as a completely assembled and factory-installed heating system integral to unit, cULus approved specifically for outdoor applications for use downstream from refrigerant cooling coils. Provide capability for threaded gas piping connection through side or bottom of unit.

B. Heating section shall be factory fire-tested prior to shipment.

C. Gas Burner: Forced-draft type burner with adjustable combustion air supply, gas valve, manual shut-off, direct spark or pilot ignition, and flame sensing monitoring electrode. Provide air proving switch to prevent burner operation when burner is open for maintenance or inspection.

D. Gas Burner Safety Controls: Provide electronic flame safety controls for the proving of combustion air prior to ignition sequence with pre-purge cycle, continuous electronic flame supervision, and sixty second delay between first and second stage gas valve operation on two-stage heaters.

E. Combustion Blower: Provide centrifugal type fan with built-in thermal overload protection on fan motor.

F. Heat Exchanger: Provide factory pressure- and leak-tested tubular two pass heat exchanger of free-floating design manufactured of 16-gauge stainless steel primary surface and 18-gauge stainless steel secondary surface.

2.7 EVAPORATOR COIL SECTION

A. Provide heavy duty aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. Evaporator coil shall be inter- circuited to maintain active coil face area at part load conditions. Coil shall also utilize internally enhanced tubing for maximum efficiency.

B. Provide a thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) for each refrigerant circuit. Factory pressure and leak test coil.




C. Provide pitched stainless steel drain pan to assure positive drainage of condensate from the unit casing.

2.8 AIR-COOLED CONDENSER SECTION

A. Condenser coils shall have all Aluminum Microchannel coils. All coils shall be leak tested at thefactory to ensure pressure integrity. The condenser coil is pressure tested to 650 psig. Subcooling circuit(s) shall be provided as standard.

B. Provide subcooling circuit(s) integral with condenser coils to maximize efficiency and prevent premature flashing of liquid refrigerant, to a gaseous state, ahead of the expansion valve.

C. Provide vertical discharge, direct drive fans with steel blades, and three phase motors. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, with built-in current and thermal overload protection and weathertight slinger over motor bearings.

D. Furnish unit with factory-installed electronic low ambient option to allow for operation down to 0 degrees F.

E. Provide factory-installed louvered steel coil guards around perimeter of condensing section to protect the condenser coils, refrigerant piping and control components. Louvered panels shall be fabricated from heavy gauge galvanized steel and be rigid enough to provide permanent protection for shipping and pre-/post- installation. Course wire mesh is not an acceptable material for coil guards.

2.9 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM

A. Compressor: shall be industrial grade, energy efficient direct drive 3600 RPM maximum speed reciprocating or scroll type. The motor shall of a suction gas cooled hermetic design. Compressor shall have centrifugal oil pump with dirt separator, oil sight glass, and oil charging valve. 1. If semi-hermetic reciprocating industrial grade compressors are utilized provide single

piece crankshafts, connecting rods aluminum pistons, rings to prevent gas leakage, high strength non-flexing ring type suction and discharge valves, spring loaded heads, replaceable cylinder liners, and sealing service immersed in oil. Provide removable discharge heads and hand hole covers, and discharge service valves.

2. Provide compressor with automatic capacity reduction equipment consisting of suction valve unloaders, Use electric solenoid actuated lifting mechanism. Provide for unloaded compressor start.

B. Provide with thermostatic motor winding temperature control to protect against excessive motor temperatures resulting from over-/under-voltage or loss of charge. Provide high and low pressure cutouts, and reset relay.

C. Provide factory-installed compressor lockout thermostat to prevent compressor operation at low ambient conditions.

D. Provide coil frost protection compressor unloading based on refrigerant circuit suction temperature to prevent coil frosting with minimum energy usage. As an alternate, factory-installed hot gas bypass shall be required on all VAV units to prevent coil frosting.

E. Modulating Hot Gas Reheat: unit with the hot gas reheat option shall consist of the following refrigeration components on one circuit: a hot gas reheat coil, a cooling modulating valve, a




reheat modulating valve, a reheat check valve, a reheat pump out solenoid, and additional interconnecting tubing.

2.10 RETURN SECTION

A. 100 Percent Modulating Return Fan: single width plenum fan with airfoil blade shall be mounted on a shaft with fixed sheave drive. The fan shall be dynamically balanced for the operating envelop and tested in factory before being installed in unit. The plenum fan shall be test run in unit as part of unit test. Fan operating envelop rpm shall be below first critical speed. Fan shaft shall be mounted on two grease lubricated ball or roller bearings designed for 200,000-hour average life. Extended grease lines shall be provided tallow greasing of bearings from section base rail. Fan motor and assembly shall be mounted on common base to allow consistent belt tension with no relative motion between fan and motor shafts. The entire assembly shall be completely isolated from unit with 2-inch spring isolators. Discharge dampers at unit outlet shall modulate relief airflow in response to OA / return air damper position. The return fan VFD shall operate in conjunction with the supply fan.

2.11 OUTDOOR AIR SECTION

A. Provide 100% modulating dry bulb temperature based economizer fully integrated with unit return and exhaust air dampers. Operation is through primary temperature controls that automatically modulate dampers to maintain desired leaving air temperature.

B. Provide automatic outdoor dry bulb temperature lock out sensor.

C. Provide adjustable minimum position control through the Building Automation System (BAS).

D. Provide spring-return motor for outside air damper closure during unit shut down.

2.12 DAMPERS

A. Provide low leakage dampers, 10 CFM/SF, of nominal airflow at one inch W.C. static pressure.

B. Leakage rate shall be determined in accordance with AMCA Standard 575.

2.13 DDC MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLS

A. General - Each unit shall be provided with a factory-installed, programmed and run-tested, stand-alone, microprocessor control system suitable for CV or VAV control as required. This system shall consist of temperature and pressure (thermistor and transducer) sensors, printed circuit boards, and a unit-mounted Human Interface Panel. The microprocessor shall be equipped with on-board diagnostics to indicate that all hardware, software, and all interconnected wiring and sensors are in proper operating condition. The microprocessor's memory shall be non-volatile EEPROM type, thus requiring no battery or capacitive backup to maintain all data during a power loss.

B. The Human Interface Panel shall be readily accessible for service diagnosis and programming without having to open the main control panel on the rooftop unit. Alphanumeric coded displays shall not be acceptable.1. Human Interface (HI) Panel - shall be a 16 key touch-sensitive membrane key switch

panel, password protected to prevent use by unauthorized personnel. The Human Interface Panel display shall consist of a 2 line by 40 characters per line clear Englishdisplay. The display shall be Supertwist Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) with blue




characters, 5 X 7 dot matrix with cursor, on a gray-green background for high visibility and reading ease.

C. Anti-recycle Protection - shall be provided to prevent excessive cycling, and premature wear, of the compressors, contactors and related components.

D. Internal Shaft Grounding Ring - Motors have internal bearing protection for use with VFDs.

2.14 MISCELLANEOUS FEATURES

A. Remote Set Point: Provide BAS interface for VAV/CV units to allow for remote setting of the discharge air set point.

B. Provide manual reset fire stats, one located in the discharge section of the unit set at 240 degrees F and the other in the return air section of the unit set at 135 degrees F. Fire stats shall shut down rooftop unit upon attaining set point.

C. Provide unit mounted 115 volt convenience outlet

D. Phase and Voltage Monitor - Standard on 20-75T units. Protects 3-phase equipment from phase loss, phase reversal, and low voltage. Any fault condition will produce a Failure Indicator LED, and send the unit into an emergency stop condition. cULus approved.

2.15 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A. Provide factory mounted Tracer Building Automation System control interface to operate with the Tracer Summit Series building management system. Communication link shall use a two-wire twisted pair.

B. Control Functions: Includes unit time scheduling, occupied/unoccupied mode, optimal start/stop, night-time free-cooling purge mode, two-step demand limiting, night setback, morning warm

C. Warmup, discharge air set point adjustment, universal smoke purge, building pressurization, timed override and alarm shutdown.

D. Diagnostic Functions: Shall include:1. RTM temp sensor fail2. Heat failure3. Supply air temp sensor fail4. Unocc zone cool stpt fail5. RTM auxiliary temp sensor fail6. Unocc zone heat stpt fail7. OA temp sensor failure8. Supply sir press stpt fail9. Mode input failure10. Spc static press stpt fail11. Occ zone cool setpoint fail12. Space press sensor fail13. Occ zone heat setpoint fail14. Return air temp sensor fail15. Supply air pressure sensor fail16. RA humidity sensor fail17. OA humidity sensor fail




18. Supply air static press limit19. Emergency stop20. SCM communications fail21. Supply fan fail22. MCM communications fail23. Exhaust fan fail24. Heat module comm fail25. Evap temp sensor fail26. ECEM communications fail 27. Evap temp sensor fail - Ckt 128. Evap temp sensor fail - Ckt 229. GBAS module comm fail30. TCI module comm fail31. Low press control open32. Low press control open - Ckt 133. Low press control open - Ckt 234. Tracer communications fail35. NSB panel communications36. Remote HI communications fail37. Cond temp sensor fail38. Cond temp sensor fail - Ckt 139. Cond temp sensor fail - Ckt 240. Unit HI communications fail41. VOM communications fail42. Compressor contactor fail43. Comp. contactor fail - Ckt 144. Comp. contactor fail - Ckt 245. Compressor trip46. Compressor trip - Ckt 147. Compressor trip - Ckt 248. Supply air temp cool stpt fail49. Supply air temp heat stpt fail50. Morning warmup zone sensor fail51. Freezestat trip52. Dirty filter53. NSB panel zone temp sensor fail

E. Provide capabilities for Boolean Processing and trend logs as well as "templated" reports and logs.

F. Building automation system (BAS) control shall provide the capability to "read" and sum air flows, in CFM, for user selected VAV terminal boxes.

G. BAS control shall permit auto reset of latching diagnostics.

2.16 ROOF CURB

A. Type: Vibration isolation curb.

B. Provide factory supplied roof curb, heavy gauge zinc coated steel with supply and return air gasketing. Ship knocked down and provide instructions for easy assembly.

C. Curb shall be manufactured in accordance with the National Roofing Contractors Association guidelines for rooftop equipment support.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that roof is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as required.

B. Verify that proper power supply is available.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Mount units on factory built roof mounting frame providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork. Install roof mounting curb level.

3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. The manufacturer shall furnish complete submittal wiring diagrams of the package unit as applicable for field maintenance and service.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate electric coils to

confirm proper unit operation.2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls

and equipment.




SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 23 8126 - 1

SECTION 23 8126 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat pump units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or concealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.



D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split-system units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."


C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

D. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."



23 8126 - 2 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corporation.2. Mitsubishi Heavy Industries America, Inc.; Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Division, Inc.3. Sanyo Fisher (U.S.A.) Corp..4. Daikin.

2.2 WALL-MOUNTING, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS

A. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by Architect, and discharge drain pans with drain connection.1. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.2. Drain Pan and Drain Connection: Comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.

C. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal fan.

D. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."1. Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and

permanent lubrication.

E. Filters: [Disposable, with ASHRAE 52.2 MERV rating of 6 or higher].

2.3 CEILING-MOUNTING, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS

A. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by Architect, and discharge drain pans with drain connection.1. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.2. Drain Pan and Drain Connection: Comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.




C. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal fan and integral condensate pump.

D. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."1. Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and

permanent lubrication.

E. Filters: Disposable, with ASHRAE 52.2 MERV rating of 6 or higher.

2.4 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS

A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.

B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.1. Compressor Type: Scroll.2. Two-speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and automatic-

reset low-pressure switch.3. Refrigerant: R-410A.

C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.

D. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.

E. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.

F. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to -20 deg F.

G. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.

H. Minimum Energy Efficiency: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, "Energy Standard for Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Division 23 Sections "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls."

B. Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator fan, with the following features:1. Compressor time delay.2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start.3. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting,

operating mode, and fan speed.4. Fan-speed selection, including auto setting.

C. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.

D. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.



23 8126 - 4 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS

1. Minimum Insulation Thickness: 1/2 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb.

B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure.

C. Install ground-mounting, compressor-condenser components on 4-inchthick, reinforced concrete base; 4 inches larger on each side than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.

D. Install ground-mounting, compressor-condenser components on polyethylene mounting base.

E. Install roof-mounting compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium-plated fasteners.

F. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.1. Remote Water-Cooled Condenser Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 23

Section "Hydronic Piping." Connect to supply and return with shutoff-duty valve and union or flange on the supply connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or flange on the return connection.

B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.


D. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist.2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation.




3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."




UNIT HEATERS 23 8239 - 1

SECTION 23 8239 - UNIT HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Propeller unit heaters.2. Wall and ceiling heaters with propeller fans and electric-resistance heating coils.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for each product indicated.

B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cabinet unit heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Cabinet Unit Heater Filters: Furnish one spare filter(s) for each filter installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Airtherm; a Mestek Company.2. Berko3. McQuay International.4. Modine.5. Rittling6. Sterling7. Trane.



23 8239 - 2 UNIT HEATERS

B. Description: An assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in vertical or horizontaldischarge configuration with adjustable discharge louvers.

C. Comply with UL 2021.

D. Comply with UL 823.

E. Cabinet: Removable panels for maintenance access to controls.

F. Cabinet Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel applied to factory-assembled and -tested propeller unit heater before shipping.

G. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

H. Electric-Resistance Heating Elements: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and 60-Hz hum, embedded in magnesium oxide refractory and sealed in steel or corrosion-resistant metallic sheath with fins no closer than 0.16 inch. Element ends shall be enclosed in terminal box. Fin surface temperature shall not exceed 550 deg F at any point during normal operation.1. Circuit Protection: One-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and limit

controls for high-temperature protection of heaters.2. Wiring Terminations: Stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant material.

I. Fan: Propeller type with aluminum wheel directly mounted on motor shaft in the fan venturi.

J. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."1. Motor Type: Permanently lubricated .

K. Control Devices:1. Unit-mounted thermostat.

2.2 WALL AND CEILING HEATERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Berko Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products.2. Chromalox, Inc.; a division of Emerson Electric Company.3. Indeeco.4. Markel Products; a division of TPI Corporation.5. Marley Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products.6. QMark Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products.7. Sterling8. Trane.

B. Description: An assembly including chassis, electric heating coil, fan, motor, and controls. Comply with UL 2021.

C. Cabinet:1. Front Panel: Stamped-steel louver , with removable panels fastened with tamperproof

fasteners.



UNIT HEATERS 23 8239 - 3

2. Finish: Baked enamel over baked-on primer with manufacturer's standard color selected by Architect, applied to factory-assembled and -tested wall and ceiling heaters before shipping.

3. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

D. Surface-Mounting Cabinet Enclosure: Steel with finish to match cabinet.

E. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and hum, embedded in magnesium oxide refractory and sealed in corrosion-resistant metallic sheath. Terminate elements in stainless-steel, machine-staked terminals secured with stainless-steel hardware, and limit controls for high temperature protection. Provide integral circuit breaker for overcurrent protection.

F. Fan: Aluminum propeller directly connected to motor.1. Motor: Permanently lubricated. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section

"Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

G. Controls: Unit-mounted thermostat.

H. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single field connection with disconnect switch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before unit heater installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall boxes in finished wall assembly; seal and weatherproof. Joint-sealant materials and applications are specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

B. Install cabinet unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.

C. Install propeller unit heaters level and plumb.

D. Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with all-thread hanger rods and spring hangers. Hanger rods and attachments to structure are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Vibration hangers are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

E. Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match lighting controls. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation.

F. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks of Substantial Completion.



23 8239 - 4 UNIT HEATERS

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation.2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and

electrical connections.3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature set points.




MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION 23 0500 - 1

SECTION 26 0501 - MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Forms, Conditions of the Contract, Construction Manager at Risk (CMR) Agreement including Supplemental General Conditions and Exhibits, and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 RESPONSIBILITY

A. The Divisions 21 through 23 and 26 through 28, contractor(s) shall comply with the provisions of this section. The Divisions 21 through 23 contractor(s) shall verify electrical service provided by the electrical contractor before ordering any mechanical equipment requiring electrical connections. Provide submittals of all mechanical equipment to Division 26 through 28 contractor(s).

B. The final responsibility for properly coordinating the electrical work of this section shall belong to the Divisions 21 through 23 system contractor performing the work, which requires the electrical power. 1. Each Divisions 21 through 23 contractors shall be responsible for providing power wiring

for certain devices as described in the specifications and on the drawings. This work shall be provided by a licensed electrician in accordance with all of the applicable provisions of the Division 26 through 28 specifications, NEC and local codes.

1.3 WORK INCLUDED

A. Carefully coordinate the interface between Divisions 21 through 23 (Mechanical) and Divisions 26 through 28 (Electrical), and Division 230900 (Building Management and Automatic Temperature Control Systems) before submitting any equipment for review or commencing installation.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Automatic: Pertaining to a function, operation, process or device that, under specified conditions, functions without intervention by human operator.

B. Disconnect Switch: A mechanical switching device used for changing the connections in a circuit, or for isolating a circuit or equipment from a power source.

C. Motor Control Center: A floor mounted assembly of one or more enclosed vertical sections having a common horizontal power bus and primarily containing motor starting units.

D. Control Circuit/Power: The circuit which carries the electrical signals of a control apparatus or system directing the performance of the controller but does not carry the main power circuit.

E. Manual Operation: Operation by hand without the use of any other power.

F. MC: Mechanical Contractor = Divisions 21 through 23 Contractor who furnishes motor.

G. TC: Temperature Controls = Division 230900 Contractor who furnishes control.



23 0500 - 2 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION

H. EC: Electrical Contractor = Divisions 26 through 28 Contractor.

I. FA: Fire Alarm Contractor = Division 28 Contractor who furnishes Fire Alarm System.

1.5 RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE

A. Responsibility: Unless otherwise indicated, all motors and controls for Divisions 21 through 23 equipment shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule:

ITEM -

Furnished Under

Set In Place Under

Power Wiring Under

Control Wiring Under

MC: Mechanical Contractor TC: Temperature Contractor EC: Electrical Contractor FA: Fire Alarm Con-tractor AHU Interior Marine Lights MC MC EC MC Equipment Motors MC MC EC -- Automatically or Manually Controlled Starters/Contactors: (Note 4) -Separate -Factory Mounted and Wired

EC MC

EC MC

EC EC

TC TC

Motor Speed Controllers: (Note 4) -Separate -Factory Mounted and Wired

MC MC

EC MC

EC EC

TC TC

Disconnect Switches (Note 1) EC EC EC -- Thermal Overload Switches (Note 1) EC EC EC -- Switches (Manual or Automatic other than dis-connect) (Note 2)

MC or TC MC or TC EC or TC TC or MC

Control Relays (Note 2) MC or TC MC or TC -- TC Control Transformers MC or TC MC or TC EC or TC TC Push Button Stations, Pilot Lights MC EC EC EC Thermostat and Controls: Integral with Equip-ment or Directly Attached to Ducts, Pipes, etc. (Note 2)

MC or TC EC or TC EC or TC TC

Equipment in Temperature Control Panels TC TC TC TC Standalone Control Panels (BAS) (Note 6)

TC TC TC TC

Valve Motors, Damper Motors, Solenoid Valves, etc.

TC TC TC TC

Fire Alarm System FA FA EC FA Fire Sprinkler Alarm MC MC EC FA Duct System Smoke Detectors (Note 5)

FA MC -- TC/FA

Relays for Fan Control via duct detectors (Note 5)

MC MC EC TC

Room Smoke Detectors Including Relays for Fan Control

FA FA -- FA

Equipment Interlocks TC TC -- TC Fire/Smoke and Smoke Dampers MC MC EC FA Positive Indication Devices (i.e., current sen-sors, end switches, airflow sensors)

TC TC -- FA/TC (Note 10)




B. Notes: 1. If furnished as part of factory wired equipment furnished and set in place by MC, wiring

and connections by EC. 2. If float switches, line thermostats, time switches, or other controls carry the FULL LOAD

CURRENT to any motor, they shall be furnished by MC, but they shall be set in place and connected by EC, except where such items are an integral part of the mechanical equipment, or directly attached to ducts, piping, or other mechanical equipment, they shall be furnished and set in place by MC and connected by EC. If they do not carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any motor, they shall be furnished, set in place and wired by TC contractor.

3. Not used. 4. Electrical contractor is responsible for wiring from starter to motor, unless factory wired. 5. Temperature control contractor shall provide conduit and wire from auxiliary contact in

motor starter to the detector so that the unit shuts down in all operating modes. Fire Alarm Contractor to wire from detector to fire alarm panel.

6. Each division shall be fully responsible for any control panels as called for on the drawings or specifications. a. Division 26 shall provide all power and control wiring to fire/smoke or smoke

dampers. Division 23 and 26/28 shall provide parallel control wiring (with 28 fire alarm having priority signal) to dampers and equipment utilized in both normal and smoke control modes. Refer to Fire Alarm Drawings.

b. Not Used. c. TC wiring required only when damper also serves HVAC system.

C. Power Wiring by Divisions 21 through 23: The electrical power for certain equipment provided under Divisions 21 through 23 has not been specifically indicated on the electrical drawings and must be provided by and field coordinated by the Divisions 21 through 23 trade requiring such power. Sufficient power for this purpose shall be furnished as “spare” dedicated circuit capacity in Division 26’s panelboards. All wiring, conduit and electrical devices downstream of the panelboards is the responsibility of the Divisions 21 through 23 trade requiring the power. 1. Such equipment is hereby defined as:

a. Temperature control panels and line voltage power for 24V control transformers. Required connections are included in Division 23 09 00 and will be shown by that contractor’s control submittal drawings.

1.6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Connections: 1. Connections to all controls directly attached to ducts, piping and mechanical equipment

shall be made with flexible connections.

B. Starters: 1. Provide magnetic starters for all three phase motors and equipment complete with:

a. Control transformers. b. 120V holding coils. c. Integral hand-off-auto switch. d. Auxiliary contacts required for system operation plus one (1) spare. e. Refer to Section 22 0513 - Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment

and 230513 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment.

C. Remote Switches and Pushbutton Stations:



23 0500 - 4 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION

1. Provide remote switches and/or pushbutton stations required for manually operated equipment (if no automatic controls have been provided) complete with pilot lights of an approved type lighted by current from load side of starter.

D. Special Requirements: 1. Motors, starters and other electrical equipment installed in moist areas or areas of special

conditions, such as explosion proof, shall be designed and approved for installation in such areas with appropriate enclosure.

E. Identification: 1. Provide identification of purpose for each switch and/or pushbutton station furnished.

Identification may be either engraved plastic sign permanently mounted to wall below switch, or stamping on switch cover proper. All such identification signs and/or switch covers in finished areas shall match other hardware in the immediate area.

F. Control Voltage: 1. Maximum allowable control voltage 120V. Fully protect control circuit conductors in

accordance with National Electrical Code.

G. DDC Control Interface: 1. Fully coordinate the requirements of each division with regard to supplying a complete

DDC Control System prior to submitting bid. 2. All control power shall be furnished via dedicated line voltage circuits. 3. Dedicated control circuits from electrical panelboards to DDC control panels and from

electrical panelboards to dedicated DDC J-boxes (for distributed control components such as VAV boxes), and control transformer line voltage connections shall be provided under Division 23 09 00 where required and as shown on the drawings. a. Exceptions: The following Divisions 21 through 23 equipment has been provided

with electrical power feeders downstream of the panelboards by Division 26: 1) Division 28, Fire Alarm System Panels. 2) Each Energy Recovery Ventilator (ERV) has been provided with a dedicated

combination control and unit lighting circuit(s) to its air handling room. 3) See the drawings for additional exceptions.

4. Low voltage wiring from J-boxes to distributed control components, all low voltage connections, all control panels and all control transformers (not part of unitary equipment) shall be provided under Division 23 09 00.

5. Any additional power requirements shall be the responsibility of the Division 23 09 00 Contractor requiring same, and provided at no additional cost to the owner.

1.7 CEILING AND CHASE CAVITY PRECEDENCE

A. Coordinate ceiling cavity space carefully with all trades.

B. Light fixtures have precedence in a zone, which is the same height above the ceiling as the depth of the fixture (plus 2”).

C. Examine the contract documents of all trades (e.g. all Divisions 21 through 23,and 26 through 28 drawings, the architectural floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, elevations and sections, structural plans and sections, etc.).

D. Coordinate necessary equipment, ductwork and piping locations so that the final installation is compatible with the materials and equipment of the other trades.




E. Prepare shop drawings for installation of all new work before installation to verify coordination of work between trades.

F. Provide access doors for all equipment, valves, clean-outs, actuators and controls which require access for adjustment or servicing and which are located in otherwise unaccessible locations. 1. For equipment located in “accessible locations” such as lay-in ceilings: Locate equipment

to provide adequate service clearance for normal maintenance without removing architectural, mechanical, electrical or structural elements such as the ceiling support system, electrical fixtures, etc. “Normal maintenance” includes, but is not limited to: filter changing; greasing of bearings; using p/t ports for pressure or temperature measurements; and replacement of ballasts, fuses, etc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MOTOR HORSEPOWER

A. Voltage and phase of motors shall be as scheduled on the electrical drawings.

B. Work under Divisions 21 through 23 includes coordinating the electrical requirements of all mechanical equipment with the requirements of the work under Divisions 26 through 28, before ordering the equipment. 1. If motor horsepowers are changed under the work of Divisions 21 through 23 without a

change in duty of the motor’s driven device, coordination of additional electrical work (if any) and additional payment for that work (if any) shall be provided under the section of Divisions 21 through 23 initiating the change. Increases or decreases in motor horsepower from that specified shall not be made without written approval from the Architect/Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION – (Not Used)




LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519 - 1

SECTION 26 0519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 26 0523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for control systems

communications cables and Classes 1, 2 and 3 control cables.2. Section 27 1500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cabling used for voice and

data circuits.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. VFC: Variable frequency controller.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN-2-THWN-2.

C. VFC Cable:1. Comply with UL 1277, UL 1685, and NFPA 70 for Type TC-ER cable.2. Type TC-ER with oversized crosslinked polyethylene insulation, spiral-wrapped foil plus

85 percent coverage braided shields and insulated full-size ground wire, and sunlight-and oil-resistant outer PVC jacket.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION




26 0519 - 2 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

D. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

G. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

H. VFC Output Circuits: Type XHHW-2 in metal conduit with braided shield.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 26 0533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.



LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519 - 3

F. Support cables according to Section 26 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

G. Complete cable tray systems installation according to Section 26 0536 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems" prior to installing conductors and cables.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.2. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final

Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner.Correct deficiencies determined during the scan.a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each

splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or

to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.



26 0519 - 4 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

B. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:1. Procedures used.2. Results that comply with requirements.3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.




GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 1

SECTION 26 0526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.



1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS



B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems.2. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC.3. ERICO International Corporation.4. Fushi Copperweld Inc.5. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC.6. Harger Lightning & Grounding.7. ILSCO.8. O-Z/Gedney; an EGS Electrical Group brand; an Emerson Industrial Automation

business.



B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.



http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=7341

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123456848746









26 0526 - 2 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

2.3 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section, with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet.

2.6 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Conductor Terminations and Connections:1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated.3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

2.7 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.



GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 3

B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

C. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

D. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate

any adjacent parts.2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install

bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection

is required, use a bolted clamp.

C. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.



B. Tests and Inspections:1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been

energized, test for compliance with requirements.2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,

electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.




HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 - 1

SECTION 26 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.


A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.


A. Product Data: For the following:1. Steel slotted support systems.2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.


A. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete Specifications.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Section 07 7200 "Roof Accessories."



26 0529 - 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.1. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.2. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating

applied according to MFMA-4.3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 - 3

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slottedsupport system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMCmay be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units.4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.



26 0529 - 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Section 03 3053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting


2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.




RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 1

SECTION 26 0533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.4. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters.5. Surface raceways.6. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 27 0528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, wireways,

surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, faceplate adapters, enclosures, cabinets, and handholes serving communications systems.

2. Section 28 0528 "Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security" for conduits, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving electronic safety and security.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.

B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.



26 0533 - 2 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

C. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

D. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.

E. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

F. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

H. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.1. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel or die cast.b. Type: Setscrew or compression.

2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, withoverlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

I. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.

C. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.

D. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.

E. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

F. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.

G. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less,respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

H. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.3 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.




B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5.Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.

2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

C. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

D. Metal Floor Boxes:1. Material: sheet metal.2. Type: Fully adjustable.3. Shape: Rectangular.4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb.Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.

F. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fan weighing 70 lb.1. Listing and Labeling: Paddle fan outlet boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

H. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

I. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.

J. Gangable boxes are prohibited.

K. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

L. Cabinets:1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable

front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.3. Key latch to match panelboards.4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:1. Exposed Conduit: GRC IMC RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC.2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC IMC EMT RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC.3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC,.4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC IMC. Raceway locations include

the following:a. Loading dock.b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.c. Mechanical rooms.d. Gymnasiums.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC IMC.7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 in institutional

and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type

of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use setscrew or compression, cast-metal fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings.

F. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits.Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.




B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

G. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main

reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions.4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for

each specific location.5. Change from ENT to GRC or IMC before rising above floor.

I. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways.2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

K. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

L. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

M. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

N. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

O. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

P. Surface Raceways:1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points.




2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section.Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

Q. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

R. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

S. Expansion-Joint Fittings:1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature

change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet.Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet.

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature

change.b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

temperature change.d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.

3. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

4. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

T. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

U. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

V. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

W. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

X. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

Y. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.




Z. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

AA. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

BB. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating

recommended by manufacturer.




SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 26 0544 - 1

SECTION 26 0544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.2. Sleeve-seal systems.3. Sleeve-seal fittings.4. Grout.5. Silicone sealants.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-

resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.



B. LEED Submittals:1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants, documentation including printed statement

of VOC content.2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For sealants, documentation indicating that

products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated,

plain ends.2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure

pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.



26 0544 - 2 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel.2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.1. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include

type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.2. Pressure Plates: Plastic.3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.

2.4 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below.1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal

surfaces that are not fire rated.2. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.



SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 26 0544 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls:1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway

or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are

used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches abovefinished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved

opening.2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board

assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.



26 0544 - 4 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.




IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 - 1

SECTION 26 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Identification for raceways.2. Identification of power and control cables.3. Identification for conductors.4. Underground-line warning tape.5. Warning labels and signs.6. Instruction signs.7. Equipment identification labels.8. Miscellaneous identification products.


A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.

C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.



26 0553 - 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER AND CONTROL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:1. Black letters on an orange field.2. Legend: Indicate voltage.

C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:1. Black letters on an orange field.2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING."

D. Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

E. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

F. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

2.2 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size.

B. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant, self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the cable diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.

D. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around cable it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F. Comply with UL 224.

E. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

F. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.




2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide.

B. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant, self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the conductor diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.

C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

D. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

E. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around conductor it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F. Comply with UL 224.

F. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

2.4 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

B. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

2.5 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.

B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.4. Color: Black.

C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi.3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F.5. Color: Black.




2.6 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. Attach plastic raceway and cable labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate.

G. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

H. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

I. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:1. Emergency Power.2. Power.3. UPS.

B. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.




1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded feeder and branch-circuit conductors.a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if

authorities having jurisdiction permit.b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black.2) Phase B: Red.3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:1) Phase A: Brown.2) Phase B: Orange.3) Phase C: Yellow.

d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

C. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

D. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive vinyl labels with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination.

E. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations provide self-adhesive vinyl labels with the conductor designation.

F. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.

G. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and

pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used

by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the

Operation and Maintenance Manual.

H. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.1. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.

I. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

J. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Metal-backed, butyrate warning signs.1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following:




a. Power transfer switches.b. Controls with external control power connections.

K. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

L. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor.d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with

appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by

panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.d. Switchgear.e. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the

transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.f. Enclosed switches.g. Enclosed controllers.h. Variable-speed controllers.i. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.j. Battery-inverter units.k. Monitoring and control equipment.




LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 0923 - 1

SECTION 26 0923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Standalone daylight-harvesting dimming controls.2. Indoor occupancy sensors.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 26 2726 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy sensors,

and manual light switches.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.1. Occupancy sensor data shall include coverage patterns and mounting recommendations.2. Daylight-harvesting photosensors shall include photosensitivity curve correlated to the

visual light spectrum and operating sensitivity range.

B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors.1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.3. Provide layout plans showing recommended device layout for all occupancy and daylight-

harvesting controls and sensors.


A. Field quality-control reports.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DAYLIGHT-HARVESTING DIMMING CONTROLS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Cooper Industries, Inc.2. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.4. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.5. Watt Stopper.









26 0923 - 2 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

B. System Description: Sensing daylight and electrical lighting levels, the system adjusts the indoor electrical lighting levels. As daylight increases, the lights are dimmed.1. Lighting control set point is based on two lighting conditions:

a. When no daylight is present (target level).b. When significant daylight is present.

2. System programming is done with two hand-held, remote-control tools.a. Initial setup tool.b. Tool for occupants to adjust the target levels by increasing the set point up to 25

percent, or by minimizing the electric lighting level.

C. Ceiling-Mounted Dimming Controls: Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, with separate controller unit, to detect changes in lighting levels that are perceived by the eye.1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for

intended location and application.2. Sensor Output: 0- to 10-V dc to operate electronic dimming ballasts and LED drivers.

Sensor is powered by controller unit.3. Power Pack: Sensor has 24-V dc, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.4. Light-Level Sensor Set-Point Adjustment Range: 20 to 60 fc.

2.2 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS


1. Cooper Industries, Inc.2. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.4. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.5. Sensor Switch, Inc.6. Watt Stopper.

B. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy sensors with a separate power pack.1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for

intended location and application.2. “Occupancy“ Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is

occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

3. “Vacancy“ Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, lights must be turned on manually via compatible low voltage control switch, and sensor turns them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

4. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A.Sensor is powered from the power pack.

5. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

6. Mounting:a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical

enclosure.c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged

door.7. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal

operation of sensor.











8. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure.

C. PIR Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area by their heat and movement.1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inchminimum movement of any portion of

a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in..2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. ft.

when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet when mounted on a 10-

foot- high ceiling.

D. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inchminimum movement of any portion of

a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

2.3 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS


1. Cooper Industries, Inc.2. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.4. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.5. Sensor Switch, Inc.6. Watt Stopper.

B. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox.1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for

intended location and application.2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F.3. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent at 120 V, 1200-VA fluorescent at 277 V,

and 800-W incandescent.

C. Wall-Switch Sensor:1. Standard Range: 180-degree field of view, field adjustable from 180 to 40 degrees; with a

minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft..2. Sensing Technology: Dual technology - PIR and ultrasonic.3. Switch Type: SP, field selectable automatic "on," or manual "on" automatic "off."4. Voltage: Match the circuit voltage; dual-technology type.5. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10 to 150 fc.

The switch prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is higher than the set point of the sensor.

6. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes.7. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of

the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching.










26 0923 - 4 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.

B. Install and aim motion sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Install and aim daylight photosensors per manufacturer’s recommendations. Each daylight photosensor and associated lighting control zone shall be calibrated for performance within lighting levels ranges noted on Drawings.

3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch.

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each

sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized servicerepresentative:1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry

has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.2. Test every occupancy sensor and verify coverage and time delay functions for every

device.3. Test every daylight-harvesting photosensor for both target level illumination when no

daylight is present, and when daylight is present.4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.




C. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


E. Testing and inspection reports shall be in compliance with 2012 IECC Lighting Commissioning requirements.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions.Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set

time delay to suit Owner's operations and compliance with 2012 IECC.2. For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's

operations.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstration requirements for low-voltage, programmable lighting control systems specified in Section 26 0943.13"Addressable-Fixture Lighting Controls" and Section 26 0943.23 "Relay-Based Lighting Controls."

B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices.




LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 1

SECTION 26 2200 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Distribution, dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1500 kVA.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for each type and size of transformer.2. Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances,

installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer.

B. Shop Drawings:1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Include diagrams for power wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.


A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS





262200 - 2 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

1. Eaton Electrical Sector; Eaton Corporation.2. General Electric Company.3. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc.4. Sola/Hevi-Duty; a brand of Emerson Electric Co.5. Square D; by Schneider Electric.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger: Comply with NEMA TP 1 energy-efficiency levels as verified by testing according to NEMA TP 2.

D. Cores: Electrical grade, non-aging silicon steel with high permeability and low hysteresis losses.

E. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.2. Coil Material: Copper.

F. Shipping Restraints: Paint or otherwise color code bolts, wedges, blocks, and other restraints that are to be removed after installation and before energizing. Use fluorescent colors that are easily identifiable inside the transformer enclosure.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NFPA 70, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Section 26 0548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Cores: One leg per phase.

D. Enclosure: Ventilated.1. NEMA 250, Type 2: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound to seal

out moisture and air.2. KVA Ratings: Based on convection cooling only and not relying on auxiliary fans.

E. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity.

F. Insulation Class, 30 kVA and Larger: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 150-deg C rise above 40-deg C ambient temperature.

G. Sound-Level Requirements: Maximum sound levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91, as follows:1. 51 to 150 kVA: 50 dBA.









2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.01 and IEEE C57.12.91.1. Resistance measurements of all windings at the rated voltage connections and at all tap

connections.2. Ratio tests at the rated voltage connections and at all tap connections.3. Phase relation and polarity tests at the rated voltage connections.4. No load losses, and excitation current and rated voltage at the rated voltage connections.5. Impedance and load losses at rated current and rated frequency at the rated voltage

connections.6. Applied and induced tensile tests.7. Regulation and efficiency at rated load and voltage.8. Insulation Resistance Tests:

a. High-voltage to ground.b. Low-voltage to ground.c. High-voltage to low-voltage.

9. Temperature tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 26 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.

E. Environment: Enclosures shall be rated for the environment in which they are located.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Construct concrete bases according to Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" or Section 03 3053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete" and anchor floor-mounted transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements in Section 26 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."1. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast

anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.



262200 - 4 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

B. Secure transformer to concrete base according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Secure covers to enclosure and tighten all bolts to manufacturer-recommended torques to reduce noise generation.

D. Remove shipping bolts, blocking, and wedges.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 26 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

D. Provide flexible connections at all conduit and conductor terminations and supports to eliminate sound and vibration transmission to the building structure.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

C. Tests and Inspections:1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS

for dry-type, air-cooled, low-voltage transformers. Certify compliance with test parameters.

D. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.

E. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of transformer connections.1. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant

deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.2. Perform two follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at four months and the other at

11 months after Substantial Completion.3. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of

scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning observations after remedial action.

F. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 5 percent and not being lower




than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results.

B. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.




PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 1

SECTION 26 2416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.


A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of

installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.7. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Field Quality-Control Reports:1. Test procedures used.2. Test results that comply with requirements.3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01 7823"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices.2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective

device that allows adjustments.



26 2416 - 2 PANELBOARDS

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.2. Circuit Breakers: Provide spare breakers for each panelboard as noted on Drawings.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site

testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.


D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407.


A. Environmental Limitations:1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet

work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F.b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption

of electric service.2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's

written permission.3. Comply with NFPA 70E.




1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 26 0548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets.1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.2. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged

trim cover.3. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box.

D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type.

E. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

F. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.





2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:1. Eaton Electrical Sector; Eaton Corporation.2. General Electric Company; GE Energy Management - Electrical Distribution.3. Siemens Energy.4. Square D; by Schneider Electric.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

D. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:1. Eaton Electrical Sector; Eaton Corporation.2. General Electric Company; GE Energy Management - Electrical Distribution.3. Siemens Energy.4. Square D; by Schneider Electric.

B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads,

and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:a. Instantaneous trip.b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I squared x t response.

4. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials.c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent

lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit.














PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.

B. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

C. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.

D. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

F. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

C. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 0553"Identification for Electrical Systems."




C. Acceptance Testing Preparation:1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply,

feeder, and control circuit.2. Test continuity of each circuit.

D. Tests and Inspections:




1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days

after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment:1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to

detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

E. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.




WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 1

SECTION 26 2726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.2. Tamper-resistant receptacles.3. Weather-resistant receptacles.4. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.5. Wall-switch occupancy sensors.6. Floor service outlets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

B. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished and Stage Lighting Equipment: Match plug

configurations.2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1. Cooper Wiring Devices, Inc.2. Hubbell.3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).








26 2726 - 2 WIRING DEVICES

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions:1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.

2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1. Cooper Wiring Devices, Inc.2. Hubbell.3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

C. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, and FS W-C-596.1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper Wiring Devices, Inc.b. Hubbell Premise Wiring;.c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:1. Straight blade, feed-through type.2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer

provides proper GFCI protection.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1. Cooper Wiring Devices, Inc.2. Hubbell.3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

D. Tamper-Resistant GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1. Hubbell.





















2. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

2.5 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:a. Single Pole:

1) Cooper; AH1221.2) Hubbell; HBL1221.3) Leviton; 1221-2.4) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1.

b. Two Pole:1) Cooper; AH1222.2) Hubbell; HBL1222.3) Leviton; 1222-2.4) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC2.

c. Three Way:1) Cooper; AH1223.2) Hubbell; HBL1223.3) Leviton; 1223-2.4) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC3.

d. Four Way:1) Cooper; AH1224.2) Hubbell; HBL1224.3) Leviton; 1224-2.4) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC4.

C. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches: 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors.

D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices, Inc.2. Hubbell.3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

E. Key-Operated, Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches:120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

F. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:1. Cooper Wiring Devices, Inc.2. Hubbell.3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).




http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=0&mf=04&src=pdf

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456818140&mf=04&src=pdf






























2.6 WALL-BOX DIMMERS

A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.

B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL 1472.

C. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve. On-off switch positions shall bypass dimmer module.1. 1000 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices.

D. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 5 percent of full brightness.

2.7 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic.3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and

labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.8 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.

B. Construction: Cast iron or steel with “On Grade” listed corrosion resistant coating.

C. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.

D. Service Plate: Rectangular, solid brass with satin finish.

E. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Blank cover with bushed cable opening

2.9 FINISHES

A. Device Color:1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless

otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device

boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

2. Protect floor outlets from damage. Provide temporary construction covers to keep dirt, dust, and construction debris out of boxes. Do not install trims and cover plates until floor finishes are complete.

3. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

4. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

5. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on

devices.2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid

scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,

Article 300, without pigtails.4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were

installed before building finishing operations were complete.2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect

conductors.3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last

possible moment.4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted

receptacles to the right.




F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers:1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.2. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with white-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.




FUSES 26 2813 - 1

SECTION 26 2813 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Cartridge fuses rated 600 V ac and less for use in the following:

a. Control circuits.b. Enclosed controllers.c. Enclosed switches.

2. Spare-fuse cabinets.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated:1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to

accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating,

local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment

calculations are based.2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical

characteristics, and ratings.3. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.4. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. Submit in electronic format suitable for use in coordination software (SKM Power Tools) and in PDF format.

5. Coordination charts and tables and related data.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures," include the following:1. Ambient temperature adjustment information.2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse used on the Project. Submit in electronic format suitable for use in coordination software (SKM Power Tools) and in PDF format.

4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.



262813 - 2 FUSES


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than

three of each size and type.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F or more than 100 deg F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Cooper Bussmann; a division of Cooper Industries.2. Edison; a brand of Cooper Bussmann; a division of Cooper Industries.3. Littelfuse, Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, current-limiting, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.1. Type RK-5: 250 or 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay.2. Type CC: 600-V, zero- to 30-A rating, 200 kAIC , time delay.


C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.

2.3 SPARE-FUSE CABINET

A. Characteristics: Wall-mounted steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-hinged door and key-coded cam lock and pull.1. Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 15 percent spare capacity

minimum.2. Finish: Gray, baked enamel.3. Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch- high letters on exterior of door.4. Fuse Pullers: For each size of fuse, where applicable and available, from fuse

manufacturer.







FUSES 26 2813 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses:1. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay.2. Control Transformer Circuits: Class CC, time delay, control transformer duty.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

B. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s) in location shown on the Drawings or as indicated in the field by Owner.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 0553"Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information inside of door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.




ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 2816 - 1

SECTION 26 2816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Fusible switches.2. Nonfusible switches.3. Enclosures.


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.2. Current and voltage ratings.3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).4. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.5. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of

overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Field quality-control reports.1. Test procedures used.2. Test results that comply with requirements.3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit

breakers.



26 2816 - 2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than

three of each size and type.2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site

testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.


D. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed

interruption of electric service.2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's

written permission.4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices, Inc.2. Eaton Electrical Sector; Eaton Corporation.3. General Electric Company.4. Siemens Industry, Inc.5. Square D.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 or 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors.2. Neutral Kit - Where indicated: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded

and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are

specified.4. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices, Inc.2. Eaton Electrical Sector; Eaton Corporation.3. General Electric Company.4. Siemens Industry, Inc.5. Square D.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 or 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors.2. Neutral Kit – Where Indicated: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded

and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.3. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.















26 2816 - 4 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

C. Install fuses in fusible devices.

D. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs.2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.




C. Acceptance Testing Preparation:1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component,

connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.2. Test continuity of each circuit.

D. Tests and Inspections:1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.




c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.




INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 5100 - 1

SECTION 26 5100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.2. Emergency lighting units.3. Exit signs.4. Lighting fixture supports.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 26 0923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including

photoelectric relays and occupancy sensors.2.3. Section 26 2726 "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

C. CRI: Color-rendering index.

D. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.


A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.3. Ballast, including BF.4. Energy-efficiency data.5. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps.6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with

IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type.The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be

certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer.



26 5100 - 2 INTERIOR LIGHTING

B. Shop Drawings: For non-standard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: For each non-standard or custom lighting fixture indicated in the Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule. Each Sample shall include the following:1. Lamps and ballasts, installed.2. Cords and plugs.3. Pendant support system.

D. Installation instructions.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from manufacturer.


D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each fluorescent and incandescent type and rating installed.

Furnish at least one of each type.2. Fluorescent-fixture-mounted, emergency battery pack: One for every 20 emergency

lighting unit.3. Ballasts: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of

each type.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910, complying with the IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides.


C. Comply with NFPA 70.




1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of Substantial

Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years.

2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A.

C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

D. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

E. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

G. Diffusers and Globes:1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing

and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.




H. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts.Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad,

triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

c. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

d. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts:1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11.2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served.3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level

control is indicated.4. Sound Rating: Class A.5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better.7. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher.8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.9. BF: 0.88 or higher.10. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher.11. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.11 and shall be

connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.

B. Luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed-start ballasts.

C. Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T8 Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and the following:1. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.

D. Single Ballasts for Multiple Lighting Fixtures: Factory wired with ballast arrangements and bundled extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or rewiring in the field.

E. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.1. Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens.2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 5 percent of normal.3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system and

lamp type indicated.4. Control: Coordinate wiring from ballast to control device to ensure that the ballast,

controller, and connecting wiring are compatible.

F. Ballasts for Bi-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output of

the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off.a. High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens.b. Low-Level Operation: 50 percent of rated lamp lumens.

2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode.




3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system and lamp type indicated.

2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Description: Electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.3. Sound Rating: Class A.4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better.6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.8. BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated.9. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher.

2.5 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained

power pack.a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage

drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

f. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.6 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying with UL 924.1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type.2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to

80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.




5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

6. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.7 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hoursunless otherwise indicated.

B. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches, 1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

C. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start, and suitable for use with dimming ballasts unless otherwise indicated.1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum).2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum).3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum).4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum).5. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum).6. 57 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum).7. 70 W: T4, triple tube, rated 5200 initial lumens (minimum).

2.8 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Section 26 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

C. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures:1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.2. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.

C. Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not exceed that recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify, with ballast manufacturers, maximum distance between ballast and luminaire.

D. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element.




1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners.

2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inchmetal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

E. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:1. Continuous Rows: Use straight fixture cord for wiring at one point and aircraft cable for

suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.2. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to

building structure.

F. Connect wiring according to Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least 100 hours at full voltage.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions.Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.Some of this work may be required after dark.1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect.




GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS 27 41 00 - 1

SECTION 27 41 00 – GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General [and Supplementary] Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Unless this Section contains statements, which are more definitive or more restrictive than those contained in the Owner’s General Conditions, this Specification shall not be interpreted as waiving or overruling any requirements expressed in the General Conditions.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Refer to the following Sections for specifications related to the Work: 1. 27 41 13, Architecturally Integrated Audiovisual Systems 2. 27 41 16, Integrated Audiovisual Systems and Equipment


A. AV Contractor shall coordinate with Electrical Contractor on raceway/junction box locations for audiovisual equipment and routing of audio, video, control, and power cables/raceway from equipment, terminal and pull boxes to system equipment racks.

B. Related Work: Equipment and materials provided and installed by others, unless otherwise shown in this Section or the Drawings, shall include but are not limited to: 1. Electrical outlets 2. Conduit, Raceway and Cable Tray 3. Junction Boxes 4. Telecommunications Outlets 5. Lighting Control Devices 6. Motorized Curtain or Blinds

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. The following shall service as general identifiers as specified herein. 1. Owner – Longmont Museum 2. Consultant – The Consultant is Shen Milsom & Wilke LLC. 3. Contractor - The Contractor is the firm submitting a proposal to furnish and install the Work

as defined within this Specification. 4. Project – The Project is the Audiovisual Systems installation in the facilities of the Longmont

Museum Project. 5. Work – The term “Work” means all construction and services specified within this document.

The Work includes all related labor, materials, equipment, and services provided or to be provided, by the Systems Contractor to fulfill the proposal’s obligations.

6. Drawings – The term “Drawings” means all Audiovisual Systems Drawings and associated sketches, details, riser diagrams, etc.

B. As used in the Drawings and Specifications for the Work, certain non-technical words and phrases shall be understood to have specific meanings as follows, regardless of indications to the contrary in the general Conditions or other documents governing the Work. 1. “Furnish” – Purchase and deliver to the project site complete with every necessary

appurtenance and support, all as part of the Audiovisual Systems Work. Purchasing shall



27 41 00 - 2 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS

include payment of all sales taxes and other surcharges as may be required to assure that purchased items are free of all liens, claims, or encumbrances.

2. “Install” – Unload at the delivery point at the site and perform every operation necessary to establish secure mounting and correct operation at the proper location in the project, all as part of the Work.

3. “New” – manufactured within the past year and never before used. 4. “Provide” – Furnish and Install.

C. Regardless of their usage in codes or other industry standards, certain words or phrases as used in the Drawings or Specifications for the Work, shall be understood to have the specific meanings as ascribed to them in the following list: 1. “Circuit” – Any specific run of circuitry 2. “Circuitry” – Any work which consists of wires, cables, raceways, and/or specialty wiring

method assemblies complete with associated junction boxes, pull boxes, outlet boxes, joints, couplings, splices, and connections except where limited to a lesser meaning by specific description.

3. “Concealed” – (as applied to circuitry) – Covered completely by building materials, except for penetrations (by boxes and fittings) to a level flush with the surface as necessitated by functional or specified accessibility requirements.

4. “Exposed” (as applied to circuitry) – Not covered in any way by building materials. 5. “Normal Work Conditions” – Locations within building confines that are not damp, wet, or

hazardous and that are not used for air handling. 6. “Patch Panel” – A System of terminal blocks, patch cords, and backboards that facilitate

administration of cross-connecting cables. 7. “Raceway” – Any pipe, duct, extended enclosure, or conduit (as specified for a particular

System) which is used to contain wires and which is of such nature as to require that the wires be installed by a “pulling in” procedure.

8. “Riser” – Shall refer to the portion of the installation that transmits between building floors (or between Audiovisual Systems rooms), also referred to as “Backbone Cabling”.

9. “Audiovisual Closet” – The enclosed area or room specifically designated for the routing, termination, and/or cross connecting of Audiovisual Systems cable (i.e. riser cable) to other Audiovisual Systems cable and/or equipment.

10. “AV Systems Control Room” and/or “AV Systems Headend” – The enclosed area or room specifically designated for the routing, termination, and/or cross connecting of Audiovisual System cable (i.e. riser cable) to other Audiovisual System cable, and/or equipment and racks.

11. “AV System(s)” – Audiovisual System(s), includes all components contained herein that work in conjunction to create and completely integrated and fully functioning system as described within the Drawings and Specifications.

12. “Audiovisual Systems Wiring” – see “Circuitry”. 13. “Audiovisual Systems Work” – see “Work.” 14. “Standard” (as applied to wiring devices) – Not of a separately designated individual type. 15. “System” – see “AV Systems.” 16. “Wiring” – see “Circuitry.” 17. “AV” – Audiovisual. 18. “AVC” – Audiovisual Systems Contractor. 19. “OFOI” – Owner Furnished Owner Installed 20. “OFCI” – Owner Furnished Contractor Installed 21. “OFCI” – Contractor Furnished Contractor Installed 22. “NIC” – Not in Contract.

D. The term “shall” is mandatory; the term “will” is informative; the term “should” is advisory; and the term “provide” means furnish and install.

E. Where the word “conduit” is used without specific reference to type, it shall be understood to mean “raceway.”




F. The term “custom” indicates systems or components that shall be designed and fabricated by the Contractor base on the drawings and specifications.

G. The term “future” indicates systems or components that will be added to the system later but shall be provisioned for now.

H. The term “equal” indicates systems or equipment that is of the same size, color, design, function, efficiency, etcKas of that specified.

I. Reference to “U.L (materials Construction) Standards” shall mean the “Standards for Safety” published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

1.5 SCOPE OF WORK

A. General: Provide Audiovisual systems design, engineering, and installation within all phases and spaces of the Longmont Museum Project. Systems are to include all devices, equipment, installation, programming and commissioning in accordance with requirements of the contract documents and drawings. 1. The Work detailed within the Contract Documents has been specified to meet certain

requirements for performance, appearance, and costs. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to implement the guidelines and requirements contained in the Contract Documents and translate them into a complete design package containing all elements necessary for a complete, operational, a functionally integrated Audiovisual System(s).

2. Provide all work as detailed in the Contract Documents as a turnkey installation including all material, labor, engineering, warranties, taxes, freight, and permits. Only items and requirements specifically stated to be provided by others shall not be a requirement for this Section of the Work.

B. Work Included: 1. Refer to Sections contained in 27 41 16 for scope requirement and System descriptions for

each room type.

C. Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Installation of raceway, pull-boxes, plywood backboards and floor-boxes (provided under

electrical Work). Coordination is required within the design to verify the appropriate raceways are in place.

2. Installation and termination of network systems, provided under Telecom. 3. Cutting, patching and painting of walls, unless damaged performing the work described

herein.

D. Coordinated Work 1. Coordinate with related trades to schedule the Work and ensure a complete installation in

accordance with the schedule outlined by the Owner. 2. Coordinate all IP device requirements with the Data vendor, Owner, and Contractor. 3. Coordinate all network connectivity requirements with the low voltage cabling contractor and

Owner. 4. It shall be the responsibility of the audiovisual systems contractor to provide to the cabling

contractor with detailed cable installation schedules outlining cabling requirements to all locations.

1.6 GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. The Contractor represents that they are familiar with, and have expertise in the Work of this nature and scope. The Contractor further agrees that they shall provide all Work as may be required to make a complete and fully functioning system of that which may not be fully defined in the Contract Documents.




B. The Contractor shall comply with all of the regulations, including safety regulations of national, city, local and other government agencies having jurisdiction concerning the work of the Contractor. The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, codes, rules, and regulations bearing on the conduct of the Work. If the Contractor performs any work, which is contrary to such laws, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, they shall make all changes for compliance and bear all associated costs.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible to provide and maintain a storage facility. If this storage facility is required to be on-site it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to coordinate the size and spatial requirements with the Owner. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the storage facility and all contents, unless otherwise indicated by the Owner.

D. The Contractor shall provide all protection necessary to safeguard their work from damage by their operations and the operations of others. Unless the Contractor proves to the Owner’s satisfaction that the Work has been damaged by others, the Contractor shall promptly repair, adjust, and clean all defective installations and bear all associated costs.

E. All of the Contractor's work shall be tested and inspected by all authorities having jurisdiction and in accordance with all Specifications. The Contractor shall coordinate and cooperate fully and shall provide at no additional cost to the Owner, manpower, blueprints, facilities, scaffolds, etc. to reasonably assist the inspectors.

F. The project documentation is, in general, diagrammatic and/or developed to communicate design intent. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all devices and/or equipment with the Owner prior to installation based on the existing field conditions.

G. The Contractor shall examine the site and the Programmatic Documents and review with the Owner the designated areas of access, delivery, and storage for the Contractor's use. The Contractor agrees that such areas are satisfactory and sufficient for their needs in the completion of their work and in conformance with the terms of this Contract.

H. The Owner reserves the right to furnish any materials necessary for the Project.

I. All permits required for any part of the Contractor's work shall be procured and paid for by the Contractor. The Contractor shall determine all permits required and transmit this information to the Owner. If it is determined that the Contractor’s work falls reasonably within another party’s permit (General Contractor, Electrician, EtcK) the Contractor shall not be required to procure additional permits provided written authorization is provided to the Contractor by the party holding the permit.

J. The Contractor warrants that both they and their subcontractors are licensed as required by the authorities having jurisdiction and as required by local ordinances.

K. The Contractor must state if they intend to utilize a subcontractor, and provide said subcontractor's name and address. The subcontractor shall comply with all the same rules, regulations, laws and codes, licenses, etc. as required by the Contractor and as specified herein. The Owner reserves the right to approve or disapprove any subcontractor proposed by Contractor.

L. The Owner shall provide to the Contractor AutoCAD backgrounds for all required floor plans for the facility. All pre-fabrication and record drawings required for the Project and as stated herein, shall be completed within the latest version of AutoCAD.

M. The Contractor, upon receiving notice from Owner that the Contractor has furnished inferior, improper or unsound work or materials (including equipment), or work or materials at variance with that which is specified, will, within 24 hours, proceed to remove such work or materials and




make good all other work or materials damaged thereby, and, at the option of the Owner, the Contractor shall immediately replace such work or materials with work or materials as specified. The removal, replacement, and repair shall be performed at such times and with manpower sufficient, in the judgment of the Owner, so as to avoid disturbance to occupants, or other ongoing work for the Project.

N. If the Contractor does not remove such unsound Work within a reasonable time, the Owner may remove it and may store the material at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the expenses of such removal within ten (10) days time thereafter, the Owner may, upon written notice, sell such materials at auction or at private sale and shall account for the net proceeds thereof, after deducting all the costs and expenses that should have been borne by the Contractor and all expenses of the sale. 1. The Owner shall have the authority at all times, until final completion and acceptance of the

Work, to inspect and reject work and materials which in its judgment are not in conformity with the Drawings and Details, Room Data Sheets and Specifications, and its decision in regard to character and value of Work shall be final and conclusive on both contracting parties. If the Owner permits said Work or materials to remain, the Owner shall be allowed the difference in value or shall at its election have the right to have said Work or materials repaired or replaced, as well as the damage caused thereby, at the expense of the Contractor, at any time within one (1) year after the completion of the entire project, or within such longer period as may be covered by any guaranty; and neither payments made to the Contractor, nor any other acts of the Owner, shall be construed as evidence of acceptance, waiver, or estoppels.

2. Any expense incurred by the Owner in connection with the foregoing, shall be borne by the Contractor, and the Owner may withhold money due to the Contractor or recover money already paid to the Contractor, to the extent of such expense.

O. It shall be understood that the Equipment Lists, Specifications and Drawings, provided in related documents are complementary. Where there are conflicts within the documents, the overall design intent shall govern as determined by the Consultant and Owner.

P. To the extent that they govern the Work, the Program documents, Specifications and Drawings also govern change order Work, if any.

Q. The Drawings for the Work utilize symbols and schematic diagrams that have no dimensional significance. The Work shall be installed to fulfill the diagrammatic intent expressed on the Drawings, field layouts, and shop drawings of all trades.

R. Certain details appear on the Drawings for the Work that are specified with regard to the dimensioning and positioning of the Work. These are intended only for general information purposes. They do not obviate field coordination for individual items of the indicated Work.

S. Information as to general construction and architectural general construction and architectural features and finishes shall be derived from the structural and architectural drawings and specifications, and may require ongoing coordination with the Architect and/or Construction Team.

T. Ratings of devices, materials, and equipment specified without reference to specific performance criteria shall be understood to be nominal or nameplate ratings established by means of industry standard procedures.

U. It is the intent of the Equipment Lists, Drawings and Specifications to provide complete operating Audiovisual Systems. All Work necessary to provide such a System shall be performed. Any discrepancies shall be brought to the Consultant’s attention.




V. The Work called for under this Contract shall be carried on simultaneously with the Work of other trades and Owner functions in such a manner as to not delay the overall progress of the construction project. The Contractor is responsible for all coordination of the Work with other trades.

W. Include in the Work all necessary supervision and issuing of all coordination information to any other trades who are supplying work to accommodate the Audiovisual Systems installation.

X. For items of equipment which are to be installed but not purchased as part of the Work, the Work shall include: 1. Coordination of delivery 2. Unloading from delivery trucks 3. Safe handling and field storage up to the time of permanent placement in the project 4. Correction of any damage to the item(s) caused by the Contractor 5. Mounting in place and connection(s) as specified

Y. Items which are to be installed, but not purchased as part of the Work shall be carefully examined upon delivery to the project. Claims that any of these items have been received in such condition that their installation will require procedures beyond the reasonable scope of the Work will be considered only if presented in writing within one (1) week of the date of delivery to the project of the items in question. The Work includes all procedures necessary to put in satisfactory operation all items for which no claims have been submitted as outlined above.

1.7 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

A. The Contractor shall provide a Project Manager to oversee and coordinate all activities on the Project. The project manager shall be dedicated solely to this project and shall be available at all times for coordination with the Owner, Consultant and other Contractors.

B. The Contractor shall provide a Project Engineer available at all times for coordination with the Owner, Consultant, Manufacturers, and other Contractors.

C. The Contractor shall provide to the Owner, as a part of the prefabrication submittal, the name of the Project Manager and Project Engineer that will provide all duties and responsibilities as specified herein, during the term of the project. The Owner shall have the right to accept or reject assignment of Contractor personnel to this project.

D. Project Manager’s Duties and Responsibilities: 1. The Project Manager shall maintain the ability of making all managerial decisions on behalf of

the Contractor on a day-to-day basis, and shall retain the authority of accepting notices of deduction, inspection reports, payment schedules and any other project related correspondence on behalf of the owner.

2. The Project Manager shall schedule and attend project management meetings, during which time all System related issues are discussed, scheduled, confirmed, and/or resolved.

3. The Project Manager shall be available during normal business hours (8:00 to 5:00) within two (2) hours by telephone during the term of the project. a. In the event that the Project Manager is not available within the allotted time frame, the

Contractor may designate another employee to temporarily act as the Project Manager in all correspondence with the Owner.

b. The Contractor shall ensure that any individual temporarily assuming the duties of the Project Manager is at equal or higher level in the Contractor’s managerial chain of command.

4. Upon notification by the Owner, of any project related installation issue, or issue that may contradict the Specifications as stated herein, the Project Manager shall respond to such issue, verbally and/or in writing within an eight (8) hour period.




a. Responses to such issues as stated above shall include a clear understanding of the issue, along with a tentative plan of action, reflecting milestones and/or deadlines to resolve the issue.

b. Where appropriate, based on the overall importance of the project issue, the Project Manager shall follow-up their initial response with a written response to the issue within 24 hours of identification of the issue.

5. Prior to the initiation of the Work, the Project Manager shall submit a schedule reflecting key milestones of the Work, including but not limited to the following: a. Bid award b. Kick-off meeting c. Prefabrication submittal d. Ordering, delivery, and installation of head-end System equipment e. Field equipment delivery f. Integration Schedule By Space g. Payment schedule h. Installation completion date i. System training j. Delivery of As-Built documentation k. Delivery of Operations & Maintenance Manuals l. Final System test m. Acceptance of System

6. The Project Manager shall update the schedule on a weekly basis to reflect the status of each key milestone as the Work progresses.

7. As the System installation progresses, the Project Manager shall be capable of discussing any/or all of the above mentioned items at the request of the Owner, and shall address each item, as it relates to the current status of the Work.

E. Project Engineer’s Duties and Responsibilities: 1. The Project Engineer shall manage all designs, drawings, programing, calculations related to

the project. 2. The Project Engineer shall attend project management, reviews, and design meetings, during

which time all System related issues are discussed, scheduled, confirmed, and/or resolved. 3. The Project Engineer shall be available during normal business hours (8:00 to 5:00) within

two (2) hours by telephone during the term of the project. a. In the event that the Project Engineer is not available within the allotted time frame, the

Contractor may designate another employee to temporarily act as the Project Engineer in all correspondence with the Owner.

b. The Contractor shall ensure that any individual temporarily assuming the duties of the Project Manager is at equal or higher level in the Contractor’s managerial chain of command.

4. Upon notification by the Owner, of any project related design issue, or issue that may contradict the Specifications as stated herein, the Project Manager shall respond to such issue, verbally and/or in writing within an eight (8) hour period. a. Responses to such issues as stated above shall include a clear understanding of the

issue, along with a tentative plan of action, reflecting milestones and/or deadlines to resolve the issue.

b. Where appropriate, based on the overall importance of the project issue, the Project Engineer shall follow-up their initial response with a written response to the issue within 24 hours of identification of the issue.

5. The Project Engineer shall maintain updated drawings that reflect the status of design changes as the Work progresses.

6. As the System installation progresses, the Project Manager shall be capable of discussing any/or all of the above mentioned items at the request of the Owner, and shall address each item, as it relates to the current status of the Work.




1.8 REFERENCES

A. The Audiovisual Systems shall be installed in accordance with the latest applicable revisions pertaining to all applicable national, state, and local codes and standards including, but not limited to the following: 1. National Electric Code (NEC), NFPA 2. Americans with Disabilities Act, (ADA) 3. Industry Best Practices and Standards, Infocomm International 4. Local Governing Authorities Having Jurisdiction

B. Submit references for three projects completed within the last 3 years with similar size and scope criteria to the Project. Submit project details including quantity and fit-out of audio spaces, quantity and type of mixing systems, quantity and type of amplification systems, etc. Submit name, address, and telephone number of contact person within the organization for which the work was done.


A. It is the intent of these specifications to provide a complete working Audiovisual system ready for the Owner's use. System acceptance shall be judged on the successful adherence to the installation instructions of this Specification.

B. Any item not specifically shown on the drawings or called for in the specifications, but normally required to conform to the intent, are to be considered as part of the Work.

C. Any given item of equipment or material shall be the product of one manufacturer throughout the facility. Multiple manufacturers of any one item will not be permitted, unless specifically noted otherwise.

D. These specifications are equipment and performance specifications and are considered to be one all-encompassing package with the drawings. Actual installation shall be as engineered by the CONTRACTOR with prior approval by the Consultant and Owner.

E. Provide Audiovisual devices and equipment with performance levels and capacities as noted herein.

1.10 SUBMITTALS

A. General: 1. Submittals shall be submitted in accordance with the project schedule. 2. Submittals should be supplied in both hard copy and electronic format. Three copies of each

shall be provided for each submittal. 3. Information shall be presented in a clear and organized fashion such that specific information

is easy to locate and identify. Information shall be clearly identified as to the room or space to which the documentation is applicable.

4. All information specified for each submittal phase is required to be considered a complete submittal. Partial submittals shall not be permitted without prior consent from the Consultant.

B. Information Submittal / Bid Response 1. Company Profile

a. The AV Contractor shall be a firm with at least five years’ experience in the fabrication, assembly, and installation of Audiovisual Systems of similar magnitude and quality as specified for the subject job, and shall submit documentation to this effect with the bid return.

b. Documentation shall include a breakdown of the total number of employees, clearly indicating area of responsibility and length of time with firm in that capacity. Employee




profile will include number and level of Infocomm International CTS, CTS-I, CTS-D and NSCA NICET certified installers, if any, available for the project installation. The Bidder shall also indicate union status, if any, of shop and field installation personnel.

2. Project Team a. The AV Contractor shall clearly identify Project Team members and shall include name,

years with firm and a brief resume of the employees past projects. Pertinent Team members that are to be identified shall be the Project Manager, Chief Engineer, Senior Field Technician, Senior Bench Technician and Control System Programmer.

3. Subcontract Work a. Identify all Subcontractors doing any work amounting to more than 1% of the total system

price. It will be at the discretion of the Owner on whether or not Subcontractors will be approved.

4. Similar Projects a. Documentation shall identify, specifically, similar projects of the same or greater

magnitude. Of those projects noted, the AV Contractor shall provide current Owner/user contact names and telephone numbers, scope description, total value of the Audiovisual systems with a clear delineation between labor and equipment costs, as well as duration of project. The submittal supplied shall clearly state that the firm submitting the bid response has actively been involved in the projects’ engineering, programming, installation and service.

5. Certifications a. Audiovisual contractor shall supply all project team members’ manufacturer certifications

for installation, programming and maintaining the equipment and systems being installed.

C. Prefabrication Submittals 1. Pre-fabrication submittals shall consist of product data, shop drawings, cable schedules,

samples, and a detailed completion schedule 2. No portion of the Work shall commence nor shall any equipment be procured until the

Consultant and Owner have approved the pre-fabrication submittals in writing. 3. A letter of transmittal identifying the name of the Project, Contractor’s name and date

submitted for review, shall accompany pre-fabrication submittals and a list of items transmitted. a. Product data required as part of the pre-fabrication submittal shall include the following: b. Equipment schedules listing all System components, manufacturer, model number and

the quantity of each c. Manufacturer’s data specification sheets for all System components, including any

warranty information, and showing proposed model, style, size and finish. Where multiple products are shown on a common data sheet it shall be clearly marked to delineate items included in the Work.

d. A complete list of cable and wiring types, sizes, manufacturer data, and model number e. A complete list of finishes and sample graphics, including custom art work and custom

graphics (if applicable) f. List of parts inventory to provide manufacturer recommended service and maintenance of

the Work 4. Shop Drawings shall include the following:

a. Cable run sheets denoting cable type, signal type, termination type, cable number designation, start point and end point.

b. Floor plan and reflected ceiling plan drawings indicating device locations with device legends

c. Functional block diagrams for each System (audio, video, control, power, etcK) showing all equipment manufacturers and model numbers, signal types, connection types and cable numbers.

d. Wiring diagrams for all custom circuitry including interfaces to various control devices and custom connectivity in floor boxes, wall plates, etcK

e. Fabrication shop drawings for all custom equipment (if applicable) f. Mounting details for all architecturally integrated equipment




g. Plans and elevations of the Audiovisual equipment racks and/or custom furniture (including consoles, desks, and lecterns) quantifying all equipment to be mounted therein

h. The Contractor shall submit samples of any equipment components upon request of the Owner. Samples submitted shall be the latest version of equipment

i. Approval of shop drawings containing errors does not relieve the Contractor from making corrections at their expense

j. The Owner, Architect or Consultant may request any additional drawings or details be supplied as required

D. Control Systems Submittals: 1. Prior to beginning any programming coordinate with the Owner and Consultant on general

expectations. 2. Conduct a programming discovery meeting with the Owner to review the following:

a. General overall layout b. Color Palette c. Expected control functions by room d. Organization of basic and advanced functions e. Detailed expectations for advanced control of individual components or subsystems f. Expectations for automated or grouped control functions g. Any other control related functionality as required by the Owner

3. Provide three (3) programming submittals with revisions to the owner and consultant as follows: a. The first submittal shall be comprised of a list of functions to be provided by space. One

revision shall be made after comment. b. The second submittal shall be comprised of a full set of touch panel screen shots

provided by space. Two revisions shall be made after comments. c. The third submittal shall be comprised of working touch panels of each type and loaded

with each room’s specific programming. The owner shall be able to operate the panel and navigate to all pages but will not be able to control any equipment. Two revisions shall be made after comment.

d. During each submittal the Contractor shall be prepared to discuss and document, button-by-button, expected functions or sequences as they relate to final system operation.

e. Timelines and reviews shall be agreed to by AV Contractor and Owner prior to contract.

E. Record Documentation: 1. General:

a. Record documentation shall include all information required in the Pre-fabrication Submittals but revised to reflect “as installed” conditions.

b. Record Documentation shall include Operation and Maintenance Manuals as described herein.

c. Provide a letter of transmittal with Record Documentation identifying the name of the Project, Contractor’s name, date submitted for review, and a list of items transmitted.

d. Prior to the final acceptance of the Work, submit two draft sets of the Record Drawings portion of Record Documentation to the Consultant. The draft copy shall be used during the final acceptance testing by the Consultant.

e. Update all record documentation to reflect changes or modifications made during final acceptance testing as required and submit three blue/black lines and one electronic set.

f. Provide test results for all cables installed under this Work, tested and documented as described herein.

g. Provide Owner with Operation and Maintenance Manuals including wiring diagrams, parts lists, shop drawings and manufacturers' information on all equipment and cables provided by the Contractor. Manuals shall be provided in a high quality, 3-ring binder and completely indexed.

h. Provide Owner with all systems programming on electronic media. All programming and source code is to be considered as a work for hire and will be the property of the Owner upon completion of the project.




i. One copy of the record drawings for each system shall be laminated and supplied to the owner in full size.

F. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall apply to all Audiovisual related devices,

equipment and software modules. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be formatted as follows:

a. Bind each manual in a hard-back loose-leaf binder. b. Identify each manual’s contents on the cover. c. Provide a table of contents and tabulated sheets for each manual. Place tab sheets at

the beginning of each chapter or section and at the beginning of each appendix if applicable.

d. Any hardware manual demonstrating more than one model number of device on any one page shall be clearly marked as to delineate which model has been implemented in the Work.

3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall include, at a minimum, the following: a. Operational description of each subsystem b. Detailed programming descriptions for each subsystem c. Explanations of subsystem interrelationships d. Electrical schematics for each piece of equipment specified e. Power-up and power-down procedures for each subsystem f. Description of all diagnostic procedures g. A menu tree for each subsystem h. Setup procedures for each component of the subsystems i. A list of manufacturers, their local representatives, and subcontractors that have

performed Work on the Project j. Installation and service manuals for each piece of equipment k. Maintenance schedules for all installed components

4. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall include a separate section for each software program incorporated into the Project. The software section shall include, at a minimum, the following information: a. Definitions of all software related terms and functions b. Description of required sequences c. Directory of all disk files d. Description of all communications protocols, including data formats, command

characters, and a sample of each type of data transfer e. Instructions for manufacturer supplied report generation f. Instructions for custom report generation g. Database format and data entry requirements

G. Procedure for Resubmitting 1. Make corrections or changes in O & M and/or Record Drawings as required by the

Consultant and/or Owner and resubmit when the Consultant’s stamp requires re-submittal. 2. Clearly identify changes made other than those specifically requested by the Consultant

when resubmitting Record Drawings. Changes shall be clouded or similarly highlighted as coordinated with the Consultant. Only changes that have been specifically requested by the Consultant or have been clouded by the Contractor will be reviewed on resubmittals.

3. Any drawing sheets added to the resubmittal shall be clearly identified and clouded, and shall not change the sheet numbering scheme for previously issued Record Drawings.

4. The Contractor shall be responsible for any delays caused by the re-submittal process. 5. Re-submittal Review Fees 6. If the Consultant rejects the Contractor’s Record Submittal (Rejected, Revise, and Resubmit)

more than two times, due to the Contractor not resolving action items noted in previous submittals, the Consultant will be compensated for all subsequent reviews, whether partial or comprehensive. The amount of such compensation will be incorporated by Change Order and withheld from the Contractor’s Application for Payment.





A. Contractor Qualifications 1. Work specified herein shall be the responsibility of a single Audiovisual Systems Contractor.

Bid submission shall document a minimum of five (5) years experience in the fabrication, assembly, and installation of Systems of similar complexity as specified herein. The documentation shall include the names, locations, and points of contact for at least three (3) installations of the type and complexity specified herein.

2. Installer Training Process: – Contractor’s labor force shall have qualified installers who attended training programs related to the proposed systems preparing them to perform the work.

3. The Installer for this Project is to be certified by all manufacturers of the installed equipment that the Contractor proposes.

4. Registered and Certified supervisors- Contractor must have qualified supervisory personnel educated on the type of work they are overseeing (installation and design) by a reputable institution such as Infocomm International.

5. Quality assurances for Audiovisual systems includes a multi-step program consisting of pre-qualification procedure for manufacturers and installation specialists; products phase; installation; operating instruction and training; and the submission of maintenance and operating manuals.

6. The Contractor shall have local in-house engineering and project management capabilities consistent with the requirements of the Work.

7. By submitting a bid, the Contractor thereby certifies that it is qualified in all areas pertaining to, directly or indirectly, the Work. In the event the Contractor becomes unable to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or the satisfaction of the Owner, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to retain the services of applicable manufacturers’ representatives to expeditiously complete the Work in accordance with the Owner’s construction schedule with no additional cost to the Owner.

8. The Contractor shall maintain, or establish and maintain, a fully staffed office including a service center capable of providing maintenance and service to the Project. The Contractor shall staff the service center with factory trained technicians and adequately equip the office to provide emergency service within seventy-two (72) hours after being called, 24 hours per day.

9. The Contractor shall provide factory-certified technicians to install, commission, and maintain the Work. All installing personnel shall be licensed as required by local and/or state jurisdictions.

10. The Contractor shall ensure compliance with, and have a thorough understanding of, all local codes and contract conditions pertaining to this Project.

11. The Contractor shall maintain an inventory of spare parts and other items critical to System operation and as necessary to meet the emergency service requirements of this Project within the local service center.

B. Product Standards 1. Due to the rapid advancement and antiquation of technology related products, the supplied

product shall be the “contemporary technical equivalent” of that specified. “Contemporary technical equivalent” shall be based on a comparison of technology at the time of publication of specification to the technology at the time of the first product submittal. Final product approval and procurement is at the sole discretion of the Owner.

2. All equipment and materials contained herein shall be the products of recognized manufacturers and shall be new.

3. New equipment and materials shall: a. Be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) listed and approved where specifically called

for; or where normally subject to such U.L. labeling and/or listing services. b. Be without blemish or defect. c. Be products that meet with the acceptance of the agency inspecting the Audiovisual

Systems work. d. Be up to date with the latest firmware available from the manufacturer where applicable.




4. It is the intent of these specifications that wherever a manufacturer of a product is specified, and the terms “other approved” or “approved equal” are used, the substituted item must conform in all respects to the specified item. Consideration will not be given to claims that the substituted item meets the performance requirements with lesser construction. Performance as delineated in schedules and in the specifications shall be interpreted as minimum performance.

5. Substituted equipment or optional equipment, where permitted and approved, must conform to space requirements. Any substituted equipment that cannot meet space requirements, whether approved or not, shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense. Any modifications of related Systems as a result of substitutions shall be made at the Contractor’s expense.

6. The approval of shop drawings, or other information submitted in accordance with the requirements specified herein, does not ensure that the Audiovisual Consultant, Architect, or the Owner attests to the dimensional accuracy, dimensional suitability of the material, or mechanical performance of equipment. Approval of shop drawings does not invalidate the Drawings and Specifications.

7. Substitutions of equipment shown on the schedules or designated by model number in the specifications will not be considered if the item is not a regular catalogued item carried by the manufacturer.

8. Within the Specifications, certain manufacturers have been listed. These manufacturers are listed for example purposes (unless followed by “No Exceptions”). The Contractor may substitute manufacturers and models that may be more cost effective or readily available than that specified. However, all substitutions shall meet or exceed the specified functional and technical requirements. Acceptance of such substitutions is at the discretion of the Consultant and/or Owner.

C. Procurement 1. The Contractor shall not purchase any materials requiring submittals until the Consultant

approves the submittal for that material and the Technology Implementation Schedule. 2. The Contractor shall not purchase any materials requiring submittals until the date

established by the Owner.

1.12 WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE

A. Systems Contractor shall provide a one (1) year warranty for the Work. The warranty shall cover all Work, Systems, and subsystems against defects in materials and workmanship. The Work as specified herein, including all materials and labor, but excepting any existing devices and equipment which are incorporated in the completed Work, shall be warranted to be free from defects in design, workmanship, and materials. Further, the Contractor shall warrant that the completed Systems, including all components (except those, which are existing or provided by others), are of sufficient size and capacity to fulfill the requirements of the Specifications.

B. The warranty shall be valid for a period of one (1) year following the date of System acceptance by the Owner. Final system acceptance shall commence when all parts, components, sub-Systems, and Systems have been tested, shown to be working in accordance with the Specification, and approved by the Owner

C. Warranty Service: 1. In the event that defects in the materials and/or workmanship are identified during the

warranty period, the Contractor shall provide all labor and materials as may be required for prompt correction of the defect.

D. Provide written notice to the Owner documenting any Work performed during the warranty period, including any preventative maintenance Work performed.

E. Provide loaner equipment that is fully compatible with the Audiovisual Systems for any equipment not field repairable.




F. Loaner equipment for components that must be shipped to/from the manufacturer or distributor shall be on site and operational within 48 hours of the component failure. Furnish lists of equipment that will require shipment from the manufacturer or distributor and lead times associated with that equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Refer to Sections under 27 41 16 for Equipment Specifications by individual Room and System type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine the areas to receive the work and the conditions under which the Work would be performed. Contractor shall identify and/or remedy conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General 1. Installation shall include the delivery to the installation site, unloading, setting in place,

fastening to walls, floors, ceilings, counters, or other structures where required, interconnecting wiring of the system components, equipment alignment and adjustment, and all other work whether or not expressly required herein which is necessary to result in complete and fully operational systems.

2. Prior to ordering equipment, the contractor shall coordinate the frequencies of all wireless devices to prevent unwanted interaction between devices and rooms. This includes, but is not limited to, wireless microphones, assisted listening system devices, wireless control panels, etc.

3. All accessories, including rack mounting hardware, power supplies, etc., shall be obtained from the original equipment manufacturer. Unless otherwise noted or specified, third party accessories shall not be used.

4. All installation practices shall be in accordance with, but not limited to, these specifications and drawings. Installation shall be performed in accordance with the applicable standards, requirements, and recommendations of National and Local authorities having jurisdiction.

5. If, in the opinion of the Contractor, an installation practice is desired or required, which is contrary to these specifications or drawings, a written request for modification shall be made to the Consultant. Modifications shall not commence without written approval from the Consultant. Every effort will be made to respond to all written requests, in a timely manner, as to not delay the installation or completion of the project.

6. During the installation, and up to the date of final acceptance, the Contractor shall be under obligation to protect finished and unfinished work against damage and loss. In the event of such damage or loss, the damage shall be replaced or repaired at no cost to the Owner.

B. Physical Installation 1. All equipment shall be firmly secured in place unless requirements of portability dictate

otherwise. 2. All equipment shall have an engraved plaque permanently affixed, denoting its function. 3. All patch panels shall be clearly labeled and the labeling scheme shall be coordinated with

the owner prior to installation. Where the density of the patch panel prohibits individually labeling each connector a laminated legend shall be supplied to the owner.




4. Fastenings and supports shall be adequate to support their loads with a safety factor of at least three for wall-mounted devices and five for ceiling-mounted devices.

5. All boxes, equipment, etc., shall be secured plumb and square. 6. In the installation of equipment and cable, consideration shall be given not only to operational

efficiency, but also to overall aesthetic factors. 7. Trim and Escutcheon Components

a. To insure a proper finished appearance, the AV Contractor shall furnish and install trim/escutcheon components at all conditions where A/V components pass through the finished ceilings. This would include but not be limited to video projector supports, flat-panel display supports and any other component which is not specifically supplied with integral flanges/trim components; i.e. speaker mounts, assisted listening devices, etc.

b. All trim components at the ceiling plane shall be finished to match the approved ACT ceiling grid system components. The audiovisual contractor should obtain a sample from the General Contractor, including any custom color information, or standard color numbers. All trim components shall be submitted to the Architect for review and approval prior to fabrication.

C. Cable Installation 1. All wire bundles are to be neat and combed free of cable crossovers. 2. All cables, regardless of length, shall be marked with a permanent, self-laminating wrap-

around number or letter cable marker at both ends, similar to the Panduit “Pan-Code” system. Labels must be computer-generated for legibility. Wire labels done by hand in the field must be replaced with computer generated labels. There shall be no unmarked cables at any place in the system. Marking codes used on cables shall correspond to codes shown on drawings and or run sheets.

3. All cables shall be grouped according to the signals being carried. In order to reduce signal contamination, separate groups shall be formed for the following cable families: a. Power cables b. Control cables c. Video cables d. Audio cables carrying signals less than – 20 dBm e. Audio cables carrying signals between – 20 dBm and +20 dBm f. Audio cables carrying signals above +20 dBm

4. As a general practice, all power cables, control cables, and high level cables shall be run on the left side of an equipment rack as viewed from the rear. All other cables shall be run on the right side of an equipment rack, as viewed from the rear.

5. Cables ties shall be placed at appropriate intervals of no greater than six inches for vertical bundles, four inches for horizontal bundles.

6. All vertical cable bundles shall be attached to the rack frame. 7. All cables shall be continuous lengths without splices. All system wire, after being cut and

stripped, shall have the wire strands twisted back to their original lay and be terminated by approved soldered or mechanical means. Except where noted otherwise in the specifications, no bare wire connections shall be permitted. Heat-shrink tubing shall be used to insulate the ground or drain wire. Unused wires at the end of a cable shall remain unstripped and shall be laid back and held in place with wire ties.

8. All solder connections shall be made with rosin-core solder using temperature-controlled solder stations. Care shall be taken to avoid cold or cracked solder joints. Any connections that do not appear to be clean and shiny, or which show signs of cracking, shall be re-soldered by the contractor before final acceptance of the system.

9. Mechanical connections using insulated, crimp-type connectors shall be bonded to the connector by soldering the wire to the metal part of the connector.

10. Connections made with screw actuated pressure type terminal strips shall be made by stripping approximately 1/4 inch of insulation from the stranded conductor. Then the un-tinned wire shall be inserted into the terminal and the screw tightened using a secure fitting precision screwdriver.

11. All wire markers shall face a common direction. 12. All cables shall have proper connector housing.




13. Cables shall not protrude from the back of racks. 14. All cable entry shall be through the tops of racks or through entrance holes in the base of the

rack. No cable shall enter racks through front, rear or side panels. 15. Unless otherwise noted, all video and computer video cables are to be terminated using

seventy-five ohm (75 Ohm) connectors, with a captive center pin where applicable 16. Cables running in plenum areas without conduit shall be plenum rated cable, and match the

specified cable above. It is the responsibility of the Bidder to inspect the electrical drawings, and verify in what spaces plenum cable shall be used. No claims for additional monies, based on the use of plenum cable, will be allowed.

17. All cables (except video and pulse cables, which must be cut to an electrical length) shall be cut to the length dictated by the run. No splices shall be permitted in any pull boxes without prior permission of the Consultant. For equipment mounted in drawers or on slides, the interconnecting cables shall be provided with a service loop of appropriate length.

18. No cable shall be installed with a bend radius less than that recommended by the cable manufacturer.

19. Where cables are installed in architectural niches, ensure that the cables are black, unless otherwise directed, to reduce visibility from the audience.

20. Where cables are installed that is visible, the cables will be sheathed in a color wrap that has been pre-approved for the location.

21. Draping cables over other structures in the ceiling is unacceptable. Water pipes, ceiling grid, sprinkler system, electrical supports, air ducts or any other in-ceiling structure may not be used for cable support.

22. Contractor installed supports shall be used to supplement the main cable support system when any cabling leaves the main support system or is unsupported for more than three and one half feet (3’-6”). Non-Continuous cable supports shall be properly fastened to building structure.

23. Cables on top of ceiling tiles or on floors will be rejected. Cable supported by ceiling grid support wires will be rejected.

D. Cable Selection: Signal type is indicated on schematic diagram at equipment input or output.

E. Plenum Rated / Non-Plenum Ratings: Cable routed in conduits or equipment racks to have non-plenum rated (PVC) jacket. All other cables to have plenum rated jacket.

F. Cable Types: 1. Microphone and Line Audio Cable:

a. 22 AWG (7x30) stranded twisted shielded pair with overall shield b. NEC: CMR, CMP, etcK ratings as required c. Nominal Capacitance (Conductor to Conductor): ≤ 35 pF/ft d. Nominal Capacitance (Conductor to Conductor and Shield): ≤ 67 pF/ft

2. Low Impedance Loudspeaker Cable: a. 14 AWG (19x27) stranded twisted pair b. NEC: CMR, CMP, etcK ratings as required c. Nominal Capacitance (Conductor to Conductor): ≤ 36 pF/ft

3. Low Impedance Loudspeaker Cable: a. 12 AWG (19x25) stranded twisted pair b. NEC: CMR, CMP, etcK ratings as required c. Nominal Capacitance (Conductor to Conductor): ≤ 36 pF/ft

4. Low or High Impedance Loudspeaker Cable a. 16 AWG (19x29) stranded pair b. NEC: CMR, CMP, etcK ratings as required c. Nominal Capacitance (Conductor to Conductor): ≤ 36.5 pF/ft

5. High Impedance Loudspeaker Cable (70V / 100V) a. 18 AWG (7x26) stranded pair b. NEC: CMR, CMP, etcK ratings as required c. Nominal Capacitance (Conductor to Conductor): ≤ 34 pF/ft

6. Antenna Cables – RG58 – Wireless Microphone and Assisted Listening




a. 50 ohm RG-58 19 AWG solid center conductor. b. NEC: CMR, CMP, etcK ratings as required c. Nominal Capacitance (Conductor to Shield): ≤ 27 pF/ft d. Nominal Attenuation @ 900MHz: ≤ 12.5 dB/100 ft

7. Antenna Cables – RG213 – Wireless Microphone and Assisted Listening a. 50 ohm RG-213 13 AWG solid center conductor. b. NEC: CMR, CMP, etcK ratings as required c. Nominal Capacitance (Conductor to Shield): ≤ 31 pF/ft d. Nominal Attenuation @ 900MHz: ≤ 6.5 dB/100 ft

8. Antenna Cables – RG8/U – Wireless Microphone and Assisted Listening a. 50 ohm RG-8/U 10 AWG solid center conductor b. NEC: CMR, CMP, etcK ratings as required c. Nominal Capacitance (Conductor to Shield): ≤ 25 pF/ft d. Nominal Attenuation @ 900MHz: ≤ 4 dB/100 ft

9. Video Tie Line Cable: a. RG59/U coaxial cable 20 AWG solid bare copper b. NEC: CMR, CMP, etcK ratings as required c. Nominal Capacitance (Conductor to Shield): ≤ 16.5 pF/ft d. Nominal Attenuation @ 3000MHz: ≤ 22 dB/100 ft

10. Video Tie Line Cable: a. RG6/U coaxial cable 18 AWG solid bare copper b. NEC: CMR, CMP, etcK ratings as required c. Nominal Capacitance (Conductor to Shield): ≤ 16.5 pF/ft d. Nominal Attenuation @ 3000MHz: ≤ 18 dB/100 ft

11. Video Tie Line Cable: a. RG11/U coaxial cable 14 AWG solid bare copper b. NEC: CMR, CMP, etcK ratings as required c. Nominal Capacitance (Conductor to Shield): ≤ 16.5 pF/ft d. Nominal Attenuation @ 3000MHz: ≤ 10.5 dB/100 ft

12. Video Tie Line Cable Five (5) Conductor – Mini High-Res: a. 5 x 26 AWG coaxial cable with overall jacket b. NEC: CMR, CMP, etcK ratings as required c. Nominal Capacitance (Conductor to Shield): ≤ 17 pF/ft d. Nominal Attenuation @ 1000MHz: ≤ 21.5 dB/100 ft

13. Video Tie Line Cable Five (5) Conductor – RG59: a. 5 x 24 AWG coaxial cable with overall jacket b. NEC: CMR, CMP, etcK ratings as required c. Nominal Capacitance (Conductor to Shield): ≤ 17.5 pF/ft d. Nominal Attenuation @ 1000MHz: ≤ 13.5 dB/100 ft

14. Digital Video UTP Tie Line Cable a. Refer to telecommunications specifications for project-standard data cabling information.

15. Data Tie Line Cable: a. Refer to telecommunications specifications for project-standard data cabling information.

16. RS-232 Control Cable a. 22 AWG (7X30) Two pair twisted, individually shielded with drain wire b. NEC: CMR, CMP, etcK ratings as required c. Nominal Capacitance (Conductor to Conductor): ≤ 17 pF/ft

17. Specialty Control Cable – AXLINK, CRESNET: a. 22 AWG (7X30) shielded twisted pair with drain wire and 18 AWG unshielded pair in

single jacket b. NEC: CMR, CMP, etcK ratings as required c. Nominal Capacitance (Conductor to Conductor): ≤ 14 pF/ft

18. Multimode Optical Fiber: a. 50/125 µm as required per transmission equipment manufacturer recommendation. If

transmission equipment does not support 50/125 µm, 62.5/125 µm shall be permitted. b. Strand count per functional drawings; minimum of two (2) strands for each run outside

the main equipment cabinet.




c. Shall support 10Gbps transmission speed for length of run d. Each optical fiber strand shall be sufficiently free of surface imperfections and inclusions

to meet the optical, mechanical, and environmental requirements of this specification and all EIA/TIA 568B.3 and 568B.3-1 performance parameters.

e. NEC: CMR, CMP, etcK ratings as required. 19. Single-Mode Optical Fiber:

a. 8.3/125 µm b. Each optical fiber strand shall be sufficiently free of surface imperfections and inclusions

to meet the optical, mechanical, and environmental requirements of this specification and all EIA/TIA 568B.3 and 568B.3-1 performance parameters.

c. NEC: CMR, CMP, etcK ratings as required. 20. Ethernet Cabling

a. Confirm Ethernet cabling standards with owner and telecom contractor. All audiovisual Ethernet cabling shall conform to project performance standards.

b. Reference telecom specification for detailed cable management and performance information.

21. General guidelines for signal type to cable model matching are included below:

• Type ........................................................................ Non-Plenum ....... Plenum

• Mic/Line Audio......................................................... Belden 9451 ...... 9451P

• Speaker 14 AWG ................................................... Belden 5100UE . 6100UE

• Speaker 12 AWG .................................................... Belden 5000UE . 6000UE



• Antenna RG58 ........................................................ Belden 8240 ...... 82240

• Antenna RG213 ...................................................... Belden 8267 ...... KKK

• Antenna RG8/U ....................................................... Belden 9914 ...... 7733A

• Video RG59/U ......................................................... Belden 1505A .... 1506A

• Video RG6/U ........................................................... Belden 1694A .... 1685A

• Video RG11/U ......................................................... Belden 7731A .... 7732A

• Video 5 Conductor - MHR ....................................... Extron MHR-5 .... MHR-5P

• RS-232 Belden 5541PT .................................... 6541PT

• Specialty Control (AXLINK, CRESNET) Belden 1502R ..................... 1502P

• Multimode Optical Fiber .......................................... Belden M9C005 . M9C013

• Single-Mode Optical Fiber ...................................... Belden M9W005 M9W013

Note: These cable types are cited to illustrate the type and quality of cable required. Unless otherwise noted, cables from other manufacturers, i.e. Canare, CommScope, Extron, Gepco, Liberty, etc. will be considered acceptable if data sheets are submitted and approved prior to installation.

G. Manufacturers: 1. The manufacturers noted below shall be the only manufacturers acceptable:

a. Belden b. Liberty c. Gepco d. Commscope e. Corning f. Substitution: By approved substitution means

H. Fiber Optic Patch/Connection Cables: 1. Factory terminated with appropriate connector. 2. Appropriate jacket construction for portable use and repeated connection to wall plates, patch

panels or other audiovisual devices. 3. All optical fiber patch cords are to be provided in appropriate lengths as per the application.




4. It is the responsibility of the contractor to verify lengths and counts of optical fiber patch/connection cables with the owner prior to purchase.

I. Digital Video Connection Cables: 1. Factory terminated with appropriate connector. 2. Multi-connection cables (HDMI to DVI, Display Port to HDMI, EtcK) shall be furnished with

correct pre-terminated connections. Adapters shall not be permitted to correct improperly specified cables.

3. Where digital video cables exceed 12 meters in length a cable equalizer shall be provided to compensate for the cable length. This does not apply if the receiving device includes built-in cable equalization.

4. All digital video connection cables are to be provided in appropriate lengths as per the application.

J. Connection Plate Receptacles 1. Audio (microphone) – XLR type, color coded. 2. Audio (line level) – XLR type with appropriate pin quantity and color-coded identification ring. 3. Audio (loudspeaker level) – Neutrik “speakON” Type. 4. Intercom – XLR type or as required by the intercom system. Jack shall be insulated from

panel. 5. Video – Recessed BNC type unless space is limited. 6. DVI – DVI-I jack, isolated from panel type, with hex nuts. 7. HDMI – HDMI jack, Isolated from panel type with locking screw 8. VGA – DB-15, isolated from panel type, with hex nuts 9. Cobranet – Neutrik “etherCON” Type – Color Coded 10. Ethernet – Neutrik “etherCON” Type – Color Coded 11. Fiber Optic – Neutrik “opticalCON” Type – Color Coded 12. RF – “F” type. Receptacles shall be insulated from panel type. 13. All connectors on wall plates, or in other exposed locations, are to be recessed where

possible. 14. All fiber optic panel receptacles shall be furnished with protective plugs. 15. All barrel-type connections shall be color coded, in addition to labeling, where applicable for

easy user connection identification

K. Grounding Procedures 1. In order to minimize problems resulting from improper grounding, and to achieve maximum

signal-to-noise ratios, the following grounding procedures shall be adhered to: a. System Grounds: A single primary “system ground” shall be established for the systems

in each particular area. All grounding conductors in that area shall connect to this primary system ground. See the perimeter grounding conductor installed under the base construction contract. 1) The system ground shall be provided in the audio equipment rack for the area, and

shall consist of a copper bar of sufficient size to accommodate all secondary ground conductors. A copper conductor having a maximum of 0.1 Ohms total resistance shall connect the primary system ground bar to the nearest approved electrical ground. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining if the metallic conduit is properly electrically bonded to the building ground system.

2) Secondary system grounding conductors shall be provided from all racks, audio con-soles, and grounding point for the area. Each of these grounding conductors shall have a maximum of 0.1 Ohms total resistance.

3) Under no conditions shall the AC neutral conductor, either in the power panel or in a receptacle outlet, be used for a system ground.

b. Audio Cable Shields 1) All audio cable shields shall be grounded at one point only. There are no exceptions.

For inter and intra-rack wiring, this requires that the shield be connected at one end only. For ungrounded portable equipment, such as microphones, the shield shall be connected at both ends but grounded at only one end.




c. Video Receptacles 1) All video receptacles that are provided and installed by the Contractor shall be

insulated from the mounting panel, outlet box, or wireway. Unless otherwise detailed herein, this shall be accomplished by using insulated-from-panel type receptacles.

d. Audio Receptacles 1) All audio receptacles that are provided and installed by the Contractor shall be

insulated from the mounting panel, outlet box, or wireway. Unless otherwise detailed herein, this shall be accomplished by using insulated-from-panel type receptacles.

e. General 1) Because of the great number of possible variations in grounding systems, it shall be

the responsibility of the Contractor to follow good engineering practice, as outlined above, and to deviate from these practices only when necessary to minimize crosstalk and to maximize signal-to-noise ratios in the audio, video, and control systems.

3.3 PERFORMANCE STANDARDS

A. Unless restricted by the published specifications of a particular piece of equipment, or unless otherwise required under the Detailed Specifications, the following performance standards shall be met be each system: 1. Audio

a. Frequency Response 1) Within plus or minus 0.5dB, 20 Hz to 20,000 Hz.

b. Signal to Noise Ratio 1) greater than 90dB (including crosstalk and hum at all input/output levels)

c. Total Harmonic Distortion 1) 0.05% maximum from 20 Hz to 20,000 Hz.

d. Input Levels 1) Microphone (Nominal): -50dbu

a) Overload (Minimum gain) : -5dbu b) Maximum Gain: -26dbu

2) Line (Nominal): +4dbu a) Overload (Minimum gain):+24bu b) Maximum Gain: +9dbu

3) Input Common Mode Rejection: >100db e. Output Levels

1) Line (Nominal): +4dbu 2) Maximum: +24dbu 3) Output Impedance: <0.5 Ohms 4) Load Impedance: >150 Ohms

2. Video (signal) a. Frequency Response:

1) Within plus or minus 0.5dB, DC to 4.2 MHz. b. Signal to Noise Ratio:

1) 55 dB minimum. (peak to RMS) unweighted, DC to 4.2 MHz c. Crosstalk:

1) 45 dB minimum unweighted DC to 4.2 MHz d. Line and Field Tilt:

1) 2% maximum. e. Differential Gain:

1) 3% maximum. f. Differential Gain:

1) 2 degrees maximum.

B. Performance Test Signal Paths 1. The signal paths for the above Performance Standards shall be as follows:

a. Audio:




1) From all source inputs (for microphones, audio tape units, video tape units, etc.) through all mixers, switchers, etc., to all signal destinations.

b. Video: 1) From all sources of the above signal paths. This shall not exempt the Contractor

from the responsibility of checking all paths and outlets for appropriate compliance with the Performance Standards, see section below for detailed requirements.

C. Optical Projection Systems 1. All optical projection systems shall meet the following performance standards: 2. The total averaged light output from a projector, in lumens, shall be within plus-or-minus 15%

of that specified by the projector manufacturer. 3. The light fall-off from the center of the projected image to all four corners, as measured at the

projected image plane, shall not exceed 35% for slide projector images. The light intensity shall be measured at all five positions of the projected image after the projector has been adjusted to provide the light output as specified above.

4. The “corner” location shall be defined as the four points determined by intersecting lines drawn 5% of the distance in from the focused edges of the image.

5. The light meter used for the above measurements shall be a properly calibrated foot-candle (or lux) meter and shall be cosine-corrected.

6. Projectors, lenses, and mirrors shall be solidly mounted and braced, so that there will be no observable movement in the image induced by motor vibration or other mechanical operations.

D. Control Systems 1. All control systems shall be fully tested; every button pushed on every touch panel; and every

macro, sub-process or automated function verified to be working correctly. 2. During performance testing, all equipment shall be operated under standard conditions as

recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Three (3) to six (6) months after checkout, as directed by the Owner, Contractor shall perform

a control system revision. This time shall be limited to one (1) site meeting to review requested changes, one (1) day of office time to prepare the changes and one (1) day of site work to implement and test changes. Time for these changes shall be included as part of the Contractor’s bid.

3.4 CONTRACTOR SYSTEM CHECKOUT

A. Before Acceptance Tests are scheduled, the Contractor shall perform his own system check-out. He shall furnish all required test equipment and shall perform all work necessary to determine and/or modify performance of the system to meet the requirements of this specification. This work shall include the following: 1. Provide documentation that all Cobranet bundles and audio signal lines have been tested

and verified. 2. Provide documentation that all video signal lines have been tested and verified. 3. Any cables failing to meet the standards set herein must be removed and replaced, at no cost

to the Owner, with cables that prove, in additional testing, to meet or exceed the performance standards set forth

4. Test all systems for compliance with the Performance Standards, using the following test equipment: a. Test Equipment: Assemble the following test equipment (or equivalent) on site.

1) Audio check: a) Signal generator, Leader LAG-120B b) AC millivoltmeter, Leader LMZ-181A c) Audio test set, Audio Precision P1PLUS d) Prerecorded cassette tape e) Compact Disc f) Audio cables g) Set of terminations, adapters etc.




2) Video checks: a) Video signal generator, Leader 410C b) DVI signal generator, Sencore 403C-SH c) Combined waveform monitor/vectorscope, Leader 5872A d) Professionally prerecorded DVD test e) Professionally prerecorded BluRay test f) Video cables g) Set of terminations, ‘T’ pieces etc.

3) Gain Setting a) Adjust all systems (starting at source equipment and terminating at the power

amplifiers) for optimal gain and minimum distortion. 5. Signal Testing

a. Video/Audio 1) Connect the output of the video signal generator to a floor box/table/rack connector

and select the “Full Field Color Bar” signal. Connect the combined waveform monitor/vectorscope to a final output point, e.g. an input to a picture monitor or video projector. Ensure that the test signal is routed to the selected output.

2) Measure and record the signal amplitudes. 3) Repeat item ‘1’ after selecting the “Multiburst, 50 IRE” test signal. 4) Measure and record the signal amplitudes. 5) Repeat item ‘1’ after selecting the “Modulated 5-step” test signal. 6) Measure and record the signal differential phase and gain. 7) Repeat item #’s ‘1’ through ‘6’ for other video signal paths. 8) Repeat item ‘1’ after selecting the Window test signal. 9) Measure and record the signal line and field tilt. 10) Repeat item ‘1’ after connecting the Black Burst signal from a rear mounted

connector. 11) Measure and record the signal/noise ratio. 12) Connect the output of the audio test set to a floor box/table/rack program audio

connector and connect the input of the audio test set to a final output point, e.g. an input to a program speaker power amplifier. Ensure that the test signal is routed to the selected output, that the volume control is set to 100% and that the equalizers are bypassed.

13) Measure and record the signal/noise ratio, total harmonic distortion and frequency response.

14) Repeat items ‘12’ and ‘13’ for other audio signal paths. 15) Connect the output of the audio test set to a floor box/table/rack speech audio

connector and connect the input of the audio test set to a final output point, e.g. an input to a speech speaker power amplifier. Ensure that the test signal is routed to the selected output, that the volume control is set to 100% and that the equalizer is bypassed.

16) Measure and record the signal/noise ratio, total harmonic distortion and frequency response.

17) Repeat items ‘15’ and ‘16’ for other audio signal paths. 18) DVI: Connect the DVI output of the signal generator to a floorbox/table/rack

connector and select the SMPTE & PLUGE signal at the various computer scan rates as follows: a) 640 x 480 25.1 kHz H, 60 Hz V b) 640 x 480 31.5 kHz H, 75 Hz V c) 800 x 600 40 kHz H, 60 Hz V d) 1024 x 768 65 kHz H, 60 Hz V e) 1280 x 768 48 kHz H, 60 Hz V f) 1280 x 800 48 kHz H, 60 Hz V g) 1366 x 768 47.8 kHz H, 60 Hz V h) 1280 x 1024 64 kHz H, 60 Hz V i) 1400 x 1050 63.9 kHz H, 60 Hz V j) 1600 x 1200 63.9 kHz H, 60 Hz V




k) 1680 x 1050 63.9 kHz H, 60 Hz V l) 1920 x 1200 63.9 kHz H, 60 Hz V m) HD 720p 45 kHz H, 60 Hz V n) HD 1080i 33.75 kHz H, 30/60 Hz V o) HD 1080p 33.75 kHz H, 30/60 Hz V

19) Check that the image is correctly displayed on the picture monitor(s) and/or by the video projector.

20) Repeat item ‘2’ using Crosshatch signal, checkerboard signal and H Pattern signal. 21) Repeat item ‘2’ for other DVI connection locations. 22) Connect the output of the audio signal generator to a floorbox/table/rack ‘Left’ and

‘Right’ connectors and select the 1 kHz tone. Check that the signal is emitted from the left and right program speakers.

23) Repeat item ‘v’ for other audio connection location. 24) Note: Whenever possible, include computer sources provided by the Owner, at the

desired resolution, in your testing. b. All optical fiber cables/strands must be tested in the end-to-end, completed system with a

Fluke OpifiberTier-2 or equivalent optical fiber testing device and appropriate fiber mandrel that provides the following: 1) Measuring insertion loss 2) Analyzing the OTDR trace

c. At the conclusion of the tests, return all equipment settings to previously calibrated positions.

d. Provide written records of all test results in spreadsheet form. e. Check all control functions, from all controlling devices to all controlled devices, for proper

operations. f. Adjust, balance, and align all equipment for optimum quality and to meet the

manufacturer’s published specifications. Establish and mark normal settings for all level controls, and record these settings in the “System Operation and Maintenance Manual”.

g. Check all optical projection images for average light level, light fall-off, and image alignment and size to comply with the Performance Standards and specifications drawings. Check to determine that all projectors, projector bases, carts, tables, and mirrors are rigid and vibration-less in operation.

h. Maintain documentation of all performance tests for reference by the Consultant during the System Acceptance Tests.

3.5 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE TESTS

A. System Acceptance Tests will not be performed until the Contractor’s System Checkout has been completed and the test results have been reviewed. The System Acceptance Tests will be supervised by the Consultant and approved by the Owner and will consist of the following: 1. A physical inventory will be taken of all equipment on site and will be compared to equipment

lists in the contract documents. 2. The operation of all system equipment shall be demonstrated by the Contractor. 3. Both subjective and objective tests will be required by the Consultant to determine

compliance with the specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing test equipment for these tests.

4. All final, “as-built” drawings, run sheets, manuals, and other required documents, as detailed in Part I, shall be on hand. Two complete sets of these documents shall be delivered to the Owner at this time. (One complete set shall have been delivered to the Consultant prior to the scheduling of Acceptance Tests).

B. In the event further adjustment is required, or defective equipment must be repaired or re-placed, tests may be suspended or continued at the option of the Consultant.

C. Any charge for additional time incurred by the Consultant required to oversee the system tests, due to improper system installation or previous failed systems, shall be the responsibility of, and charged directly to the contractor.




D. AV Contractor shall provide staff on site until all rooms and systems are accepted by Owner.

3.6 TRAINING

A. The AV Contractor shall provide on-site training sessions for each system by a suitably qualified instructor to personnel designated by the Owner. The purpose of these trainings shall be to instruct them in the operation and maintenance of the systems. In the event the AV Contractor does not have qualified instructors on staff for certain sophisticated equipment, a manufacturer's representative for such instruction will be provided by the AV Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. The AV contractor shall offer the Owner additional training as the Owner may feel is needed at an additional cost. The AV contractor shall specify the hourly rate for this training as part of the bid submittal.

B. Operations and Maintenance manuals shall be complete and approved prior to training.

C. All training shall take place after the systems are operational. There shall be a minimum of two training sessions that shall be provided as defined by the following: Session 1 shall commence after the systems are operational, at a time defined by the Owner; the remaining training session shall take place at a later date specified by the Owner. AV Contractor shall anticipate that a total of 40 hours of training will be required.

D. The AV Contractor shall provide two technicians tasked, and familiar with the project, to support Owner staff during the building opening and initial occupancy. A three month period for this support shall be included in the Contractor’s pricing under a separate line item in their bid. Additional or reduced timing may be negotiated with Owner.

3.7 FINAL CLEANING

A. Upon completion, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment. It shall not be permitted for trash to be left for any cleaning services unless specifically approved by the Owner.

B. Clean dust, fingerprints, dirt, wire snips, etcK from all equipment racks, control panels, control surfaces, and furniture provided by the Contractor.

END OF SECTION 27 41 00



ARCHITECTURALLY INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS 27 41 13 - 1

SECTION 27 41 13 – ARCHITECTURALLY INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General [and Supplementary] Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Unless this Section contains statements, which are more definitive or more restrictive than those contained in the Owner’s General Conditions, this Specification shall not be interpreted as waiving or overruling any requirements expressed in the General Conditions.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This section of the specification defines the audio video systems that are an integral part of the building interiors and finishes. These systems include:

1. Motorized projections screens 2. In-wall Box for concealing audiovisual connections 3. In-wall Box for concealing control panels 4. Floor Box for concealing audiovisual connections, power & data

B. This section is valid only when considered in total with all other Audiovisual System Contract Documents. References are for the convenience of the reader and their inclusion in or omission from any Section in no way limits its scope or intent of any Contract Document.


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Related sections: 1. Section 27 41 00, General Conditions for Audio Visual Systems 2. Section 27 41 16, Integrated Audiovisual Systems and Equipment

1.4 RELATED WORK

A. AV Contractor shall coordinate with Electrical Contractor on raceway/junction box locations for audio visual equipment and routing of audio, video, control, and power cables/raceway from equipment, terminal and pull boxes to system equipment racks.

B. Related Work: Equipment and materials provided and installed by others, unless otherwise shown in this Section or the Drawings, shall include but are limited to:

1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical 2. Section 27 05 00 – Common Work Results for Communications

1.5 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS



27 41 13 - 2 ARCHITECTURALLY INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS

A. Refer to Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Gen-eral Requirements. All of the provisions listed or specified therein apply to work of this Sec-tion.

1.6 STANDARDS

A. Codes: Work shall be done according to applicable requirements of governing international, national, and local codes, rules, and regulations. In addition, the work shall be in accord-ance with the latest revisions of all applicable standards and specifications of the following, whether statutory or not:

1. National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 3. City and other local codes and requirements

B. Standards: Equipment and materials specified shall conform to the current edition of the fol-lowing standards and best industry practices, where applicable:

1. UL-Underwriters Laboratories 2. EIA-Electronic Industries Association 3. ISO-International Standards Organization 4. InfoComm International

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide in accordance with Section 01 33 0 - Submittal Procedures: and Section 27 41 00. 1. Product data for furnished items, to include:

a. Product information including all dimensions, mounting requirements, required accessories and finishes.

2. Shop drawings: Indicate location of all provided devices and model to be provided at each location. Mounting requirements not shown in product information. Other infor-mation to coordinate with designers, contractors or other trades.

3. Samples: a. As requested by Owner, Architect or General Contractor to determine finishes or

installation details. 4. Manufacturer's installation, operation, maintenance, and cleaning instructions.


A. Manufacturer qualifications: Firm with 15 years minimum successful experience manufac-turing electric projection lifts.

B. Warrantee: Products shall be fully warranted for defects in workmanship for one (1) year af-ter date of installation.


A. Deliver in manufacturer's undamaged, labeled packaging. B. Provide on-site storage prior to contractor installation or turn over to other contractors for in-

stallation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Provide as indicated in specifications or audiovisual drawings.




2.2 MOTORIZED PROJECTION SCREEN, TYPE 1A

A. Provided and installed by AV Contractor.

B. Location as shown on drawings.

C. Electrically operated by one motor and steel cable to raise and lower screen. Each motor to be 120 volt (60 Hz) not more than3.8 amp. Motor to be two wire with ground quick reversal type, oiled for life, with automatic thermal overload cutout, integral gears, capacitor and a built in brake to prevent coasting. To have pre-set but adjustable limit switches to automati-cally stop picture surface in the “up” and “down” positions. Motor to turn drum to allow cable to roll bottom 55/8 " diameter roller ”up” and “down” on fabric. Screen to have a straight, rig-id tubular metal header, 1" in diameter. Top of fabric shall be formed into a pocket into which header shall be inserted. 23/8" wide pipe coupler shall be secured to header for hanging. Furnished with adjustable threaded rod for adjusting fabric hang. The header shall be 91/2" longer than the width of the fabric. Fabric shall be flame retardant and mildew re-sistant fabric. Fabric shall be securely fastened to roller. The bottom roller, with the cable drums, will be 77/8" wider than the width of fabric. Screen to be listed by Underwriters’ La-boratories.

D. Viewing Surface shall be Matte White:

E. Model 1. Manf.: Da-Lite

Model: Arena Electrol Size: As shown on drawings, confirm prior to ordering.. Finish: Black Substitutions: If approved by Consultant, Owner, and Architect

F. Options and accessories: 1. None.

2.3 MOTORIZED PROJECTION SCREEN, TYPE 1B

A. Provided and installed by AV Contractor


C. Electrically operated 120 volt (60Hz), not more than 2.4 amp with a quick connect male plug-in connector on the motor. Shall have specially designed motor mounted inside the roller, to be three wire with ground, quick reversal type, oiled for life, with automatic thermal overload cutout, integral gears, capacitor and an electric brake to prevent coasting. To have preset but adjustable limit switches to automatically stop picture surface in the “up” and “down” po-sitions. Junction box shall be internally integrated into the housing making it possible to in-stall the housing and wire to the building’s electrical system during construction. The junc-tion box shall contain a quick connect connector that is mounted in the housing for easy plug-in connection to the motorized fabric and roller assembly. Rigid metal roller, to be at least 5¾" in diameter (on screens 14' to 18' wide) or 7" in diameter (on screens where either height or width equal or exceed 20'). The motorized fabric and roller assembly to be in-stalled in the case at the factory or at a later time at the job site. Roller mounting brackets to be adjustable to allow centering or offsetting of the screen within the case. Screen to be de-signed for left or right-hand motor installation. Screen fabric to be flame retardant and mil-dew resistant fiberglass with black masking borders standard. Bottom of fabric shall be formed into a pocket holding a metal rod. Heavy duty plastic caps shall protect the ends of




the rod. Case to be made of extruded aluminum powder coated white. End caps to be of heavy gauge steel, powder coated white. Bottom of case to have a removable access door. Door to be of extruded aluminum powder coated white. Bottom of case to be self-trimming, with a built-in flange around the bottom of the case. To be complete with a three-position control switch and cover plate. Suitable for use in environmental air space in accordance with section 300-22 (c) of the National Electric Code, and sections 2-128, 12-010 (3) and 12-100 of the Canadian Electrical Code

D. Viewing surface shall be Matte White.

E. Model 1. Manf.: Da-Lite

Model: Large Advantage Electrol Finish – White Cover Substitutions: As approved by Consultant, Owner and Architect

F. Options and accessories: 1. Single motor low-voltage control built in.

2.4 IN-WALL BOX, TYPE 6 A

A. Provided by AV Contractor, installed by Electrical

B. Location as shown on drawings..

C. Features equal to or exceeding the following: 1. Steel construction 2. Mountable in new or old construction 3. Complete with mounting hardware and blank plates 4. UL/c-UL listed and CE compliant 5. Built-in lock and push-to-open retention latch 6. Installation routing template 7. 4 Gang panel mounting

D. Model 1. Manf.: FSR

Model: WB-4G-C Finish: White Substitutions: If approved by Consultant, Owner, and Architect

E. Options and accessories: 1. None

2.5 IN-WALL BOX, TYPE 6 B

A. Provided by AV Contractor, installed by Electrical.

B. Location as shown on drawings..

C. Features equal to or exceeding the following: 1. Steel construction 2. Mountable in new or old construction 3. Complete with mounting hardware and blank plates 4. UL/c-UL listed and CE compliant 5. Built-in lock and push-to-open retention latch




6. Installation routing template 7. 4 Gang panel mounting

D. Model 1. Manf.: FSR

Model: WB-3G-C Finish: White Substitutions: If approved by Consultant, Owner, and Architect

E. Options and accessories: 1. None

2.6 FLOOR BOX

A. Provided by AV Contractor, installed by electrical


C. Manufactured from stamped steel approved for use in above grade and on-grade floor appli-cations. Boxes shall have the ability to accept a component (EFB610-CTR) that will allow the box to be installed in polished concrete or terrazzo floors. Boxes shall be painted with a fusion-bonded epoxy designed for use on metal reinforcement bar and related accessories before encapsulation in concrete, and be approved for use on-grade and above grade floors. Boxes shall be 15-3/16” L x 12-5/8” W x 6-1/16” H [385mm x 321mm x 154mm]. Provide boxes with 10 independent wiring compartments that allow for up to 10 duplex re-ceptacles, communication and/or audio/video services. Boxes shall have removable and re-locatable dividers to permit custom configuration of compartments as well as permit feed to adjacent compartments. Boxes shall permit feed to compartments on the opposite side of the box through a tunnel. Six (6) of the 10 compartments shall have a minimum wiring ca-pacity of 23-1/2-in

3 [597ml]. Four (4) of the 10 compartments shall have a minimum wiring

capacity of 27-in3 [686ml]. Each of the 10 compartments shall have a minimum depth of 3-

1/2” [89mm] behind the plate. Provide boxes with removable compartments to facilitate in-stallation. The compartments shall be removable from the top of the floor box. Provide boxes with two (2) cable guides to organize and maintain the cables egress out of the box. The box shall contain the following number of knockouts: 14 1-inch trade size, six (6) 1-1/4-inch trade size, and four (4) 2-inch trade size. Boxes shall be fully adjustable, accommodat-ing a maximum 2-inch [51mm] pre-concrete pour and a maximum 1/2” [12.7mm] post-concrete pour adjustment. Include mounting brackets with the boxes that will accommodate 15 amp, 20 amp straight blade, 20 amp turn loc, 30 amp straight blade and 30 amp turn loc receptacles. Boxes shall have the ability to accommodate a bracket (EFB-50A) allowing for one (1) 50-amp receptacle. Boxes shall also accommodate Ortronics

® workstation connec-

tivity and modular adapters, a variety of audio/video devices from most manufacturers, and other open system devices.

D. Model 1. Manf.: Legrand Wiremold.

Model: EFB10S-OG Cover: Selected by architect Substitutions: As approved by Consultant, Architect and Owner

E. Options and accessories: 1. Insert plates and fittings as required for complete and finished installation.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Locations: 1. Coordinate locations of devices, as indicated on Drawings and Schedules. 2. Coordinate locations of j-boxes and outlet boxes specified in Section 26 05 00 to ob-

tain mounting heights as indicated on Drawings.

B. Install all devices, enclosures and frames, to be plumb.

C. Refer to Section 27 41 00, General Conditions and Requirements for Audio Visual System.

D. Refer to Section 27 41 16, Integrated Audiovisual Systems and Equipment.

3.2 CONTRACTORS’ FINAL CHECKOUT

A. The contractor shall assure the following: 1. All devices are secured to structure, free from lateral movement and sway, and are

supported per code. 2. Dust, construction debris have been removed from the facility and from the inside of

the enclosures. 3. Refer to Section 27 41 00 and 27 41 16 for additional requirements.




INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS 27 41 16 - 1

SECTION 274116 - INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The Longmont Museum addition project encompasses public areas, mixed-use spaces, an auditorium and other related audiovisual spaces. These facilities are intended to satisfy multiple operational requirements serving the Museum and the City of Longmont.

B. Audiovisual Systems

Auditorium

General

The Auditorium will provide dedicated, indoor space for educational lectures, musical and stage performances, and a variety of events serving the community of Longmont. Seating will provide for 250+ participants on tiered levels with theater seating.

The systems in the Auditorium will support video display, audio, and some special events. It is envisioned that this equipment is the “house” system, providing an intermediate level of capability. Ancillary, leased or performer provided systems would be installed on an as needed (per performance) basis.

Multi-service boxes located in the stage will provide connectivity for a lectern, computer graphics, microphones, intercom, and ancillary devices supporting the various events. Technical support equipment will be located in a dedicated AV room at the rear of the Auditorium.

Seating and counter space in the AV room provides space for technicians and control surfaces for those events requiring a higher level of production support. More basic events will be supported with a simple control panel that initiates the established pre-sets with the push of a button.

Audio Systems

The configuration of the audio systems will be flexible to accommodate both meetings and special events. A local sound system, which will include subwoofers and digitally steerable, column, loudspeakers for voice reinforcement and program sources (computer, Blu-ray, etc.), will be integrated into the design of the space. Stage monitors will be provided for musicians utilizing the “house” system.

High-efficiency, energy-star certified, audio amplifiers along powered speakers will be utilized to minimize power and space requirements.

A variety of wired and wireless microphones will be available for presenters and performers to accommodate their preferences and the requirements of the event. Audience participation and questions will be supported by staff handing a wireless microphone to the participant or a stand mounted microphone that audience members step up to before asking their question.

A dedicated audio mixer with 32 inputs x 24 outputs will be provided for technical audio adjustments. The mixer will include digital control enabling presets to be established and easily recalled to support basic events without a technician. In conjunction with the control system, the audio mixer will provide remote adjustment and operation via an iPod.

An assisted listening system is required for ADA compliance.



27 41 16 - 2 INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS

Inputs for other digital audio will be provided as musical sources for pre, post and auxiliary support of events in the Auditorium and Lobby.

Display and Video Systems

Video and computer images will be projected on an HDTV formatted motorized screen that is suspended above the stage. Secondary projection will be provided on theatrical scrims at the rear of the stage. The motorized screen will be utilized for meetings, presentation, and electronic films while imaging on the scrims will typically support theatrical dance and musical performances. A 1080p resolution projector with 10,000 lumen brightness and a 10,000 to 1 contrast ratio will provide near-theatrical images. The projector will be located within, or concealed above the AV Control Room at the rear of the Auditorium.

A collection of multimedia sources will be included in the design, such as Blu-ray DVD, iPod, etc. Inputs for computer will be provided at the stage and in the AV Control Room.

Video, computer and related audio signals will be routed via a digital matrix systems using twisted pair or fiber cabling. Cable or satellite receivers will be integrated to the system. Service determined by the Museum.

Control Systems

The audiovisual functions of the system will be controlled from the lectern and from a technical support position in the AV Control Room. Additional control will be available via iPad devices.

Control will be provided for routing and control of all audiovisual equipment in the Auditorium. The Auditorium control system will also route and adjust audio to the Lobby or Meeting Rooms for over flow situations.

Control of house lights will be provided while theatrical lighting operates on a separate system with its own control surface.

Miscellaneous Systems

Intercom system will utilize 2-way radios with headsets for production and technical support communications.

Equipment rack space will be allocated in cabinets in the AV equipment room. Power distribution will be provided within the racks along with Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) for critical AV components.

Multi-Purpose Room

General

The Multi-Purpose room will provide a flexible learning and meeting space for the Longmont Museum. Seating will be flexible to accommodate a wide variety of activities. The new room will be combinable with two existing spaces to accommodate larger events and activities.

A location for instructors and presenters to connect computers or mobile media along with individual controls will be provided. Supporting equipment will be located in a ceiling enclosure.

Audio Systems

The audio systems in the space will support audio from local content (computer and video sources).

A portable audio “PA” system will be available for voice reinforcement in the space.

A portable assisted listening system is also provided.




Display and Video Systems

An HDTV format, motorized screens will be provided in the new space, suitable sized for viewing images with some detail. Projectors will be 1080 resolution with +4,000 ANSI lumen brightness to provide well illuminated images in partially lit rooms.

Multimedia inputs will be provided for connection of mobile media including laptop computers, iPads, Blu-ray DVD, ect.

Control System

The audiovisual functions of the system will be controlled from wall mounted push button panel located in a locable box adjacent to the screen. Screen, raise & lower control will also be located in the control box, using an independent control panel.

Miscellaneous System

A ceiling box with power serves as a junction box for wiring to and from the various devices in this room and will house small, supporting electronics for the system.

Equipment Pool

Various pieces of audiovisual equipment will be provided as part of a pool of shared devices that are typically needed on a per-case basis. This equipment will be stored in a central location available to some audiovisual equipped rooms or as backup to installed audiovisual system or equipment failure.

A pool of spare equipment shall include lamps for projectors, video and audio cabling, and critical replacements items should be budgeted and provided in the overall audiovisual system design.

Add Alternate # 1

Ceiling speakers, permanently installed in the Lobby to support events separately or in conjunction with the auditorium shall be priced separately for Owner consideration.


A. Refer to the following Sections for specifications related to the Work: 1. 27 41 00, General Conditions and Requirements for Audiovisual Systems 2. 27 41 13, Architecturally Integrated Audiovisual Devices

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Sound System Goals 3. There will be program audio and speech reinforcement capabilities in major

audiovisual rooms along with background music on the Amenities level. 4. Sound quality should be consistent throughout the spaces, for both program and

speech systems. 5. Sound quality should provide the highest level of speech intelligibility. 6. Room echo should be minimized. 7. Program audio sources should sound natural and unexaggerated, automatically

managed by a digital sound processor.




8. Connectivity should be distributable and routable to various individual or combinable spaces within the program.

B. Video System Goals 1. The quality of distributed video shall be digital, high-definition / resolution. 2. Video on displayed images shall have images sized appropriately for comfortable

legibility of standard size textual information. 3. The minimum height of computer-generated content must be no less than one-sixth

the distance from the display to the farthest viewer where applicable. 4. Video origination in key spaces should be capable of supporting connectivity for

streaming or video conferencing, as appropriate. 5. Key spaces will be selected for video origination of broadcast quality.

C. Energy Star

1. All technology-equipped racks should be equipped with metered power distribution units, suitable for tracking and accessing power consummation to an Energy Star Portfolio Manager system. All audiovisual equipment shall be turn to stand-by mode when not in use with scheduling provided by control server located in the Technical Control Room. Energy Star rated equipment will be specified when suitable and compatible to the technology application.

1.4 CONTROL SYSTEMS

A. User Interface 1. Control system user interfaces pages shall be designed for this project exclusively. While

there are a great number of design approaches to designing the user interface, the following guidelines shall be adhered to: a. All panels are to have the time as an icon, in the same position on every page. b. All pages are to have a title indicating the piece of equipment and/or functionality

being controlled. c. Each individual room type shall be given the same general user interface design

and layout, throughout the entire system, to the greatest extent possible. d. User interface design shall, to the greatest extent possible, maintain continuity

throughout the system. e. Final programming shall include capability to control all functions of the audiovisual

system. Individual device controls shall provide full manufacturer’s functionality unless instructed otherwise by the owner.

f. Devices similar in nature shall be programmed to operate with a common format. g. No individual component shall be programmed to function atypically. h. Whenever the same button appears on more than one page, it will be in the same

position on each page. i. Functions used during a general presentation shall be accessible with a minimal

amount of button presses and page flips. j. Multi-level access to controls should be implemented. k. Single button control strings, allowing one button pushes to start and stop simple

functions should be used as much as possible 2. Three (3) to six (6) months after checkout, as directed by the Owner, Contractor shall

perform a control system revision. This time shall be limited to one (1) site meeting to review requested changes, one (1) day of office time to perform the changes and one (1) day of site work to implement and test changes. Time for these changes shall be included as part of the Contractor’s bid.

B. Functionality 1. The control system shall provide all control capabilities via wired and wireless

touchpanels as indicated in the contract documents. 2. When two or more panels are controlling the same device, each panel shall reflect

current device status




3. Provide true feedback for all devices that offer bidirectional communication, including but not limited to displays and projectors, switchers, DVD players and audio levels.

4. Visual feedback on control panels showing ranges shall be scaled to reflect the actual applicable range. For instance; a volume bar should be scaled such that the bottom of the visual range corresponds with the point at which the audio ceases to be heard.

5. All supporting devices shall be powered off or placed in standby mode on system shut down, including but not limited to displays, projectors, amplifiers, video teleconferencing codecs and DVD players. Power sequencers and controllable PDU’s shall be utilized where available to power off devices that cannot be placed into a standby mode.

6. On system start-up the system shall recall a default state to reset audio levels, routing conditions and other functions requested by the owner.

7. The control system programming shall also allow for adequate start up time for devices that require warm-up time. An on-screen progress bar should be used to indicate that the system is warming up and programming should prevent users from selecting functions that are unavailable due to warm-up conditions.

8. The control system programming shall allow adequate cool-down time for devices requiring cooling after use. An on-screen progress bar should be used to indicate that the system is turning off during cool-down, and that the system can be turned on again only when cool-down is finished. Functions unaffected by a cool-down sequence should still be available during this time.

9. Provide overall all system and subsystem reset buttons 10. Final control system shall support remote control via virtual control panels available from

any web browser. 11. A global management software shall be implemented to allow for remote monitoring,

problem notification via email, scheduling functions and reporting.

1.5 AUDIO SIGNAL PROCESSOR

A. User Interface 1. A graphical user interface shall be provided utilizing the signal processor manufacturer’s

software and an Owner furnished computer. 2. The graphical user interface should provide advanced audio control functions that aren’t

reasonably controlled via the control system touch panel. These functions include but are not limited to audio input control and metering, audio output control and metering and matrix routing.

3. Provide two programming submittals with two revisions to the Consultant and Owner. a. The first submittal shall be comprised of a list of functions to be provided with one

revision. b. The second submittal shall be comprised of a full set of GUI screen shots for

comment and review with one revision.

1.6 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide in accordance with Section 27 41 00, General Conditions and Requirements for Audiovisual Systems

1.7 STANDARDS


1.8 DEFINITIONS





1.9 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide in accordance with Section 27 41 00, General Conditions and Requirements for Audiovisual System 1. Provide product data for:

a. Visual display equipment 1) Video projectors 2) Digital Signal Processing (DSP) video processors 3) Video switchers and routers 4) Video-conferencing Codec 5) Analog video & audio signal drivers 6) Signal conversion and transmission

a) DVI/HDMI and UTP Category cable converters b) Analog video and UTP Category cable converters c) DVI/HDMI and fiber optic cable converters d) Analog video and fiber optic cable converters e) All cable types required for video signal transmission

7) Safety certifications (UL, CE etc.) b. Audio reinforcement equipment

1) Loudspeakers 2) Microphones 3) Audio conferencing Codec 4) Digital Signal Processing (DSP) audio processors 5) Amplifiers 6) Signal conversion and transmission

a) Analog active unbalanced/balancing line-drivers b) Analog audio and UTP Category cable converters c) Analog signal to fiber optic cable converters d) Fiber optic cable to analog signal converters e) All cable types required for audio signal transmission

7) Safety certifications (UL, CE etc.) c. Control System equipment

1) Touch-screen control panels a) Wired

(1) Wall (or) furniture mounted (include back boxes) b) Wireless

(1) Tabletop (2) Wall (or) furniture mounted (include back boxes)

2) Control system processors 3) Control system interfaces 4) All cable types required for control signal transmission 5) Safety certifications (UL, CE etc.)

d. Presentation source equipment 1) Videoconference Codec 2) DVD-BluRay disk player 3) Contractor-provided computers

e. Miscellaneous 1) Wall plates & Floor Boxes

a) Jack and outlet configuration b) Materials c) Finishes [for selection by Architect]. d) Dimensions

2) Safety certifications (UL, CE etc.)

B. Drawings & Documentation




1. Provide in accordance with Section 27 41 00, General Conditions and Requirements for Audiovisual Systems

C. Software Documentation 1. Provide in accordance with Section 27 41 00, General Conditions and Requirements for

Audiovisual Systems

1.10 INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING


1.11 PERFORMANCE TEST


1.12 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES




1.14 DELIVER STORAGE AND HANDLING


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ALL ELECTRONIC PRODUCTS

A. Shall operate on 120 to 240 VAC at 50/60 Hz.

B. Shall be capable of operating continuously for 12 hours over the external ambient temperature range of +10°C to +65°C (20% to 95% humidity, non-condensing) without permanent damage.

C. All programmed, software based microprocessor based control and DSP devices shall be powered by a UPS supply capable of providing 4 minimum hours backup.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Any use of trade names in the equipment list (Appendix A) or on the bid document drawings is to establish a performance standard to be used. Unless noted on the equipment list, it is not intended to exclude other products whose performance, in the judgment of the Systems Designer, is equivalent to those named.

B. All proposed alternates and substitutions from the equipment list shall be submitted in writing for approval by the Owner and Consultant prior to submittal of bid documents. No substitutions shall be considered acceptable without written approval.




C. Materials: Supply materials and equipment that shall be new and shall meet or exceed the latest published specifications of the manufacturer.

D. Supply the latest model, available at the time of bidding, of each piece of equipment. The Owner may request, at their option, that the latest model of equipment, or new technology, available at the time of installation be provided. If a later model is requested, adjustments will be made to cover cost changes between the cost at bid submittal and the cost of the latest model at the time of installation.

E. The equipment list is furnished as a guide and does not represent all equipment required to accomplish the specification. Some listed equipment may require power supplies, interfaces, cables, mounting hardware and/or other items to function and/or interface with other subsystems. The specification requires a complete working system. The quantities of pieces of equipment have been purposely left out. Equipment quantities are furnished if the quantities cannot be easily determined from the specifications or drawings.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. See Equipment Schedule in Appendix A for listing of specified equipment

2.4 WIRE AND CABLE

A. Section 27 41 00 – General Conditions for Integrated Audiovisual Systems

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Section 27 41 00 – General Conditions and Requirements of Audiovisual systems

3.2 MOUNTING HEIGHTS


B. Coordinate locations of the following with mounting heights as indicated on drawings. 1. Technical wall plates

a. AV input/output connections b. Flat panel display panel connections c. Video projector connections d. Annotation panel connections e. Networked Digital Clocks f. PTZ cameras g. Wall mounted speaker boxes

2. Control panels 3. Pull boxes

C. Install all technical panels plumb.

D. Install equipment racks in location shown on drawings

E. Arrange for adequate ventilation and access.

3.3 CABLE SUPPORT





1. Contractor installed supports shall be used to supplement the main cable support system when any cabling leaves the main support system or is unsupported for more than three and one half feet (3’-6”). Non-Continuous cable supports shall be properly fastened to building structure.

2. Cables on top of ceiling tiles will be rejected. Cable supported by ceiling grid support wires will be rejected.

3.4 CABLE SEPARATION

A. Section 27 41 00 – General Conditions and Requirements of Audiovisual systems 1. Cable separation of cables for runs greater than 7.5 m.

a. Microphone Level – 12” from all other circuits. b. Line Level and Control – 12” from any circuit with signal of 20dB or greater than

Line Level and Control cables. c. Speaker level circuits – 12”mm from other circuits. d. Video and Data – 12” mm from any circuit with signal of 20dB or greater than

Video and Data. e. AC Power Circuits – 12”mm from all other circuits.

3.5 RACK CABLING

A. Section 27 41 00 – General Conditions and Requirements of Audiovisual systems 1. Neatly train and lace cables. 2. Route Cables from components to lacing bars installed on rear rack rail. 3. Provide appropriate service loops for each cable. 4. Cable separation of cables for runs within Equipment rack.

a. Microphone Level – 12” from all other circuits. b. Line Level and Control – 2” from any circuit with signal of 20dB or greater than

Line Level and Control cables. c. Speaker level circuits – 2” from other circuits. d. Video and Data – 2” from any circuit with signal of 20dB or greater than Video and

Data. e. AC Power Circuits – 2” from all other circuits.

3.6 APPROVED WIRE TERMINATION MEANS

A. Section 27 41 00 – General Conditions and Requirements of Audiovisual systems 1. Solder Connections – For connectors utilizing Solder Cups 2. Terminal strip Connectors – For termination of blunt cut cables, cable to be tinned prior to

termination 3. Multi Pin connectors – Utilize connector manufacturers crimper 4. Crimp Cap Terminations – For Loudspeaker circuits at individual devices. Distribution

cable termination to utilize terminal strip connectors.

3.7 CONTRACTORS’ FINAL CHECKOUT


TABLE 1 – EQUIPMENT LIST

A. See attached Appendix for the equipment lists for the audiovisual systems. These lists are provided for the bidding process. Itemized list with pricing, similar to the attached shall be provided to the Owner and Consultant for review, prior to any award.




DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 28 3111 - 1

SECTION 28 3111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Fire-alarm control unit.2. Manual fire-alarm boxes.3. System smoke detectors.4. Air-sampling smoke detectors.5. Heat detectors.6. Notification appliances.7. Device guards.8. Addressable interface device.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 28 0513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for

cables and conductors for fire-alarm systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.

B. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel.

C. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories.1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, profiles, and finishes.2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system.1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of

the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads,

required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory and field wiring.

4. Detail assembly and support requirements.5. Include voltage drop calculations for all new and existing notification-appliance

circuits.6. Include battery-size for calculations. Include the new and existing equipment.7. Include input/output matrix. Include the new and existing equipment.8. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been

tested as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72.



28 3111 - 2 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

9. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector.10. Verify that each duct detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature,

and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.11. Provide program report showing that air-sampling detector pipe layout balances

pneumatically within the airflow range of the air-sampling detector.12. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning

ducts, drawn to scale; coordinate location of duct smoke detectors and access to them.a. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling

tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators.b. Show field wiring required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm.c. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.d. Show air-sampling detector pipe routing.

13. Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, grounding schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.

14. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams.

C. General Submittal Requirements:1. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.b. NICET-certified, fire-alarm technician; Level IV minimum.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For notification appliances and smoke and heat detectors, in addition to submittals listed above, indicate compliance with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.1. Drawings showing the location of each notification appliance and smoke and heat

detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the device.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72. Calculate spacing and intensities for strobe signals and sound-pressure levels for audible appliances.

3. Indicate audible appliances required to produce square wave signal per NFPA 72.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

1.6 Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.1. In addition to items specified in Section 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following:a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and

Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.b. Provide "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of

Completion Documents" according to the "Completion Documents" Article in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and equipment. Each conductor shall be numbered at every junction point with indication of origination and termination points.




d. Riser diagram.e. Device addresses.f. Air-sampling system sample port locations and modeling program report

showing layout meets performance criteria.g. Record copy of site-specific software.h. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection, Testing

and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following:1) Equipment tested.2) Frequency of testing of installed components.3) Frequency of inspection of installed components.4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.5) Manufacturer's user training manuals.

i. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.

j. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit and each annunciator unit.

B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data

files.3. Device address list.4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no

fewer than one unit.2. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each

type installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type.3. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to two percent of amount of each type installed, but

no fewer than one unit of each type.4. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked or tamperproofed components.5. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.6. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system. Provide in a box or cabinet with

compartments marked with fuse types and sizes.7. Filters for Air-Sampling Detectors: Quantity equal to two percent of amount of each

type installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type.8. Air-Sampling Fan: Quantity equal to one for every five detectors, but no fewer than

one unit of each type.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level IV technician.

C. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company.





A. Perform a full test of the existing system prior to starting work. Document any equipment or components not functioning as designed.

B. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated:1. Notify Architect and Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed

interruption of fire-alarm service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Owner's written

permission.

C. Use of Devices during Construction: Protect devices during construction unless devices are placed in service to protect the facility during construction.

1.11 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire-alarm system equipment and components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.1. Warranty Extent: All equipment and components not covered in the Maintenance

Service Agreement.2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Components shall be compatible with, and operate as an extension of, the existing SIMPLEX 4010 addressablesystem. Provide system manufacturer's certification that all components provided have been tested as, and will operate as, a system.

B. UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission and voice/horn/strobe evacuation.

C. Automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors.

D. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:1. Manual stations.2. Heat detectors.3. Smoke detectors.




4. Duct smoke detectors.5. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.6. Fire standpipe system.

B. All existing fire alarm sequences and control shall remain as is and fully operational. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances, including voice evacuation

notices.2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at fire-alarm control unit and remote

annunciators.3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.6. Activate voice/alarm communication system.7. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm

mode.8. Activate smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighters' smoke-control

system panel.9. Activate stairwell and elevator-shaft pressurization systems.10. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.11. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors.12. Activate elevator power shunt trip.13. Record events in the system memory.14. Indicate device in alarm on the graphic annunciator.

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:1. Valve supervisory switch.2. Elevator shunt-trip supervision.3. User disabling of zones or individual devices.

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating

devices.3. Loss of communication with any addressable sensor, input module, relay, control

module, remote annunciator, printer interface, or Ethernet module.4. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.5. Ground or a single break in internal circuits of fire-alarm control unit.6. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.7. Break in standby battery circuitry.8. Failure of battery charging.9. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.10. Voice signal amplifier failure.

E. System Supervisory Signal Actions:1. Initiate notification appliances.2. Identify specific device initiating the event at fire-alarm control unit.3. Record the event on system printer.4. After a time delay of 200 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to the

remote alarm receiving station.5. Transmit system status to building management system.6. Display system status on graphic annunciator.

2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:





1. Simplex 4010

B. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:1. All functionality of the Fire alarm Control Panel (FACP) shall be retained. All

operations of the panel shall remain completely functional at the completion of the project. Provide and upgrade the FACP most recent operating system for the panel.

2. Addressable Initiation Device Circuits: The FACP shall indicate which communication zones have been silenced and shall provide selective silencing of alarm notification appliance by building communication zone.

3. Addressable Control Circuits for Operation of Notification Appliances and Mechanical Equipment: The FACP shall be listed for releasing service.

C. Initiating-Device, Notification-Appliance, and Signaling-Line Circuits:1. Pathway Class Designations: NFPA 72, Class B.2. Pathway Survivability: Level 1.3. Install no more than the manufacturer recommended number of addressable devices

on each signaling-line circuit.

D. Smoke-Alarm Verification:1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm-verification" signal at fire-alarm

control unit.2. Activate an approved "alarm-verification" sequence at fire-alarm control unit and

detector.3. Record events by the system printer.4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified.5. Cancel fire-alarm control unit indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.

E. Notification-Appliance Circuit:1. Audible appliances shall sound in a three-pulse temporal pattern, as defined in

NFPA 72.2. Where notification appliances provide signals to sleeping areas, the alarm signal

shall be a 520-Hz square wave with an intensity 15 dB above the average ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level, or at least 75 dBA, whichever is greater, measured at the pillow.

3. Visual alarm appliances shall flash in synchronization where multiple appliances are in the same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72.

F. Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in smoke-barrier walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system.

G. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory, and print out the final adjusted values on system printer.

H. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.

I. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module.Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source.1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the

power-supply module rating.




J. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch.1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium.

2.4 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, breaking-glass or

plastic-rod type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.

2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.2. Detectors shall be four-wire type.3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,

alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in

a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and power-on status.

7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be digital-addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to

identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be

able to manually access the following for each detector:a. Primary status.b. Device type.c. Present average value.d. Present sensitivity selected.e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to

identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be

able to manually access the following for each detector:a. Primary status.b. Device type.c. Present average value.d. Present sensitivity selected.e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector for smoke detection in HVAC system ducts.




4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for

specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Fully programmable relay rated to interrupt fan motor-control

circuit.

2.6 HEAT DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.1. Temperature sensors shall test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the

device.

B. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed temperature of 190 deg F (88 deg C).1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,

alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2.7 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification-appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections. All new Notification devices shall match the existing in tone and operation.

B. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet (3 m) from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol.

C. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) high letters on the lens.1. Rated Light Output:

a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be

determined with guards in place.4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red.

D. Voice/Tone Notification Appliances:1. Comply with UL 1480.2. Speakers for Voice Notification: Locate speakers for voice notification to provide the

intelligibility requirements of the "Notification Appliances" and "Emergency Communications Systems" chapters in NFPA 72.

3. High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W.4. Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W.5. Mounting: surface mounted and bidirectional.6. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment of speaker

location.

E. Exit Marking Audible Notification Appliance:




1. Exit marking audible notification appliances shall meet the audibility requirements in NFPA 72.

2. Provide exit marking audible notification appliances at the entrance to all building exits.

3. Provide exit marking audible notification appliances at the entrance to areas of refuge with audible signals distinct from those used for building exit marking.

2.8 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing. Reconnect existing Remote Annunciator.

2.9 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. General:1. Include address-setting means on the module.2. Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module type.3. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers.

B. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

C. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal [to elevator controller to initiate elevator recall] [to circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown].1. Allow the control panel to switch the relay contacts on command.2. Have a minimum of two normally open and two normally closed contacts available for

field wiring.

D. Control Module:1. Operate notification devices.2. Operate solenoids for use in sprinkler service.

2.10 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632. Reuse the existing communicator. Communicator shall retain existing operation and be fully tested to verify existing operations is maintained as well as responding to the new alarms.

2.11 DEVICE GUARDS

A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, gong, or other device requiring protection.1. Factory fabricated and furnished by device manufacturer.2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation, temperature, humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.




1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been permanently established in spaces where equipment and wiring are installed, before installation begins.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before installation.


3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems."1. Devices placed in service before all other trades have completed cleanup shall be

replaced.2. Devices installed but not yet placed in service shall be protected from construction

dust, debris, dirt, moisture, and damage according to manufacturer's written storage instructions.

B. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making changes or connections.1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building.2. Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising station.3. Expand, modify, and supplement existing control and monitoring equipment as

necessary to extend existing control and monitoring functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system.

C. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inches (1980 mm)above the finished floor.

D. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes:1. Install manual fire-alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches (1520 mm)

of the exit doorway.2. Mount manual fire-alarm box on a background of a contrasting color.3. The operable part of manual fire-alarm box shall be between 42 inches (1060 mm)

and 48 inches (1220 mm) above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

E. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:1. Comply with the "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices"

chapter in NFPA 72, for smoke-detector spacing.2. Comply with the "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices"

chapter in NFPA 72, for heat-detector spacing.3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet (9 m).4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high

ceiling areas shall be determined according to Annex A in NFPA 72.5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 36 inches ((910 mm)) from air-supply diffuser

or return-air opening.6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches (300 mm) from any part

of a lighting fixture and not directly above pendant mounted or indirect lighting.




F. Install a cover on each smoke detector that is not placed in service during construction.Cover shall remain in place except during system testing. Remove cover prior to system turnover.

G. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct. Tubes more than 36 inches (9100 mm) long shall be supported at both ends.1. Do not install smoke detector in duct smoke-detector housing during construction.

Install detector only during system testing and prior to system turnover.

H. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install in a visible location near each smoke detector, sprinkler water-flow switch, and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.

I. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling.Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

J. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

K. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

3.3 PATHWAYS

A. Pathways above recessed ceilings and in nonaccessible locations may be routed exposed.1. Exposed pathways located less than 96 inches (2440 mm) above the floor shall be

installed in EMT.

B. Pathways shall be installed in EMT.

C. Exposed EMT shall be painted red enamel.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.1. Verify that hardware and devices are listed for use with installed fire-alarm system

before making connections.

B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 36 inches (910 mm) from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled.1. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated HVAC duct systems.2. Magnetically held-open doors.3. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.4. Data communication circuits for connection to mass notification system.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."




B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.

B. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by Architect authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

D. Perform the following tests and inspections[ with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative]:1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system documentation that is required by the "Completion Documents, Preparation" table in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.




3.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.1. Include visual inspections according to the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in

the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Perform tests in the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Perform tests per the "Testing Frequencies" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3.9 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Comply with UL 864.

B. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include software support for two years.

C. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for using software.1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule access to system and

to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.




SITE CLEARING 31 1000-1

SECTION 31 1000 - SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply if provided, to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Protecting existing trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or as designated by Owner in pre-construction conference.

2. Removing existing trees, shrubs, and other vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place removing site

utilities.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading.

2. Division 31 Section “Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control” for storm water erosion and sediment mitigation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials.

B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain on Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.



31 1000-2 SITE CLEARING

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

B. Record drawings, identifying and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. Information required may also be included in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents."


A. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as directed by Owner’s Representative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with requirements, which may also be included in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Protect improvements on adjacent and Owner’s property.

C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing.

D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place.

E. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to parties having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving," (PART 2 – PRODUCTS).




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks, survey control points, monuments, property line pins and other reference points from disturbance during construction. If disturbed or destroyed, restore or replace at no cost to Owner.

B. Provide erosion control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust from leaving project site.

C. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.

D. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore or replace damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

3.2 TREE PROTECTION

A. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain before starting site clearing. Remove fence when construction is complete.

1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area. 2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area. 3. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash.

B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Where excavation for new construction is required within drip line of trees, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible.

1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated

and covered with soil. 3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter with an emulsified

asphalt or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. 4. Cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying and backfill with soil as

soon as possible.

D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Owner’s Representative.

1. Employ a qualified arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, to submit details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs.

2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by the qualified arborist.



31 1000-4 SITE CLEARING

3.3 UTILITIES

A. Contractor will locate, identify, arrange for disconnect and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed before site clearing.

1. Verify that utilities indicated as abandoned have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing.

2. Arrange with utility companies having jurisdiction to shut off indicated utilities.

B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner’s Representative not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s Representative’s written permission.

C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.

D. Removal of underground utilities may also be included in Division 2 Sections covering site utilities. Removal of underground utilities may also be included in Division 15 Mechanical or Division 16 Electrical Sections.

E. After removal of underground utilities, as indicated, properly cap and/or plug existing lines to remain in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction.

3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots.

1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner

where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 3. Grind stumps and completely remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth

of 18 inches (450 mm) below exposed subgrade. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees. 5. Chip removed tree branches and remove from site per Owner’s Representative’s

instruction.

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earth moving is indicated.

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches (200 mm), and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered or as determined by Geotechnical Engineer in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials.




1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches unless authorized by Owner’s Representative.

2. Do not stockpile topsoil within drip line of remaining trees. 3. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal. 4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading a thicker layer of topsoil.

3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above and below grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction.

B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated on plans.

1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.

2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion.

C. Remove existing fill. Refer to Geotechnical Investigation and/or drawings for information regarding suitability for re-use and estimates of location/extent of existing fill.

3.7 DISPOSAL

A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities.




EARTH MOVING 31 2000-1

SECTION 31 2000 - EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Additional information concerning earth moving may be found on the civil drawings, in the project geotechnical report and City of Longmont construction standards. In case of conflict between the drawings, jurisdictional criteria and the information specified herein, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

C. Additional information concerning earth moving may be found in the geotechnical investigation report by Terracon, Inc. dated October 16, 2013. All requirements and recommendations of this report shall be followed. The information shown in this report is for information and it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to field verify conditions indicated.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Preparing and grading subgrades for walks, and pavements. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures including overexcavation of

existing unsatisfactory on-site soil materials and replacement with structural fill. 3. Subsurface drainage backfill for trenches.


1. Division 31 Section “Site Clearing”. 2. Division 31 Section “Trenching and Backfilling” for excavating and backfilling of utilities. 3. Division 31 Section “Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control” for erosion and

sedimentation control measures.

C. Permits and Fees: Obtain and pay for all permits and fees required for the work of this section, including erosion and sediment control and water quality permits required by the City of Long-mont and the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment, Water Quality Control Division.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.



31 2000-2 EARTH MOVING

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill approved by Geotechnical Engineer.

E. Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water.

F. Excavation: Removal of all material of whatever character required for the work encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated, including boulders. See Section 3.4 for definition of unclassified and classified excavation.

G. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed or approved by Owners Representative and the testing and inspections agency to correct unsatisfactory conditions. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract Provisions for changes in the Work.

H. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet in width and more than 30 feet in length.

I. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Owners Representative. Unauthorized excavation including disposition of overexcavated materials and other work resulting from slides, cave-ins, swelling, upheaval, or remedial work, as well as remedial work directed by Owners Representative, shall be without additional compensation.

J. Fill: Fill is all material placed to raise the grade of the site or to backfill excavation, upon which the Geotechnical Engineer has made sufficient tests and observations to enable him to issue a written statement that, in his opinion, the fill has been placed and compacted in accordance with the requirements of these specifications.

K. Structural Fill: Select granular material for use below floor slabs and to 5-feet-0-inches beyond building lines. On-site material may be used if approved by the Geotechnical Engineer.

L. Underslab Gravel: Imported Class 6 road base per Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (current addition) or material approved by Geotechnical Engineer.

M. Rock Excavation: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. for Bulk Excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. for footing, trench, and pit excavation which in the Geotechnical Engineer’s opinion cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted:

1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch- (1065-mm-) wide, maximum, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 138-hp (103-kW) flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 28,090 lbf (125 kN) and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,650 lbf (83 kN); measured according to SAE J-1179.

2. Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 210-hp (157-kW) flywheel power and developing a minimum of 48,510-lbf (216-kN) breakout force with a general-purpose bare bucket; measured according to SAE J-732.

N. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.




O. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

P. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

Q. Utilities: Include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Material Test Reports: Provided by Owner from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.

2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.

B. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earth moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins.


A. Comply with applicable codes, ordinances, regulations, references and standards in effect at bid date:

1. Uniform Building Code (UBC) or International Building Code (IBC) per jurisdiction criteria. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (test methods as specified hereafter)(ASTM). 3. State and local codes.

B. In case of conflict between the above codes, regulations, references and standards and these specifications, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

C. Testing Agency: The Owner will employ a qualified independent Geotechnical testing agency. Contractor shall furnish testing agency access to work, facilities and incidental labor required for testing. Notify the testing and inspection agency not less than 48 hours in advance of all work requiring testing.

D. Geotechnical Engineer: All materials and operations under this section of the specifications shall be executed under the supervision of a Geotechnical Engineer who will place qualified personnel on the site during earth moving operations as necessary.

The Geotechnical Engineer shall approve all foundation excavations and give written approval of the completed foundations to the Owner’s Representative at the following times:

1. When excavations are first open. 2. Just prior to placing of concrete, shall test and control the fill compaction, approve the

materials and method of placing and compacting and give written approval to the Own-er’s Representative that all bearing surfaces and fill requirements have been inspected.




3. The Contractor shall be responsible to notify the Geotechnical Engineer when tests are to be made.

E. For approval of imported or on-site fill material, notify the Geotechnical Engineer at least four (4) working days in advance of intention to import material, designate the proposed borrow area and permit the Geotechnical Engineer to sample as necessary from the borrow area for the purpose of making acceptance tests to prove the quality of the material. The Geotechnical En-gineer report on the acceptability shall be final and binding.

F. Reference Standards:

Compaction Standard: Standard Proctor Density ASTM D698.

G. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as directed by Owner’s Representative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with requirements, which may also be included in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Existing Utilities: Locations, sizes and depths or invert elevations of existing utilities as shown on the drawings are based on information provided by others, and believed to be correct, but may not be absolutely so. Such information is therefore presented only as approximations, and should be verified prior to construction. Protect from damage any sewer, water, gas, electric, phone or other pipe lines or conduits uncovered during the work until they have been examined by the Owner’s Representative. If such lines are found to be abandoned and not in use, re-move affected sections without extra cost. If such lines are found to be in use, carefully protect and carry on work around them. If Owner’ Representative deems it advisable to move such lines, Owner will pay cost of moving. Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Owner’s Representative and then only after ar-ranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.

1. Contact utility-locator service for area where project is located before excavating. 2. Notify Owner’s Representative not less than two (2) days in advance of proposed utility

interruptions. 3. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s Representative's written

permission.

B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be re-moved. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.

C. Remove all existing fill deemed by Geotechnical Engineer to be unsatisfactorily placed.

D. Existing Contours and Elevations: Contours and spot elevations of existing ground elevations at the site, and approximate elevations of finish grade cuts, fills, and excavations for the Work are shown on Drawings. Contours and elevations for existing ground lines are based on infor-mation provided by others, and are believed to be correct, but may not be absolutely so. Exist-ing contours and elevations should therefore be considered approximate, and should be veri-fied at the site prior to construction.

E. Verification of Existing Conditions: Visit the site prior to submission of bids. Verify existing conditions, elevations, and contours. In the event of discrepancies between existing conditions and those indicated on the Contract Documents or survey, contact the Owner’s Representative for clarification.




F. Existing Benchmarks: Carefully preserve and maintain existing benchmarks, monuments, property line pins, and other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, restore or replace by a Professional Land Surveyor at no additional cost to Owner.

G. Frost Protection: When freezing temperatures may be expected, do not excavate to the full depth indicated unless the footing or slabs are to be poured immediately after the excavation has been completed. If placing of concrete is delayed, protect the bottoms of excavations from frost until concrete is placed.

1.7 WARRANTY

Settlement in backfill, fill or in structures built over backfill or fill, which may occur within the specified project warranty period, shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner. Any structures damaged by settlement shall be restored to their original condition by the Contractor, at no cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Shall meet approval of Geotechnical Engineer and shall be free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. Clean, on-site, natural soils, or imported materials, as approved by the Geotechnical Engineer.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, and A-7 according to AASHTO M 145, or a combination of these groups, as identified by the Geotechnical Engineer.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Backfill and Fill: Approved by Geotechnical Engineer.

E. Structural Fill: Approved by Geotechnical Engineer.

F. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1 ½-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

G. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1 ½-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

H. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1 ½-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.




I. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

J. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1 ½-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.

K. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve.

L. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand.

M. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.

2.2 GEOTEXTILES

A. Subsurface Drainage and Separation Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288. Utilize Mirafi 140N or as recommended by Geotechnical Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving operations.

B. Preparation of subgrade for earth moving operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing."

C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 31 Section "Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control," during earth moving operations. Provide erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and rights-of-way.

D. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary.

E. Cold Weather Work: Prevent frost from entering bearing stratus upon which construction will take place or in areas where fill will be placed in that season.

3.2 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and subsurface ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.




B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.

3. Obtain and comply with all provisions of the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment, Water Quality Control Division, Construction Dewatering Permit.

C. Protection of Persons and Property:

1. Provide all necessary measures to protect workmen and passersby. Barricade open ex-cavations occurring as part of the Work, as required by municipal or other authorities hav-ing jurisdiction.

2. Protect adjacent streets, roadways, and properties throughout the entire operation. Pro-tect newly graded areas from destruction by weather or runoff. Protect structures, utili-ties, sidewalks, pavements, and other improvements from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving op-erations.

3.3 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.

3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: All excavation (other than rock excavation) is considered as unclassified and is defined as removal of all material encountered, regardless of soil type. Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include soil materials, and obstructions. Unclassified excavation is considered normal excavation and no extra costs will be allowed.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

2. Remove material of every nature or description encountered in obtaining required lines and grades. Excavate and/or place and compact fill to provide for building pad eleva-tion(s) required by drawings.

3. Excavate wide enough at foundations and retaining walls to permit erection and removal of forms, application of dampproofing or waterproofing.

4. Pitch grading around excavations to prevent water from running into excavated areas. 5. Pre-rip hardpan and soft bedrock with single-tooth ripper or other suitable equipment to

facilitate excavation with conventional earth-moving equipment. 6. Bearing soils disturbed by excavating equipment must be recompacted to 95 percent of

maximum Standard Proctor Density (ASTM D698) prior to placing concrete. 7. Exposed areas which will receive fill once properly cleaned, shall be scarified to a mini-

mum depth of 8-inches, conditioned to near optimum moisture content, and compacted.

B. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be classified as earth excavation and rock excavation. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross sectioned by Owner’s Representative.




1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation.

a. Intermittent drilling; ram hammering; or ripping of material not classified as rock excavation is earth excavation.

C. Stability:

1. Slope sides of excavations in compliance with OSHA requirements and local codes or ordinances. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated.

2. Continuously monitor cut slopes for distress. Take all necessary precautions to safe-guard workers, structures, and utilities.

3. Provide all necessary shoring, sheeting, or bracing of sides of excavations required to prevent caving, erosion, and gullying. Provide underpinning of existing structures or oth-er improvements adjacent to excavations which are subject to damage.

D. Unanticipated Conditions: Notify the Owner’s Representative immediately upon finding evidence of previous structures or filled materials which penetrate below designated excavation levels, groundwater or water-bearing strata, or other conditions which are not shown or which cannot be reasonably assumed from existing surveys and geotechnical reports. Secure the Owner’s Represenative instruction before proceeding with further work in such areas.

E. Rock Excavation: Includes removal and disposal of rock. Remove rock to lines and subgrade elevations indicated to permit installation of permanent construction. Rock excavation in unconfined areas is defined as removal and disposal of material which in the Geotechnical Engineer’s opinion, cannot be excavated without continuous and systematic drilling and blasting, or continuous use of a suitable ripper or other special equipment.

1. Unanticipated Rock Excavation: Rock excavation that is not indicated on existing surveys or which cannot be reasonably assumed from geotechnical studies of the site and which could not have been anticipated without extensive investigations. Unanticipated rock excavation shall be subject to change order procedures or previously agreed upon unit prices.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10-foot. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

2. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations 6 to 12 inches (150 to 300 mm) above bottom of pile cap before piles are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced material. Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps.

3. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces.




4. Excavation Below Slab on Grade, or Walks, or Pavement: Overexcavate clays and claystone within the proposed footprint of the building slab-on-grade to a minimum depth as recommended in Geotech Report and replace with on-site or imported materials as approved by Geotechnical Engineer.

B. Existing man-made fill shall be removed under structures as required by the Geotechnical Engineer.

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.

B. Scarify subgrade soils beneath exterior slabs, sidewalks and pavements to a minimum depth of 8-inches, moisture condition and recompact as specified.

C. Existing man-made fill shall be removed under walks and pavements as required by the Geotechnical Engineer.

3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Refer to Division 31 Section “Trenching and Backfilling,” for excavating and backfilling of utilities.

3.8 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Notify Geotechnical Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade.

B. If Owner’s Representative and Geotechnical Consultant determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.

C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Remove and replace soft areas. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).

2. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons.

3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Owner’s Representative, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Owner’s Representative, without additional compensation.




3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used when approved by Geotechnical Engineer. If approved by Geotechnical Engineer, structural fill placed at 100 percent ASTM D698, 2 percent below to 1 percent above optimum moisture may be used.

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Owner’s Representative.

3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials in approved locations without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.11 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. 8. Acceptance of subgrade by Geotechnical Engineer.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Refer to Division 31 Section “Trenching and Backfilling,” for excavating and backfilling of utilities.

3.13 SOIL FILL

A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills.

1. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

2. In areas of fill, scarify natural soil following removal of unsatisfactory material, to a depth of 8-inches.




B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations per the geotechnical report and as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill or structural fill as approved by Geotechnical

Engineer. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill or reconditioned on-site soils or imported fills of

native soils as approved by Geotechnical Engineer. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill or reconditioned on-site soils or

imported fills of native soils as approved by Geotechnical Engineer.

C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.14 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to 1 perent below or to 3 percent over optimum moisture content for clay soils, or within 2 percent of optimum moisture content for granular soils. Refer to geotechnical study for additional recommendations.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content beyond the tolerances described above and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

3.15 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698:

1. Under exterior flatwork, slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 8 inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

2. Underfootings and interior floor slabs, excavate to approved natural soils, in fill condition, compact to 95 percent.

3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 90 percent. Standard Proctor.

4. Compact foundation wall backfill to 95 percent. Standard Proctor. 5. Compact scarified subgrade soils to 95 percent. Standard Proctor. 6. Compact retaining wall backfill to 95 percent. Standard Proctor.




3.16 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances.

B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 0.10 feet. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 0.10 feet. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 0.10 feet. All pedestrian walkways to meet ADA grading

recommendations for minimum and maximum grades.

3.17 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES

A. Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase and base course under pavements and walks as follows:

1. Install separation geotextile, if requested by Geotechnical Engineer, on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends.

2. Place base course material over subbase course under hot-mix asphalt pavement. 3. Shape subbase and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 4. Place subbase and base course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a

single layer. 5. Place subbase and base course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness

in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick.

6. Compact subbase and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

C. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches (300 mm) wide, of satisfactory soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing




subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Owner’s Representative.

D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Perform field moisture tests in accordance with ASTM D3017. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies at a minimum:

1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1 test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests.

2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests.

E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.19 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Owner’s Representative; reshape and recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.20 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Owner’s Representative.

1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dis-pose of it off Owner's property.




TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 2333-1

SECTION 31 2333 – TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Additional information concerning trenching and backfilling may be found on the civil drawings, in the project geotechnical study/report and City of Longmont construction standards. In case of conflict between the drawings, jurisdictional criteria and the information specified herein, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

C. Additional information concerning earth moving may be found in the geotechnical investigation report by Terracon, Inc. dated October 16, 2013. All requirements and recommendations of this report shall be followed. The information shown in this report is for information and it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to field verify conditions indicated.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 2. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches. 3. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits

for buried utility structures.


1. Division 31 Section “Earth Moving” for soil materials, site excavating, filling and grading. 2. Division 31 Section “Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control” for erosion and

sediment control. 3. Division 33 Section “Water Utility Distribution Piping” for water service installation. 4. Division 33 Section “Storm Utility Drainage Piping” for storm sewer system installation. 5. Division 33 Section “Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping” for sanitary sewer main installation.

C. Shoring Design: Provide the services of a professional engineer to design all shoring, bracing, and underpinning required to protect the safety of workers and integrity of adjacent existing structures or other improvements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.



B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.



31 2333-2 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as backfill approved by Geotechnical Engineer.

E. Unclassified Excavation: Removal of all material of whatever-character required for the work encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated, including boulders.

F. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed or approved by Owner’s Representative and the testing and inspections agency to correct unsatisfactory conditions. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

G. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than [10 feet in width and more than [30 feet in length.

H. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Owners Representative. Unauthorized excavation including disposition of overexcavated materials and other work resulting from slides, cave-ins, swelling, upheaval, or remedial work, as well as remedial work directed by Owners Representative, shall be without additional compensation.

I. Rock Excavation: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material that exceed [1 cu. yd. for bulk excavation or [3/4 cu. yd. for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted:

1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch- wide, maximum, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 138-hp flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 28,090 lbf and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,650 lbf; measured according to SAE J-1179.

2. Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 210-hp (flywheel power and developing a minimum of 48,510-lbf breakout force with a general-purpose bare bucket; measured according to SAE J-732.

J. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

K. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

L. Utilities: Includes on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Each type of plastic warning tape.




B. Samples: Contractor to submit representative samples of all materials proposed for use in bedding and trench backfilling operations to the testing and inspections agency for analysis and determination of compliance with the requirements specified herein.

C. Material Test Reports: Provided by [Owner] from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.

2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.

D. Pre-Excavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins.


A. Testing Agency:

1. All testing and inspections required herein will be performed by an independent testing and inspection agency employed by the [Owner.

2. Notify the testing and inspection agency not less than 48 hours in advance of all work re-quiring testing or inspection services.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with all applicable requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration and local and State rules, regulations, and ordinances concerning shoring, bracing, or sloping of excavations and safety of workers. Safety of workers is the re-sponsibility of the Contractor.

C. Coordination: Coordinate scheduling and procedures for trench excavation, bedding, and backfilling with other Sections whose work relates to or is affected by this work.

D. Pre-Construction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as directed by Owner’s Representative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with requirements, which also may be included in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Existing Utilities: Locations, sizes and depths or invert elevations of existing utilities as shown on the drawings are [based on information provided by others, and are] believed to be correct, but may not be absolutely so. Such information is therefore presumed only as approximations and should be verified prior to construction. Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Owner’s Representative and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.

1. Notify Owner’s Representative not less than two (2) days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s Representative's written permission.

3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.




B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.

C. Existing Bench Marks: Carefully preserve and maintain existing bench marks, monuments, property line pins, and other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, restore or replace them at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Verification of Existing Conditions: Visit the site prior to submission of bids. Verify existing conditions, elevations, and utility locations. In the event of discrepancies between existing conditions and those indicated on the Contract Documents or survey, contact the Owner’s Representative for clarification.

1.7 WARRANTY

Settlement in backfill, fill or in structures built over backfill or fill, which may occur within the specified project warranty period, shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner. Any structures damaged by settlement shall be restored to their original condition by the Contractor, at no cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Utility Trench Bedding Materials:

1. Granular Bedding: Well graded mixture of sound mineral aggregate complying with Class 67 (Modified) gradation in accordance with the following table:

Class 67 (Modified) Gradation Nominal Size Percent Passing by Weight

¾” 90-100 3/8” 20-55 No. 4 5-10 No. 8 5-10

In the event the excavation or overexcavation for bedding is below the water table, the sub-bedding material shall consist of ¾-inches to 1-1/2-inches rock (or larger if ap-proved), placed in accordance with the Agency have authority .

2. Sand Bedding: Clean, well-graded sand, not more than 5% by weight passing a No. 200 sieve.

3. Agency Requirements: Bedding requirements shall be in accordance with jurisdiction having control over utility.

B. Utility Trench Backfill Materials:

1. Existing soils obtained from trench excavations, including granular or aggregate base course from removed pavements, broken and pulverized claystone or claystone-sandstone bedrock may be used for backfilling trenches, provided it meets any special requirements of the Utility Agency and Geotechnical Engineer. Bedrock must be pro-cessed and broken or pulverized so that the maximum particle or fragment size does not exceed three-inches (3-inches).




C. Unsuitable Utility Trench Materials: Materials unsuitable for bedding and backfilling include highly organic soils, ASTM D2487 Group PT topsoil, and soils containing roots, vegetable mat-ter, trash, and debris.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Shoring and Bracing: Provide all materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers, and cross-braces, in good and serviceable condition, as required for safety and by governing authorities.

B. [Detectable] Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. [Green: Sewer systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work of this Section will be performed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been cor-rected. Commencement of work implies acceptance of all areas and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing."

C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 31 Section "Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control," during earthwork operations.

D. Existing Utilities:

1. General: Location of existing utilities shown on the plans are approximate only. The Contractor shall be responsible to locate all existing underground utilities in areas of the work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide protection during excavation and backfill-ing operations. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be en-countered during excavations, consult the Owner’s Representative immediately for direc-tion. Cooperate with the Utility Agency in keeping respective services and facilities in op-eration. Repair damaged utilities to the satisfaction of the Utility Agency.




2. Active Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the Owner or by adjacent properties, except when permitted in writing by the Owner’s Representative, and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been pro-vided. Remove or relocate utilities only as indicated or specified.

3. Inactive Utilities: Report inactive or abandoned utilities encountered in excavating or grading operations, and remove, plug, or cap as required. In the absence of specific re-quirements, plug or cap such utility lines at least 5-feet -0-inches outside new building walls, or as required by local requirements.

4. Removal: Demolish and completely remove from the project site all existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with Utility Agencies for discontinuance of services if lines are active.

E. Protection of Persons and Property:

1. Provide all necessary measures to protect workmen and passersby. Barricade open ex-cavations occurring as part of the work, as required by municipal or other authorities hav-ing jurisdiction.

2. Protect adjacent streets, structures, and other improvements from damage caused by settlement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by trench excavations.

F. Protect subgrades and trench bottoms soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary.

G. Cold Weather Work: Prevent frost from entering bearing strata upon which construction will taken place or in areas where fill will be placed in that season.

3.3 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations and to collection or runoff areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and diversions away from trench excavations. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches.

C. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.

3. Obtain and comply with all provisions of the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment, Water Quality Control Division, Construction Dewatering Permit.

3.4 SHORING AND BRACING

A. Provide shoring and bracing of excavations as required for safety and by governing authorities. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation progresses. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open.




3.5 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

A. Where trenches or other utility excavations are made in existing paved areas, saw-cut pavement surface to create a clean break line. Cut pavement a minimum of 12-inches beyond trench width on each side of trench; remove and dispose of existing surface course and aggregate base course, leaving a 12-inches wide undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench.

B. After trench has been backfilled and compacted, place new pavement in accordance with applicable requirements of Division 32 Sections as applicable, for Asphaltic or Portland cement concrete pavement and in accordance with Authorities having jurisdiction.

3.6 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.

3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

C. Clearance: [12 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit] [As indicated] ].

1. Slope sides of trenches or provide shoulders in accordance with OSHA requirements and as required by Utility Agency standards.

2. Continuously monitor cut slopes and trenches for distress or movement. Provide all necessary shoring and bracing required to protect the life and safety of workmen performing excavation or installing piping or conduit.

D. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe.

1. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course and backfill with a 6-inches layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installing pipe.

3.8 BEDDING OF PIPES:

A. After completion of trench excavation and before installation of piping, install not less than 3-inches of approved bedding material in trench bottom for support of pipe. Dig bell holes in bedding deep enough to provide a minimum of 2-inches clearance between the bell and bedding material. Fully support pipe on bedding material for the full length of the pipe barrel.

B. After pipe is adjusted for line and grade, and all jointing is complete, carefully place and tamp bedding material under the haunches of the pipe and in the previously dug bell holes.




C. Install bedding to a minimum depth of 12-inches above top of pipe prior to starting placement of compacted backfill. Lightly compact or tamp bedding material in a manner to avoid displacement of or damage to the pipe.

3.9 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials in approved locations without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.10 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. After installation of utility piping or lines have been completed, locations recorded, trash or other debris removed from excavations, and bedding placed and approved, backfill promptly as work and weather conditions permit. Do not backfill trenches until all required pipe system tests and inspections have been made, unless partial backfilling is required to restrain pipe under test pressures. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

C. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

D. Place backfill materials in layers not more than 8-inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4-inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand operated tampers. Use hand held tools or compacting devices for trench backfill, until a minimum compacted thickness of 3-feet -0-inches above top of pipe is achieved. Mechanical or power compactors may be used thereafter.

E. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer of backfill to specifications.

F. Compact each layer to not less than 95% of maximum standard Proctor density (ASTM D698). Thoroughly compact by means of mechanical tampers areas which cannot be properly compacted by means of rolling equipment.

G. Backfill to subgrade elevation shown for finish grading, topsoil placement, or paving.

H. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit.

1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

I. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing.

J. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.




K. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, and 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

L. Controlled Low Strength Material: Place initial backfill of controlled low strength material to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the pipe or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

3.11 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE

A. Subdrainage Pipe: Specified in Division 33 Section "Subdrainage Systems."

B. Subsurface Drain: Place subsurface drainage geotextile around perimeter of subdrainage trench. Place a 6-inch course of filter material on subsurface drainage geotextile to support subdrainage pipe. Encase subdrainage pipe in a minimum of 12 inches of filter material, placed in compacted layers 6 inches thick, and wrap in subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches.

1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

C. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated, to within 12 inches (300 mm) of final subgrade, in compacted layers 6 inches (150 mm) thick. Overlay drainage backfill with 1 layer of subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches (150 mm).

1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

2. Place and compact impervious fill over drainage backfill in 6-inches thick compacted layers to final subgrade.


A. Testing Agency: [Owner] will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

C. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Perform field moisture tests in accordance with ASTM D3017. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies at a minimum:

1. Trench Backfill: The density tests shall be performed during backfilling at specified depths in the trench to ensure that the required density and moisture is obtained throughout. For trenches less than 30-inches in depth, density tests shall be taken within 18-inches above the top of pipe or conduit and at the surface/toplift as a minimum. For trenches greater than 30-inches in depth, density tests shall be taken within 18-inches of the top of the pipe or conduit, and at 2-foot vertical intervals to the top of the trench with the final test at the surface/toplift. For utility mains conduct one (1) set of tests per 150] feet of linear trench at specified depths and for service lines conduct one (1) test per




every service line per utility type at specified depths. At a minimum, test intervals and quantities shall meet or exceed the requirements of the local utility agency.

D. When testing agency reports that backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.13 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Owner’s Representative; reshape and recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.14 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT

A. Cleanup: Remove excess materials not required for backfilling purposes, including excess spoil material, accumulated debris, and rubbish from site. Burning of waste material is prohibit-ed.

3.15 RESTORATION

A. Adjacent Improvements: Restore all fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other struc-tures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began.


A. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Owner’s Representative.

1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dis-pose of it off Owner's property.




TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 31 2500-1

SECTION 31 2500 - TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply if provided, to this Section.

B. Additional information concerning temporary erosion and sedimentation control may be found on the civil drawings and City of Longmont construction standards. In case of conflict between the drawings, jurisdictional criteria and the information specified herein, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

C. Additional information concerning erosion may be found in the geotechnical investigation report by Terracon, Inc. dated October 16, 2013. All requirements of this report shall be followed unless stated otherwise.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work Included. Furnish, install, maintain, and remove temporary erosion and sedimentation controls as shown on the drawings or specified herein, or as required to complete the work.


1. Division 31 Section “Site Clearing”. 2. Division 31 Section “Earth Moving” for soil materials, site excavating, filling and grading. 3. Division 31 Section “Trenching and Backfilling” for excavating and backfilling of utilities.

C. Permits and Fees: Obtain and pay for all permits and fees required for the work of this section, including erosion and sediment control and water quality permits required by the authority having jurisdiction and the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment, Water Quality Control Division.

D. Erosion Control: The Erosion and Sedimentation Control Drawings included in the Contract Documents is the minimum requirement to be implemented. Provide additional control as necessary to meet applicable local and State criteria.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.





31 2500-2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

B. Unclassified Excavation: Removal of all material of whatever character required for the work encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated, including boulders.

C. Fill: Fill is all material placed to raise the grade of the site or to backfill excavation, upon which the Soils Engineer has made sufficient tests and observations to enable him to issue a written statement that, in his opinion, the fill has been placed and compacted in accordance with the requirements of these specifications.

D. BMP: Best Management Practice. Erosion and sediment control devices, which may consist of silt fence, crates, filter fabric, riprap, rock socks, etc.

E. SWMP: Storm Water Management Plan. Identifies BMPs, which are erosion and sediment control measures for the project.

F. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

H. Utilities: Include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services to buildings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Procedures: All submittals are to be made to the Owner’s Representative. If provided refer to Division 1 section “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s published descriptive literature and complete specifications for manufactured products specified herein and utilized on the project.

1. Geotextiles. 2. Erosion Control Fabric.

C. Storm Water Management Plan:

1. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining all required permits including a General Permit application for Storm Water Discharges associated with construction activities at least ten (10) days prior to start of construction. Permits are to be filed with the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment, Water Quality Control Division. For areas of disturbance less than 1 acre, a SMMP is not required.

2. Contractor shall have the Storm Water Management Plan (SWMP) and report available on-site at all times.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable local, State and Federal ordinances, rules and regulations concerning sedimentation control and storm water runoff.




B. In case of conflict between the above codes, regulations, references and standards and these specifications, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

C. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as directed by Owner’s Representative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with requirements, which may also be included in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Existing Conditions: Verify all existing conditions affecting the work of this section prior to submitting bids or proposals. Additional compensation will not be allowed for revisions or modification of work resulting from failure to verify existing conditions.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control measures shall be maintained until permanent measures are in place. All damaged, disturbed or devices filled with sediment, which may occur within the specified project warranty period, shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner. Any devices damaged by erosion or sediment shall be restored to their original condition by the Contractor, at no cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Materials: Provide one or more of the following materials, as shown on the plans or as applicable for site conditions:

1. Rock socks. 2. Silt fences. 3. Rock riprap. 4. Temporary seeding. 5. Biodegradable wood excelsior, straw, or coconut-fiber mat enclosed in a

photodegradable plastic mesh. 6. Biodegradable twisted jute or spun-coir mesh, 0.92 lb/sy minimum, with 50 to 65 percent

open area. 7. Drainage geotextile. 8. Impervious fill. 9. Other materials proposed for use on-site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. General:

1. Determine the existing ground elevations, drainage patterns, and changes to such patterns during excavation in order to satisfactorily plan and provide materials for adequate erosion and sediment control devices.



31 2500-4 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and rights-of-way according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls, and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

D. Secure grading permit from agency having jurisdiction prior to commencing grading operations.

3.3 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work of this section will be performed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of work implies acceptance of all areas and conditions.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Devices. Erosion and sedimentation control measures to be taken during construction include, but are not necessarily limited to the following:

1. Apply soil stabilization within 14 days to all disturbed areas that are to be dormant for a period longer than 30 calendar days after reaching grade. Stabilize soil with mulch anchored per criteria of authorities having jurisdiction. Temporarily revegetate areas that will remain in an interim condition for more than sixty (60) days.

2. Roads and parking areas indicated to be paved may be covered with an appropriate aggregate base course in lieu of mulch. Temporary mulching or aggregate base course is not required if final pavement construction will take place within 30 days after grading to final contours.

3. Soils that will be stockpiled for more than 30 days must be mulched and seeded within 14 days after stockpile construction.

4. Prevent sediment from leaving the project site by installing a silt fence or other BMPs as indicated on the plans. Protect existing storm inlets adjacent to the site by an approved gravel filter.

5. Locate stone stabilization pads at all points of vehicular ingress and egress to the construction site.

6. Provide temporary erosion controls consisting of berms at the top of slopes and interceptor ditches at ends of berms and at those locations which will eliminate or minimize erosion during construction, along with temporary seeding, temporary diversion, chutes, and down pipes and lining of water courses.

7. Temporary sedimentation controls shall consist of silt dams, traps, silt fence, barriers, and appurtenances at the top of spoil and borrow area slopes and where runoff water exits the site.

8. Maintain the available silt holding capacity of silt dams, fence traps and barriers until no longer needed. The sediment capacity of sediment retainage areas shall be at a minimum, the capacity shown on the plans in conformance with Urban Drainage Criteria Manual, Volume 3. Prior to removal, obtain concurrence of the Owner and Engineer.




9. Remove accumulated sediment and debris from a BMP when the sediment level reaches one-half the height of the BMP, or at any time the sediment or debris adversely impacts the functioning of the BMP.

10. The erosion/sediment control plan shows the minimum required for the project. If it becomes apparent that additional controls are necessary, the Engineer shall be notified and with approval of the Owner’s Representative additional controls shall be installed.

B. Chemicals and Pollutants:

1. Store construction materials and chemicals that could contribute pollutants to the runoff within an enclosure, container, or dike located around the perimeter of the storage area, to prevent discharge of these materials into runoff from the construction site.

2. Locate areas used for collection and temporary storage of solid and liquid waste away from the storm drainage system. Provide covering or fencing as required to prevent windblown materials; construct perimeter dike to contain liquid runoff. These measures may not be necessary if materials are immediately placed in covered waste containers.

3. Perform equipment maintenance in designated areas using measures such as drip pans to control petroleum products spillage.

4. Immediately clean up and properly dispose of spills of construction related materials such as paints, solvents, or other chemicals.

C. Final Stabilization and Long-Term Management: City of Longmont

1. Final stabilization shall be achieved through permanent vegetation and landscaping after construction of all buildings and paved surfaces.

2. With approval of City of Longmont temporary erosion and sediment control measures may be removed within 30 days after final site stabilization is achieved or after temporary measures are no longer needed.

D. Inspection and Maintenance: Inspect erosion and sediment control measures weekly during construction. In addition, inspect all facilities immediately after any significant runoff or snowmelt which results in runoff. Repair or otherwise mitigate any damage to the erosion and sediment control facilities at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Removal of Controls: Remove controls upon completion of that portion of the work for which controls were furnished. Leave the site and work area in a clean condition.




DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS 31 6329 - 1

SECTION 31 6329 - DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Dry-installed drilled piers.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for recording preexisting conditions

and drilled-pier progress. 2. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." 3. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for preparation of subgrade for drilled-pier operations

including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface.

1.3 UNIT PRICES

A. Unit prices are included in Division 01 Section "Unit Prices."

B. Drilled Piers: Actual net volume of drilled piers in place and approved. Actual length, shaft diameter, and bell diameter if applicable, may vary, to coincide with elevations where satisfactory bearing strata are encountered. These dimensions may also vary with actual bearing value of bearing strata determined by an independent testing and inspecting agency. Adjustments will be made on net variation of total quantities, based on design dimensions for shafts and bells. 1. Base bids on indicated number of drilled piers and, for each pier, the design length from

top elevation to bottom of shaft, , and the diameter of shaft. 2. Unit prices include labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals required for

excavation, trimming, shoring, casings, dewatering, reinforcement, concrete fill, testing and inspecting, and other items for complete drilled-pier installation.

C. Rock Measurement: Volume of rock actually removed, measured in original position, but not to exceed outside dimensions of drilled piers cast against rock. Unit prices for rock excavation include replacement with approved materials.



B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

C. Shop Drawings: For concrete reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending, supporting, and placing.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer:



31 6329 - 2 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Steel reinforcement and accessories.

C. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements: 1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of

concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer that has specialized in drilled-pier work.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify field-welding procedures and personnel according to (American Welding Society) AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.4.

C. Drilled-Pier Standard: Comply with ACI 336.1 unless modified in this Section.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to drilled piers including, but not limited to, the

following: a. Review geotechnical report. b. Discuss existing utilities and subsurface conditions. c. Review coordination with temporary controls and protections.


A. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities before excavating drilled piers. If utilities are to remain in place, provide protection from damage during drilled-pier operations. 1. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during

excavation, adapt drilling procedure if necessary to prevent damage to utilities. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping services and facilities in operation without interruption. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner.

B. Interruption of Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt any utility to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of utility. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of utility without Architect's written permission.

C. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data. 1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for

drilled piers. 2. The geotechnical report is referenced elsewhere in the Project Manual.

D. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to perform surveys, layouts, and measurements for drilled piers. Before excavating, lay out each drilled pier to lines and levels required. Record actual measurements of each drilled pier's location, shaft diameter, bottom and top elevations, deviations from specified tolerances, and other specified data. 1. Record and maintain information pertinent to each drilled pier and cooperate with

Owner's testing and inspecting agency to provide data for required reports.



http://www.aws.org/technical/d1/d1.html

http://www.aws.org/w/a/technical/d1/d1-4.html


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn, galvanized.

C. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, plain. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II Supplement with the following:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, graded, 3/4-inch nominal maximum coarse-aggregate size. Provide aggregate from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. 1. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: ASTM C 94 and potable.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 2. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 3. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G. 4. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017, Type II.

2.3 STEEL CASINGS

A. Steel Pipe Casings: ASTM A 283, Grade C, or ASTM A 36, carbon-steel plate, with joints full-penetration welded according to AWS D1.1.

2.4 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 limits as if concrete were exposed to deicing chemicals.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 for reinforced concrete exposed to chlorides in service, 0.30 for other reinforced concrete, and 1.00 for reinforced concrete that will be dry and protected from moisture in service percent by weight of cement.

D. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): as indicated. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: as indicated. 3. Minimum Slump: Capable of maintaining the following slump until completion of

placement: a. As indicated.

4. Air Content: As indicated.




2.5 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.6 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from

1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, vibration, and other hazards created by drilled-pier operations.

3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to bearing elevations regardless of character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. 1. Obstructions: Unclassified excavation may include removal of unanticipated boulders,

concrete, masonry, or other subsurface obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for removal of obstructions.

2. Obstructions: Unclassified excavated materials may include removal of unanticipated boulders, concrete, masonry, or other subsurface obstructions. Payment for removing obstructions that cannot be removed by conventional augers fitted with soil or rock teeth, drilling buckets, or underreaming tools attached to drilling equipment of size, power, torque, and downthrust necessary for the Work will be according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

B. Classified Excavation: Excavation is classified as standard excavation, special excavation, and obstruction removal and includes excavation to bearing elevations as follows: 1. Standard excavation includes excavation accomplished with conventional augers fitted

with soil or rock teeth, drilling buckets, or underreaming tools attached to drilling equipment of size, power, torque, and downthrust necessary for the Work.

2. Special excavation includes excavation that requires special equipment or procedures above or below indicated depth of drilled piers where drilled-pier excavation equipment used in standard excavation, operating at maximum power, torque, and downthrust, cannot advance the shaft. a. Special excavation requires use of special rock augers, core barrels, air tools,

blasting, or other methods of hand excavation. b. Earth seams, rock fragments, and voids included in rock excavation area will be

considered rock for full volume of shaft from initial contact with rock.

3. Obstructions: Payment for removing unanticipated boulders, concrete, masonry, or other subsurface obstructions that cannot be removed by conventional augers fitted with soil or rock teeth, drilling buckets, or underreaming tools attached to drilling equipment of size, power, torque, and downthrust necessary for the Work will be according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

C. Prevent surface water from entering excavated shafts. Conduct water to site drainage facilities.




D. Excavate shafts for drilled piers to indicated elevations. Remove loose material from bottom of excavation. 1. Excavate bottom of drilled piers to level plane within 1:12 tolerance. 2. Remove water from excavated shafts before concreting. 3. Excavate rock sockets of dimensions indicated. 4. Cut series of grooves about perimeter of shaft to height from bottom of shaft, vertical

spacing, and dimensions indicated.

E. Notify and allow testing and inspecting agency to test and inspect bottom of excavation. If unsuitable bearing stratum is encountered, make adjustments to drilled piers as determined by Architect. 1. Do not excavate shafts deeper than elevations indicated unless approved by Architect. 2. Payment for additional authorized excavation will be according to Contract provisions for

changes in the Work.

F. Excavate shafts for closely spaced drilled piers and for drilled piers occurring in fragile or sand strata only after adjacent drilled piers are filled with concrete and allowed to set.

G. Temporary Casings: Install watertight steel casings of sufficient length and thickness to prevent water seepage into shaft; to withstand compressive, displacement, and withdrawal stresses; and to maintain stability of shaft walls. 1. Remove temporary casings, maintained in plumb position, during concrete placement

and before initial set of concrete

H. Tolerances: Construct drilled piers to remain within ACI 336.1 tolerances. 1. If location or out-of-plumb tolerances are exceeded, provide corrective construction.

Submit design and construction proposals to Architect for review before proceeding.


A. Comply with recommendations in CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete.

C. Fabricate and install reinforcing cages symmetrically about axis of shafts in a single unit.

D. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during concreting. Maintain minimum cover over reinforcement.

E. Use templates to set anchor bolts, leveling plates, and other accessories furnished in work of other Sections. Provide blocking and holding devices to maintain required position during final concrete placement.

F. Protect exposed ends of extended reinforcement, dowels, or anchor bolts from mechanical damage and exposure to weather.

3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Place concrete in continuous operation and without segregation immediately after inspection and approval of shaft by Owner's independent testing and inspecting agency.

B. Dry Method: Place concrete to fall vertically down the center of drilled pier without striking sides of shaft or steel reinforcement. 1. Where concrete cannot be directed down shaft without striking reinforcement, place

concrete with chutes, tremies, or pumps. 2. Vibrate top 60 inches of concrete.




C. Coordinate withdrawal of temporary casings with concrete placement to maintain at least a 60-inch head of concrete above bottom of casing. 1. Vibrate top 60 inches of concrete after withdrawal of temporary casing.

D. Screed concrete at cutoff elevation level and apply scoured, rough finish. Where cutoff elevation is above the ground elevation, form top section above grade and extend shaft to required elevation.

E. Protect concrete work, according to ACI 301, from frost, freezing, or low temperatures that could cause physical damage or reduced strength. 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete

on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other mineral-containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators.

F. If hot-weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete according to ACI 301 to maintain delivered temperature of concrete at no more than 90 deg F. 1. Place concrete immediately on delivery. Keep exposed concrete surfaces and formed

shaft extensions moist by fog sprays, wet burlap, or other effective means for a minimum of seven days.


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Drilled piers. 2. Excavation. 3. Concrete. 4. Steel reinforcement welding.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Drilled-Pier Tests and Inspections: For each drilled pier, before concrete placement. 1. Soil Testing: Bottom elevations, bearing capacities, and lengths of drilled piers indicated

have been estimated from available soil data. Actual elevations and drilled-pier lengths and bearing capacities will be determined by testing and inspecting agency. Final evaluations and approval of data will be determined by Architect. a. Bearing Stratum Tests: Testing agency will take undisturbed [hardpan] [rock] core

samples from drilled-pier bottoms and test each sample for compression, moisture content, and density, and will report results and evaluations.

D. Concrete Tests and Inspections: ASTM C 172 except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. 1. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each compressive-strength test

but no fewer than one test for each concrete load. 2. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; 1 test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F

and below and 80 deg F and above, and 1 test for each set of compressive-strength specimens.

3. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test unless otherwise indicated. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens unless field-cured test specimens are required.

4. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each drilled pier but not more than one set for each truck load. One specimen will be tested at 7 days, 2 specimens will be tested at 28 days, and 1 specimen will be retained in reserve for later testing if required.

5. If frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, testing will be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.




6. If strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

7. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

8. Report test results in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. List Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests in reports of compressive-strength tests.

9. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency will make additional tests of concrete if test results indicate that slump, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. a. Continuous coring of drilled piers may be required, at Contractor's expense, if

temporary casings have not been withdrawn within specified time limits or if observations of placement operations indicate deficient concrete quality, presence of voids, segregation, or other possible defects.

11. Perform additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.

E. An excavation, concrete, or a drilled pier will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports for each drilled pier as follows: 1. Actual top and bottom elevations. 2. Actual drilled-pier diameter at top, bottom, and bell. 3. Top of rock elevation. 4. Description of soil materials. 5. Description, location, and dimensions of obstructions. 6. Final top centerline location and deviations from requirements. 7. Variation of shaft from plumb. 8. Shaft excavating method. 9. Design and tested bearing capacity of bottom. 10. Depth of rock socket. 11. Levelness of bottom and adequacy of cleanout. 12. Properties of slurry and slurry test results at time of slurry placement and at time of

concrete placement. 13. Ground-water conditions and water-infiltration rate, depth, and pumping. 14. Description, purpose, length, wall thickness, diameter, tip, and top and bottom elevations

of temporary or permanent casings. Include anchorage and sealing methods used and condition and weather tightness of splices if any.

15. Description of soil or water movement, sidewall stability, loss of ground, and means of control.

16. Date and time of starting and completing excavation. 17. Inspection report. 18. Condition of reinforcing steel and splices. 19. Position of reinforcing steel.




20. Concrete placing method, including elevation of consolidation and delays. 21. Elevation of concrete during removal of casings. 22. Locations of construction joints. 23. Concrete volume. 24. Concrete testing results. 25. Remarks, unusual conditions encountered, and deviations from requirements.


A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.

3.7 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

A. Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."




ASPHALT PAVING 32 1216-1

SECTION 32 1216 - ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply if provided to this Section.

B. Additional information concerning asphalt paving may be found on the civil drawings, in the project geotechnical report and City of Longmont construction standards. In case of conflict between the drawings, jurisdictional criteria and the information specified herein, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

C. Additional information concerning asphalt paving may be found in the geotechnical investigation report by Terracon, Inc. dated October 16, 2013. All requirements of this report shall be followed unless noted otherwise. The information shown in this report is for information and it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to field verify conditions indicated.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hot-mix asphalt patching.


1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling and site grading.

2. Division 32 Section “Pavement Markings” for pavement striping and symbols.

C. References:

1. City of Longmont Standard Specifications for Design and Construction, latest edition. 2. Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge

Construction, current edition and all appropriate standard special provisions.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms.

B. CDOT: State of Colorado Department of Transportation.

C. CDOT Specifications: Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, current edition and all appropriate standard special provisions.


A. Provide hot-mix asphalt paving in accordance with Section 401 of the CDOT Specifications.

1. Standard Specification: CDOT Specifications.



32 1216-2 ASPHALT PAVING

2. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in CDOT Specifications do not apply to this Project.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.

B. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work.

C. Material Test Reports: For each paving material.

D. Material Certificates: For each paving material, signed by providers.


A. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing hot-mix asphalt similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

2. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed hot-mix asphalt paving similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Testing Agency:

1. All testing and inspections required herein will be performed by an independent testing and inspection agency employed by the Owner.

2. Notify the testing and inspection agency not less than 48 hours in advance of all work requiring testing or inspection services.

C. Testing Requirements: Asphalt Paving shall be tested for gradation, asphalt content and in-place density in accordance with CDOT Specifications, the current edition of CDOT Field Materials Manual, and local Regulatory Agency requirements, whichever are the most stringent.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp or if the following conditions are not met:

1. Tack Coats: Minimum surface or air temperature in the shade of 60 deg F (15 deg C). 2. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations of ASTM D 3910. 3. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface or air temperature in the shade of 40 deg F and

rising at time of placement. 4. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface or air temperature in the shade of 50 deg F

and rising at time of placement.

B. Coordination and Scheduling:




1. Cooperate with other trades and arrange scheduling to avoid damage to other work, including grading, site utilities and piping, exterior concrete, landscaping and irrigation systems.

2. Before commencing pavement operations, ascertain that utility lines, site lighting and wiring, piping, curb and gutter work, general grading and heavy trucking is complete so that such operations will not damage paving work.

3. Mask off and protect exposed building surfaces and abutting concrete from damage or staining by tack coat and paving operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATES

A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations meeting the requirements of the CDOT Specifications.

B. Asphalt Concrete Aggregate: Clean, hard, durable particles of crushed stone, crushed slag, crushed gravel, or natural gravel conforming to the requirements of Subsection 703.04 of the CDOT Specifications and Grading SX and S (Table 703-4).

C. Mineral Filler: Rock dust, slag dust, hydrated lime, hydraulic cement, or other suitable mineral material conforming to the requirements of Subsection 703.06 of the CDOT Specifications.

2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Cement: The asphalt cement to be used on this project shall be PG 64-22 conforming to the requirements of Subsection 702.01 of the CDOT Specifications.

B. Tack Coat: AASHTO M 140, emulsified asphalt or AASHTO M 208, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.

C. Fog Seal: AASHTO M 140, emulsified asphalt or AASHTO M 208, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted at the factory in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.

D. Water: Potable.

2.3 MIXES

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes. Furnish job-mix formulas for each pavement type, conforming to the requirements of Subsection 401.02 of the CDOT Specifications. Mix aggregates and bituminous materials in accordance with the requirements of Subsection 401.15 of the CDOT Specifications. Use approved job mix formulas. Mix to comply with the following requirements:

1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is located.

2. Base Course: Grading S. 3. Surface Course: Grading SX.

B. Emulsified-Asphalt: Shall conform to AASHTO M140 or M208 in accordance with Subsection 702.03 of the CDOT Specifications.



32 1216-4 ASPHALT PAVING

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that subgrade is unfrozen, free of water, snow, and ice otherwise in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads.

B. Proof-roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic-tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that require further compaction. Scarify, regrade and recompact surface of subgrade that is pumping or deforming as required to provide true levels, uniform slopes and proper total thickness of paving as required in Division 31 Section “Earth Moving.”

C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PATCHING

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches (300 mm) into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.

B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.2 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.8 L/sq. m).

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.

C. Patching: Partially fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished flush with adjacent surfaces.

3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.

1. Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course. Do not dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course.

B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted-aggregate base before applying paving materials.

C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.20 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.8 L/sq. m).

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.





A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.

1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from specified requirements.

B. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

C. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTM D 3549.

D. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances.

E. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement according to ASTM D 979.

1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from four samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.

2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

a. One core sample will be taken for every 350 sq. yd. or less of installed pavement. b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear

method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

F. Asphalt Content and Gradation. Testing agency will take sample of uncompacted paving mixtures at a minimum frequency of every 1,000 tons according to Colorado Procedure – Laboratory CPL-5120 and Colorado Procedure CP-31.

G. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. Conforming to the specified requirements will be in according with Subsection 105.03 of the CDOT Specifications.

3.5 DISPOSAL

A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow excavated materials to accumulate on-site.




CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313-1

SECTION 32 1313 - CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes constructing exterior concrete paving on prepared subgrade or base course in accordance with these specifications. This work shall be in conformity with the lines, grades, thicknesses and typical cross-sections shown on the plans for the following:

1. Sidewalks, steps, ramps. 2. As detailed on the plans.


1. Division Section "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, grading, and subbase course. 2. Division 32 Section “Concrete Pavement Joint Sealants” for expansion and contraction

joints.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. City of Longmont Standard Specifications for Design and Construction, latest edition.

B. Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, current edition.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, expansive hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume.

B. CDOT: State of Colorado Department of Transportation.

C. CDOT Specifications: Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, current edition.

D. ADA Handbook: Americans with Disabilities Act Standards for Accessible Design, U.S. Department of Justice.

E. ANSI A117.1: Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, American National Standard Institute.

F. Refer to ACI 301: (American Concrete Institute – Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete), for additional definitions.



32 1313-2 CONCRETE PAVING

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.

B. Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mix, and includes alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials:

1. Aggregates. 2. Cement. 3. Admixtures.

D. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials used in the project complies with requirements:

1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Applied finish materials. 7. Bonding agent or adhesive. 8. Joint fillers.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Pavement Joint Layout Plan: Plan to show joint locations and typical dimensions for review and approval by engineer.

G. Traffic Control Plan: For work in the public right-of-way.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed pavement work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94/C 94 M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mix Concrete Association's (NRMCA) Plant Certification Program.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program.




D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant and each aggregate from one source.

E. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents.

F. Concrete Testing Service: The Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

G. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at project site as directed by Owner’s Representative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with requirements, which may also be included in Division 1 Section “Project Management and Coordination.”

H. Regulatory Requirements:

I. Comply with City of Longmont standards for sidewalks, curbs, ramps, gutters, and driveway approaches or aprons, including standard dimensions, profiles, thicknesses, reinforcing, and compressive strength. In the event of conflict between the Contract Documents and the standards, the more stringent requirements will apply.

1. Comply with applicable requirements of ADA Handbook, ANSI A117.1, and local and State codes and ordinances regarding walks, steps, ramps and curb ramps.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.

B. Coordination and Scheduling: Coordinate with other trades and arrange scheduling to avoid damage to other work including grading, site utilities and piping, asphalt paving, landscaping and irrigation systems.

C. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions and existing conditions shown on the drawings by taking field measurements prior to start of work. Report discrepancies to the Owner’s Representative for clarification and make minor adjustments in layout as required by field conditions and as approved by the Owner’s Representative, at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Environmental Requirements: Perform work only under suitable weather conditions. Comply with the environmental requirements of Section 3.6 for concrete placement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.






2.2 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.

1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a radius 100 feet or less.

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.


A. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: CDOT Section 709 and ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

B. Reinforcement Bars: CDOT Section 709 and ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

C. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, CDOT Section 709 and ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

D. Tie Bars: CDOT Section 709 and ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

E. Supports for Reinforcement: Chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcement bars, welded wire fabric, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:

1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs.

2.4 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER

A. Sealed Joints: Preformed, compressible fiber or cork filler material complying with ASTM D1751 or D1752, Type II, guaranteed compatible with expansion joint sealant materials, ½-inches thick unless otherwise indicated. Provide high-impact polystyrene removable “void cap” to create ½-inches deep reveal for installation of sealant.

B. Self-Sealing Joints: Preformed, compressible asphalt fiber joint filler complying with ASTM D994, ½-inches thick unless otherwise indicated. Do not use asphalt fiber filler in joints to receive elastomeric joint sealants.




2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout the Project:

1. Portland Cement: CDOT Section 701 and ASTM C 150, Type I/II.

a. Fly Ash: FLY ASH SHALL NOT BE USED IN CONCRETE FOR SIDEWALKS.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: CDOT Section 703 and ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) <size> nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. 3. Do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing substances that cause spalling.

C. Water: CDOT Section 712 and ASTM C 94/C 94M potable.

2.6 ADMIXTURES

A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures.

B. Air-Entraining Admixture: CDOT Section 711 and ASTM C 260.

C. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.

2.7 FIBER REINFORCEMENT

A. Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches long.

2.8 CURING MATERIALS: CDOT SECTION 711

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq.yd. (305 g/sq.m) dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, waterproof paper, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete.




2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the trial batch method.

B. Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4,500 psi ( 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm). 4. Minimum 564 lb. Cement per cubic yard. (CDOT Class B)

C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content of 5.0 to 8.0 percent.

D. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing admixture high-range, water-reducing and retarding admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

F. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd.

2.10 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.

B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.

1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h). 2. Subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch

require correction according to requirements in Division 2 Section "Earth Moving."




C. Subgrade shall be tested by Geotechnical Engineer and pass required tests prior to concrete pavement placement.

D. Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after non-conforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.


A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating reinforcement and with recommendations in CRSI's "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

D. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

E. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 12-inch (300-mm) overlap of adjacent mats.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Construct/install construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated.

1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Contractor to provide plan of joint placement for the Engineers approval. 3. The distance between joints shall not exceed in feet, twice the pavement thickness in

inches. (i.e.: 6-inches PCC pavement to utilize maximum 12-foot joint spacing.)




B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour, unless pavement terminates at expansion joints.

1. Contractor may utilize preformed galvanized steel or plastic keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.

2. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated. 4. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys,

unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.

C. Expansion Joints: Form expansion joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 2. Terminate joint filler no less than 1/2 inch or no more than 1 inch below finished surface

for joint sealant. 3. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or

clip joint-filler sections together. 4. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other

temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with groover tool to the indicated radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks.

3. Tied Contraction Joints: Install deformed bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated.


A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcement steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and alignment.

D. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 304R requirements and recommendations for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.




E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery to the project site.

F. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.

G. Do not add water to concrete surface during finishing operations.

H. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

I. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete according to recommendations in ACI 309R.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.

J. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off.

K. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading dry-shake surface treatments.

L. Walks: Minimum 4-inches thick, with expansion joints at intervals of approximately 100 feet and tooled contraction joints at intervals equal to width of walks or maximum 5-foot intervals. Tool edges to rounded profile and finish as noted herein or shown on the drawings. Contractor may utilize sawed contraction joints. Pitch walks ¼-inches per foot for drainage unless otherwise indicated.

M. Ramps: Construct ramps similar to walks. Comply with applicable ADA Handbook, ANSI A117.1, and City of Longmont and State codes, ordinances, and details including maximum allowable slope not to exceed 1 foot vertical in 12 foot horizontal, with maximum rise not to exceed 30-inches between level landings.

N. Steps: Minimum 6-inches thick at intersection of treads and risers, reinforced as indicated. Slope treads ¼-inches to nosing, and tool nosings to uniform ½-inches radius. Finish as specified below.

O. Slip-Form Pavers: When automatic machine placement is used for pavement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce pavement to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as required for formed pavement.

Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of paver machine during operations.

P. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength.

Q. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.




1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.

R. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 deg F. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover reinforcement steel with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms, reinforcement steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

S. Wet-Weather Placement: Do not begin to place concrete while rain, sleet, or snow is falling unless adequate protection is provided and, when required, acceptance of protection is obtained.

3.7 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.

C. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.

1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.

3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and follow the recommendations of ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.




D. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows:

1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover

for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.9 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 1/4 inch. 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch. 4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch. 5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch. 6. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch. 7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length of

dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches. 8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. 9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement.

B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least 1 composite sample for each 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.




2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite strength test, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete mix.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each set of composite strength specimens.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise indicated. Cylinders shall be molded and stored for laboratory-cured test specimens unless field-cured test specimens are required.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., provide at least two tests for every 100 cu.yd., (one set for each 50 cu. yd.). One specimen shall be tested at 7 days and two specimens at 28 days; one specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required.

7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, current operations shall be evaluated and corrective procedures shall be provided for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

C. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if average of any 3 consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).

D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Owner’s Representative, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in pavement, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Owner’s Representative, but will not be used as the sole basis for approval or rejection.

F. Additional Tests: Testing agency shall make additional tests of the concrete when test results indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Owner’s Representative. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.

G. Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor’s expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.11 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet requirements in this Section.




B. Drill test cores where directed by Owner’s Representative when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.




CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 32 1373 - 1

SECTION 32 1373 – CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Additional information concerning concrete paving may be found on the civil drawings, in the project geotechnical report and agency having jurisdiction construction standards. In case of conflict between the drawings, jurisdictional criteria and the information specified herein, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Expansion and contraction joints within cement concrete pavement. 2. Joints between cement concrete and buildings and structures. 3. Surface preparation including primers. 4. Joint backup material.


1. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for constructing joints in concrete pavement.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. City of Longmont Standard Specifications for Design and Construction, latest edition.

B. Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, current edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer.

C. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for sealants.



32 1373 - 2 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS

E. Warranty: As required by Division 1 – Warranty Section: Contractor agrees to repair or replace joint sealers (including labor, materials, and any necessary associated costs) which fail to perform as watertight joints; or fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance or general durability; or appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified by submitted manufacturer’s data as an inherent quality of material for exposure indicated. Provide warranty signed by Installer and Contractor.


A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Work under this section shall be subject to all applicable provisions of federal, state and local rules and regulations.

B. Applicator: Company specializing in application of sealants with five (5) years minimum experience and be acceptable to manufacturer. Manufacturer’s field representative shall visit site and make suggestions.

C. Adhesion Tests: Prior to any sealant application, perform adhesion tests as directed by sealant manufacturer’s technical representative.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Install sealant materials in strict accordance with all safety and weather conditions recommended by manufacturer, product literature, or Material Safety Data Sheets. Do not proceed with installation of sealants under adverse weather conditions, or when temperatures are below or above manufacturer’s recommended limitations for installation. Proceed only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable for proper cure and development of high-early bond strength. Wherever joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations, install elastomeric sealants only when temperatures are in lower third of manufacturer’s recommended installation temperature range.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and




application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2.2 JOINT SEALANTS

A. Single-component formulation complying with ASTM D 6690 or D1190.

1. Refer to CDOT Standard Specification, Section 705.01 and 705.09 for joint and crack sealant material requirements.

2. Refer to CDOT Standard Specification, Section 412.18 for joint and crack sealant installation requirements.

2.3 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS

A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.

C. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and width required to control sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant.

D. Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.

2.4 PRIMERS

A. Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from manufacturers recommendations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior




experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

3.3 JOINT DESIGN

A. Sealant depth is measured at the center (thin) section of sealant bead.

B. Install sealants to depths and widths as recommended by sealant manufacturer and as shown on the drawings. Also, conform to the following general limitations if not in conflict with sealant manufacturer’s recommendations.

1. For sidewalks, pavements and similar joints subject to traffic and other abrasion and indentation exposures, fill joints to a depth equal to 75% of joint width, but neither more than 5/8 inch deep nor less than 3/8 inch deep.

2. For normal moving joints not subject to traffic, fill joints to a depth equal to 50% of joint width, but neither more than 5/8 inch deep nor less than ¼ inch deep.

3. Depth of sealant must not exceed width of joint. 4. Sealant joints shall not be less than ¼ inch in width and ¼ inch in depth. 5. Sealant joints shall not exceed 2 inches in width in a single application.

3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Preparation work shall result in clean surfaces in all areas where sealant is to be adhered. Such surfaces shall be free of any old sealant, contaminants and impurities which are deleterious to bonding or adhesion of primers or sealant.

B. Clean ferrous metals of all rust, mill scale and coatings by wire brush or grinding. Any equipment used to remove rust shall be free of oil contaminants.

C. Wire brush masonry joint surfaces, then blow clean with oil free compressed air.

D. Apply primer per manufacturer’s recommendations. Allow primer to dry prior to applying sealant.

E. Do not caulk joints until they are clean, dry, and free of dust, loose mortar, old sealant, foreign matter or other bond inhibiting materials, and in compliance with requirements of manufacturer of materials, details shown on drawings, and specific requirements of other sections of specifications.

3.5 JOINT BACKING

A. Use joint backing to control depth of joint to specified thickness.

B. Select joint backing size to allow for 25% compression of backing when inserted into joint.

C. Where shown on drawings where depth of joint will not permit use of joint backing, or wherever recommended by sealant manufacturer, install bond-breaker tape to prevent three-sided adhesion.

D. Do not leave voids or gaps between ends of joint backing units.




3.6 APPLICATION/INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANT

A. Apply sealants neatly, in a good and workmanlike manner which meets following minimum requirements or standards. Specific instructions of manufacturer must also be followed.

B. Apply sealant using a gun with proper size nozzles. Use sufficient pressure to fill all voids and joints solid to backup material, with complete wetting of all joint bond surfaces.

C. Applied sealant shall form a full, smooth, uniform bead, free of ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets and embedded impurities.

D. After joint has been completely filled with sealant, neatly tool joint sealant to eliminate air pockets or voids, and to provide a smooth, slightly concave, neat appearing finish, with sealant surface slightly below adjoining surfaces. Wetting of finished surface will not be allowed.

E. Where horizontal joints are located between a horizontal surface and vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove, so joint will not trap moisture and dirt.

F. Protect adjacent surfaces and systems from sealant material. Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

G. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

H. Tooling of Non-Sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and that do

not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

I. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations indicated.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately




and replace with joint sealant so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.

3.9 JOB SITE CLEAN-UP

A. Sealant applicator must remove all excess materials from job site.

B. Leave all surrounding areas where joint sealant has been applied free of excess sealant, debris and foreign substances.




FINE GRADING AND SOIL PREPARATION 32 9000 - 1

SECTION 32 9000 - FINE GRADING AND SOIL PREPARATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Examination.

B. Preparation.

C. Subsoil Preparation.

D. Placing Topsoil.

E. Soil Tests.

F. Coordination of Soil Amendments.

G. Fine Grading.

H. Tolerances.

I. Field Quality Control

J. Adjusting.

K. Cleaning

L. Protection.


A. Section 013300: Submittal Procedures

B. Section 014000: Quality Requirements

C. Section 311000: Site Clearing

D. Section 312000: Earthmoving

E. Section 328423: Underground Sprinklers

F. Section 329200: Turf and Grasses.

G. Section 329300: Planting.

H. Section 329400: Planting Accessories

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Colorado Division of Labor Rules and Regulations: Excavation.

B. State Department of Highways, Division of Highways, State of Colorado, Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Section 207 of the latest edition.

C. ANSI/ASTM D698 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5 lb (2.49 Kg) Rammer and 12 inch (304.8 mm) Drop.

D. ANSI/ASTM D1556 - Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method.

E. Association of Official Agricultural Chemists: Topsoil Analysis.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. WEEDS: Includes Goatheads, Bindweed, Twitch, Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass,



32 9000 - 2 FINE GRADING AND SOIL PREPARATION

Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Weed, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Broom Grass.

1.5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Comply with Section 013300. All submittals shall be accepted by the Architect in writing before planting commence

B. TOPSOIL TESTING:

1. After topsoil spreading, submit, for Architect's approval, topsoil samples and test results from:

a. Each off-site topsoil source.

2. Each location submission shall include:

a. 1 qt. representative sample in air tight container.

b. Agricultural analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. Test shall include available nutrients, soil pH, soil texture, salt, and percentage organic matter, and recommended fertilization and amendment rates for plant material types specified.

c. Location of borrow site, if applicable.

3. Deliver copies of all test reports and samples to landscape contractor and Architect.

C. CERTIFICATES: Submit certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities.

D. SAMPLES: Comply with paragraph 1.6.B this Section.

1.6 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with Section 014000.

B. QUALIFICATIONS

1. Installer: Company with minimum five (5) years successful experience in the placing on topsoil similar in scope and size to this project.

2. Testing Agency: Colorado State University Soils Lab or other certified soils laboratory with capability to analyze materials for conformance to specification requirements (where applicable).

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. TOPSOIL: Protect materials from erosion, wind, rodents, deterioration and contamination during delivery, installation and site storage.


A. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

1. Comply with requirements of referenced standards for environmental conditions before, during, and after installation. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards.

2. Moisture Content: Topsoil and other materials shall not be placed, backfilled, or spread while in a wet or saturated condition. Moisture content shall not be so great that excessive compaction will occur, nor so low that dust will form in the air or that clods will not break readily. Apply water if necessary to bring soil to optimum moisture content for tilling.

3. Do not work soil when muddy or frozen.




B. EXISTING CONDITIONS

1. Plants: Protect existing plant material. Do not damage any plantings indicated to remain.

2. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities including irrigation system. Perform work in a manner to avoid possible damage. Hand excavate, as required.

3. Excavation: Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned. When conditions detrimental to Work are encountered, such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, noxious materials or obstructions, notify Architect before proceeding.


A. COORDINATION

1. Coordinate with seeding, sodding and landscape Contractor(s) approved schedule. Refer to Division 1. Do not place topsoil more than 3 days prior to commencement of landscaping in the area. Limit fine grading to areas which can be planted within 24 hours after fine grading.

2. Coordinate with Contractors' work requiring access to site over topsoil areas.

3. Coordinate with installation of underground irrigation system and outlets.

1.10 MAINTENANCE

A. Protect newly topsoiled and fine graded areas from erosion and traffic. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded and disturbed areas to specified tolerances until landscape operations commence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TOPSOIL

A. ON-SITE TOPSOIL: Fertile sandy loam, taken from a well drained site and free from clay subsoil, stones, lumps, stolons, plants, roots, sticks and seeds, high salt content and other materials/attributes harmful to plant life.

1. Sieve/Screen Size % Passing % Retaining

1" screen 100 0

1/2" screen 97-100 0-3

#100 mesh sieve 60-40 40-60

2. pH before amendments between 5.5 and 7.5.

3. Refer to Sections 329200 and 329300 for topsoil amendment requirements.

B. PRE-AMENDED TOPSOIL: At the contractor's option, pre-amended topsoil may be used in lieu of imported topsoil amended on site.

1. Supplier: A1 Organics, 16350 WCR 76, Eaton, CO 80615, 970.454.3492, or approved equal.

2.2 WATER

A. Clean, fresh and free of substances or matter which could inhibit vigorous growth of plants.

2.3 HERBICIDE

A. WEED HERBICIDE: Round-up or approved equal.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS: Examine areas and conditions under which the Work of the Section will be performed. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to the Architect. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of work implies acceptance of all areas and conditions.

1. Verify that during grading, the ground surface was cleaned of materials which might hinder final operations.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. PROTECTION: Protect areas in accordance with paragraph 3.12 this Section.

B. HERBICIDE TREATMENT

1. Confirm Architect’s requirement to proceed with herbicide treatment of on site soil. Herbicide treatment must be completed during the growing season.

2. If plant growth is evident, treat site with Roundup herbicide in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3. Water subsoil 1/2" per week if natural precipitation does not supply this amount.

4. Ten (10) days after Roundup application, review soil surface for evidence of plant growth.

5. Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4, up to three (3) applications, until there is no evidence of plant growth after 10 day period.

6. Obtain Architect’s approval of soil fourteen (14) days after last herbicide application.

7. Remove plant debris from treated area.

3.3 SUBSOIL PREPARATION

A. Verify subsoil base has been contoured and compacted and is free of contaminated material.

B. Prepare subsoil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain lines, levels, profiles, and contours. Make changes in grade gradual. Blend slopes into level areas.

C. Remove foreign materials, stones exceeding 2 inches, weeds and undesirable plants and their roots.

D. Scarify subsoil to a depth of 6 inches where topsoil is to be placed. Repeat cultivation in areas where equipment, used for hauling and spreading topsoil, has compacted subsoil.

E. Remove foreign materials, stones exceeding 2 inches, weeds and undesirable plants and their roots which came to the surface during subsoil scarification.

3.4 PLACING TOPSOIL

A. Place topsoil where seeding, sodding, and planting is scheduled and in accordance with paragraph 1.9 this Section.

B. Place topsoil during dry weather and on dry, unfrozen subsoil.

C. Remove vegetative matter and foreign, non-organic material and debris larger than 1.5 inches in diameter at the time of placement.

D. Place topsoil to the following depths:

1. Sod Areas 4"

2. Seed Areas 4"

3. Shrub Beds 6"




4. Flower Beds 6"

5. Planters Full depth, allowing for the addition of soil amendments.

E. Place topsoil eliminating rough or low areas to ensure positive drainage. Maintain profiles and contour of subgrade.

F. Manually place topsoil close to existing trees, shrubs, plants, curbs, new construction, planters and buildings to prevent damage.

G. Coordinate topsoil placement with sub-soil amending in accordance with Section 02950.

3.5 SOIL TESTS

A. Perform soil testing and submission in accordance with paragraph 1.6 this Section.

3.6 COORDINATION OF SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Fertilizer rates to conform to soil test recommendations for each landscape type.

B. Coordinate soil amendments with landscape contractor in accordance with Sections 329200, and 329300.

3.7 FINE GRADING

A. Fine grade topsoil to finished elevations with smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture.

B. Remove foreign materials, stones exceeding 1.5 inches, weeds and undesirable plants and their roots which came to the surface during soil amending.

C. Roll, rake and drag lawn areas, remove ridges and fill depressions, as required to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas which can be planted immediately after grading. Compact seeded areas to 90% in accordance with Earthwork Section 310000.

D. Remove surplus subsoil and topsoil from site.

E. Leave stockpile area and site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping.

3.8 TOLERANCES

A. TOPSOIL: Topsoil elevations shall be within the following tolerances from elevations indicated on the drawings:

1. Landscape Areas: ± 0.10'.

2. Adjacent to Paving and Curbs: ± 0.04' (1/2").

3. Grass swales shall drain at a minimum slope of 2%

4. Berms and other slopes shall not exceed 4:1 for areas scheduled for irrigated and mowed turf.

5. Berms and other slopes shall not exceed 3:1 for native grass areas (unmowed or mowed only during establishment), and for shrub beds


A. REVIEWS: Comply with Contract General Conditions.

3.10 ADJUSTING

A. RECONDITIONING COMPACTED AREAS: When completed topsoil areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape, and compact to required density prior to further construction.

3.11 CLEANUP




A. DURING LANDSCAPE INSTALLATION

1. All areas shall be reasonably clean at the end of each work day. Sidewalks and other paved areas shall be swept or washed down as needed. Keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition.

2. Contractor shall make a reasonable effort to clean up the project on a daily basis to maintain a neat and orderly site.

B. PROJECT COMPLETION

1. All debris, soil and trash resulting from landscape operations shall be removed from the site. Burning of waste material is prohibited. All paved areas shall be washed down.

2. Restore all areas outside the Contract limits which have been disturbed to their original condition at no cost to the Architect.

3.12 PROTECTION

A. Protect landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades and trespassers.

B. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair or replace damaged landscape work as directed.

C. Protect existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, perennials and turf areas from damage during construction.




TURF AND GRASSES 32 9200 - 1

SECTION 329200 - TURF AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Examination.

B. Site Preparation.

C. Soil Preparation for Laying Sod.

D. Laying Sod.

E. Areas to be top Dressed

F. Field Quality Control.

G. Clean Up.

H. Protection.

I. Maintenance


A. Section 013300: Submittal Procedures.

B. Section 014000: Quality Requirements.

C. City Standards: Underground Sprinklers

D. Section 329000: Fine Grading and Soil Preparation.

E. Section 329300: Planting.

F. Section 329350: Landscape Maintenance.

G. Section 329400: Planting Accessories.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASPA (American Sod Producers Association) - Guideline Specifications to Sodding.

B. USDA Soil Conservation Service, Technical Guide, Section IV, Standards and Specifications, Critical Area Planting (342), July 1981

C. State Department of Highways, Division of Highways, State of Colorado, Standard Specification for Road and Bridge Construction, Section 202 of latest edition.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. WEEDS: Includes Goatheads, Bindweed, Twitch, Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Weed, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Broom Grass.


A. Comply with Section 013300. All submittals shall be accepted by the Architect in writing before planting commences.

B. TOPSOIL TESTING



32 9200 - 2 TURF AND GRASSES

1. Coordinate soil testing with Section 014000.

C. CERTIFICATES

1. Submit two copies of labels or certificates from State Department of Agriculture for grass species and location of sod source.

2. Submit certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities.

3. Submit manufacturer's certified analysis packaged with standard products.

D. ANALYSIS AND STANDARDS: Wherever applicable, for non packaged materials, provide two copies of analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the Association of Official Agriculture Chemists.

E. PLANTING SCHEDULE: Comply with General Contract Conditions.



B. QUALIFICATIONS

1. Sod Producer: Company specializing in sod production and harvesting with minimum five (5) years experience, and certified by the State of Colorado Department of Agriculture.

2. Installer: Company approved by the sod producer or company with minimum five (5) years successful experience in the installation of sodded lawn areas similar in size to this project.

C. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

1. Comply with regulatory agencies concerning classification, transportation, handling and storage of sod, fertilizer, herbicide and pesticide materials.

2. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer, herbicide and pesticide composition and application.

3. Sod: Comply with American Sod Producers Association (ASPA) classes of sod materials.


A. PACKAGED MATERIALS: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site. B. SOD

1. Cutting: Sod shall be harvest in rolls, and shall not be cut more than 24 hours prior to planting.

2. Transportation: Deliver sod on pallets. Open vehicles used to transport sod to the project shall be covered with tarpaulins or other suitable covers securely fastened to the vehicle to prevent damage to the sod. Closed vehicles shall be adequately ventilated to prevent overheating of the sod.

3. Keep sod soil mat moist fresh and protected at all times, including entire period of transit, handling, and temporary storage.

4. Do not tear, stretch, or drop sod during handling and installation.

5. Rejection of Materials: Evidence of inadequate or inappropriate transportation of sod shall be cause for rejection. Remove rejected sod promptly or mark with dye to indicate rejection.






1. Sodding Season: Sodding shall occur only after May 1 and before September 1 without written approval from architect.

2. Sodding shall occur only when weather and soil conditions permit in accordance with locally accepted practice. Do not lay sod during periods of prolonged cold or heat, or during excessively wet or dry periods.


1. Existing Plants: Do not damage any existing plantings indicated to remain. Sod areas after trees are planted and after final grades are established, unless otherwise directed by architect.

2. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities. Perform work in a manner to avoid possible damage. Hand excavate, as required.

3. Excavation: Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned. When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, noxious materials or obstructions, notify architect before planting.


A. WORK SCHEDULING: Proceed with and complete landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the specified planting season and approved schedule.

B. COORDINATION

1. Coordinate with Contractors work requiring access to site over lawn areas.


3. Coordinate laying sod to provide maintenance in accordance with Section 329350.

4. Coordinate with topsoil placing to conform to installation requirements specified in Section 329000.

1.10 WARRANTY AND REPLACEMENT

A. SOD WARRANTY CONDITIONS: Warranty all sod areas against defects due to any cause except vandalism and acts of God for two (2) years from Final Completion. The following warranty conditions apply:

1. Resod all areas when sod is no longer in a satisfactory growing condition as determined by the Architect for the entire warranty period.

a. Satisfactory Sodded Lawn: At the end of the maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even colored, viable lawn has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities.

2. If sod areas fail after having been replaced previously, area shall be replaced until it is approved. Replacement sod shall be of the same kind, condition and quality as original sod and subject to all requirements in this specification.

3. All expenses incurred in the replacements shall be borne by the Contractor.

4. Make replacements within seven days of notification by architect.

B. POST CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION (REVIEW FOR FINAL WARRANTY COMPLIANCE): Comply with General Contract Conditions.

1.11 MAINTENANCE (See also Section 329350)

A. GENERAL: Maintain lawns by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, and other operations such as rolling, regrading and resodding and reseeding as necessary to establish a smooth, acceptable lawn, free of eroded or bare areas or as directed by the Architect.




1. Overwatering of lawns which causes stress to trees is not allowed.

B. MAINTENANCE PERIOD: Begin maintenance immediately after sodding. Maintain sodded areas in accordance with Section 329350. If necessary sub-areas may be deemed to have achieved Substantial Completion to allow maintenance period to begin in that area.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Certification required. Non-sludge Class I compost in compliance with Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment Regulation 64.

2.2 COMMERCIAL FERTILIZER

A. ORGANIC FERTILIZER: Provide fertilizer of neutral character, with some elements derived from organic sources and containing the percentages of available plant nutrients given below. Deliver fertilizers to the site fully labeled according to applicable state fertilizer laws and bearing the name, tradename, trademark and warranty of the supplier. Fertilizers which are mixed into soil shall be:

1. Biosol organic granular fertilizer consisting of 96% fungal biomass (dry mycelium), 1% water, and 3% potassium-magnesia. N-P-K Analysis: 6-1-3.

2. Guaranteed analysis shall conform to amendment requirements as given in Part 3 of this Section.

a. Manufacturer: Rocky Mountain Bio Products. Supplied by Bowman/Revex, 14440 Mead Court, Longmont, CO 80504. Ph. (970) 535-0863, Fax. (970) 535-0866, or approved equal.

B. INORGANIC FERTILIZERS

1. Ammonium sulfate and diammonium phosphate, with chemical analysis of N 20%, P 10%, K 5%, S 8%, Fe 3% (Urea and sulphur coated urea only), unless soil test recommendations provides alternative results.

2.3 WATER

A. Clean, fresh and free of substances or matter which could inhibit vigorous growth of grass.

B. Available on-site at no expense to Contractor. Landscape Contractor is responsible for coordination of water needs for watering and irrigation water with the Owner.

2.4 SOD

A. GENERAL: Provide strongly rooted sod, not less than two years old, free of weeds, stones, burned or bare spots and undesirable native grasses. Sod shall have a clay-loam base that will not break, crumble or tear during sod installation. Netted sod is acceptable. Provide viable, not dormant, sod capable of vigorous growth and development when planted, complying with applicable Colorado and Federal regulations, and having a healthy root system regularly fertilized, watered, mowed, sprayed and free from objectionable weeds and/or grasses. Sod shall be weed and free of nematodes, pests and pest larvae as inspected by the entomologist of the Colorado State Department of Agriculture, containing no more than one percent of other grasses none of which shall be coarse textured grass. Sod containing any Bermuda Grass, Quackgrass, Jonhnson Grass, Nutsedge, Canada Thistle, Timothy, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, or Bromegrass weeds will not be accepted before, during or after laying and will be cause for removal and replacement.

B. MIXTURE:

1. Sod shall be Colorado grown.




Variety Percentage

Matador Tall Fescue 30%

Tomakawk RT Tall Fescue 30%

Pure Gold Tall Fescue 30%

North Star Kentucky Bluegrass 10%

C. HARVESTING: Sod shall be fertilized 2-3 weeks prior to cutting. Any vegetation more than 4 inches in height shall be mowed to a height of 1-1/2 inches or less at least 5 days before the sod is lifted. Sod shall be harvested in rolls, and shall not be cut more than 24 hours prior to planting.

D. SIZE: Machine cut to a minimum pad thickness of 1 inch thickness of soil adhering to root system, excluding top growth and thatch. Thatch shall not exceed ½ inch uncompressed. Cut into strips 18” or 42” width by 24” minimum length. Provide sod of uniform pad sizes with maximum 5% deviation in either length or width. Broken pads or pads with uneven ends will not be acceptable. Sod pads incapable of supporting their own weight when suspended vertically from upper 10% of pad will be rejected.

E. SUBSTITUTIONS: Do not make substitutions: If specified sod is not obtainable, submit proof of non-availability to architect together with proposal for use of equivalent material for review and acceptance by architect.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. WOOD PEGS: Softwood, sufficient size and length to anchor sod in swales and on slopes exceeding 3:1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS: Examine areas and conditions under which the Work of this Section will be performed. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to the Architect. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of work implies acceptance of all areas and conditions.

1. Verify that during grading, topsoil spreading and landscape grading operations, the ground surface was be cleaned of materials which might hinder final operations.

3.2 PREPARATION


B. CLEAN UP: Clean out drainage inlet structures

3.3 SOIL PREPARATION FOR LAYING SOD

A. AMENDMENTS

1. Review topsoil analyses and samples. Refer to Section 329000.

2. Apply fertilizer and amendments at rates determined by the soil tests taken after topsoil spreading. Achieve element content specified in paragraph 3.03.A.3 this Section. Apply fertilizer and amendments to achieve matching chemical and mechanical analyses for both onsite and imported topsoil. Fertilizer and amendment quantities shall vary dependent on:

a. specified plant types and areas.

b. topsoil source.




3. Required Element Content all Sod Areas:

pH Range 6.0 - 8.0

Organic Matter 2% or Greater

Manganese 0.5 PPM

Available Iron 2.5 PPM

Phosphorus - P2O5 75 PPM

Potassium - K2O 160 PPM

Nitrate/Available Nitrogen 50 PPM

Soluble Salts Less than 3.0 mmhos/cm

Sodium/CEC

(Cation Exchange Capacity) Ratio 0.15 or greater

4. Sod Areas (Refer to Plans): The amendment quantities listed below are for bidding only. Modify quantities to conform with soil test results.

a. Ammonium Sulfate and Diammonium phosphate: apply at 200 lbs. per acre.

b. Organics: apply 4 cubic yards per 1000 square feet of non-sludge Class 1 compost.

c. Biosol organic granular fertilizer: apply 1,000 lbs. per acre.

5. Substantiate quantities with delivery tickets and empty manufacturer's bags on a daily basis to architect. Apply no more than 48 hours before seeding.

B. MIXING: Disc or rototill amendments with topsoil and existing soil to a depth of 6 inches.

C. FINE GRADING: Fine Grade and Soil Preparation in accordance with Section 329000: Fine Grading and Soil Preparation. Compact in accordance with Section 312000: Earth Moving.

D. Restore sod areas to specified condition if eroded or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and prior to sodding.

E. Obtain acceptance of final grading by the architect prior to sodding.

3.4 LAYING SOD

A. Cut no more than 24 hours prior to delivery. Lay sod within 24 hours from time of delivery. Do not plant dormant sod or if ground is frozen or excessively wet.

B. Sod cutting and delivery: do not pile sod more than 2 feet deep. During the delivery process, protect roots from exposure to drying sun, winds and heat. Store in shady area and keep moist or store covered with moistened burlap.

C. After soil preparation, roll the area to an evenly compacted, firm soil bed. Rework hard and soft areas, and scarify to a depth of 3/8 inch.

D. Distribute fertilizer uniformly at rates recommended by soil test. Apply within 48 hours before laying sod.

E. Moisten prepared surface immediately prior to laying sod. Keep soil moist during planting.

F. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod strips; do not overlap or stretch. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to subgrade or sod during installation.




G. Install initial row of sod in a straight line, beginning at bottom of slopes, perpendicular to direction of the sloped area. Place subsequent rows parallel to and tightly against previously installed row.

H. Place top elevation of sod mat 1/2 inch below adjoining edging, paving, curbs and flush with adjoining seeded areas.

I. Roll sod after installation.

J. SLOPES

1. On slopes 6 inches per foot and steeper, starting from top of slope, lay sod perpendicular to slope and secure every row with wooden pegs at maximum 2 feet on center. Drive pegs flush with soil portion of sod.

2. On slopes exceeding 8 inches per foot or where indicated, place mesh over topsoil. Anchor in place with wood pegs sunk firmly in the ground.

K. SWALES

1. In swales, starting at top of swale, lay sod perpendicular to flow line and secure every row with wooden pegs at maximum 2 feet on center. Drive pegs flush with soil portion of sod.

L. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass. Excessively shrunk sod, (over 1/2” shrinkage) shall be re-laid.

M. Water sod thoroughly with a fine spray as laying progresses and immediately after planting. Saturate sod to a depth of 4 inches.

N. After sod and soil have dried, tamp and roll sodded areas to ensure good bond between sod and soil and to remove minor depressions and irregularities and eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Make sure finished sodded areas positively drain so that no irrigation water or storm water will pond in sodded areas. Roller shall not exceed 100 pounds.

O. Add topsoil along exposed edges to match existing grade; feather topsoil out approximately 1 foot.

P. Activate sprinkler system to water sod immediately after each section of sod is laid. Water daily to maintain adequate surface moisture for proper growth.


A. TESTS: Costs of tests and material analyses made by the testing agency will be borne by the Owner when tests indicate compliance and by the Contractor when test indicated non-compliance.

B. REVIEWS

1. General: Comply with General Contract Conditions.

2. Pre-Planting Review

a. All finish grading shall be inspected by architect prior to sodding commencing. Correct any discrepancies prior to sodding.

3. Substantial Completion

a. Comply with General Contract Conditions.

b. At the time of this walk-through, the Contractor shall have:

1.) Established well rooted, thick stand of grass established over 95% of the site's limit of sodding.

2.) Verified installed irrigation system is fully operational with heads properly adjusted.




3.) Cleaned all walkways and curbs of debris and litter and shall have cleaned areas of soil and debris left from planting operations.

4. Final Completion: Comply with General Contract Conditions.

5. Closeout Documents: Comply with General Contract Conditions.

6. Start Up and Instructions: Comply with General Contract Conditions.

7. Warranty and Replacement: Warrant sod for consistency and completion of coverage. Re-sod areas as needed to obtain acceptance by the Architect. Once a vigorously growing stand of grass is achieved, the request for Construction Acceptance may be made.

8. Post Construction Inspection: Comply with General Contract Conditions.

3.6 CLEANUP

A. DURING LANDSCAPE INSTALLATION - All areas shall be reasonably clean at the end of each work day. Sidewalks and other paved areas shall be swept or washed down as needed. Keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition.

B. PROJECT COMPLETION: All debris, soil and trash resulting from landscape operations shall be removed from the site. All paved areas shall be washed down.

3.7 PROTECTION






PLANTING 32 9300 - 1

SECTION 32 9300 - PLANTING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Examination.

B. Preparation.

C. General Planting Requirements.

D. Trees and Shrubs Planted in Individual Plant Pits or Trenches.

E. Shrubs, Perennials and Groundcovers Planted in Prepared Planting Beds.

F. Clean Up.

G. Field Quality Control.

H. Protection.




C. Section 310000: Earthwork.

D. Section 328423: Underground Sprinklers

E. Section 329000: Fine Grading and Soil Preparation.

F. Section 329200: Turf and Grasses

G. Section 329400: Planting Accessories

1.3 REFERENCE

A. All nursery stock shall conform to the American Standards for Nursery Stock (ANSI Z60.1 -

most recent edition), American Association of Nurserymen, Washington D.C.

B. Hortus III, L.H. Bailey Hortorium and Staff, MacMillan Co., New York, 1976.

C. Manual of Woody Landscape Plants, M.A. Dirr, Stipes Publishing Co., Champaign, Illinois,

1990.

D. A New Tree Biology, Alex L. Shigo, Shigo and Trees Associates, Durham, New Hampshire,

1986.

E. New Tree Biology Dictionary, Alex L. Shigo, Shigo and Trees Associates, Durham, New Hamp-

shire, 1986.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. WEEDS: Includes Goatheads, Bindweed, Twitch, Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Weed, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, Pigweed, Kosher, and Broom Grass.

B. PLANTS: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, annuals perennials, and bulbs specified in the plant list.



32 9300 - 2 PLANTING

C. STA Certification: A certification program administered by the United States Composting Council (USCC) under the name of “Seal of Testing Assurance (STA). Compost products so certified have been sampled and tested as required by the Seal of Testing Assurance Program of the United States Composting Council


A. Comply with Section 013300. All submittals and plant materials shall be accepted by the Archi-

tect in writing before planting commences.

B. TOPSOIL TESTING

1. Coordinate soil testing with General Conditions.

C. CERTIFICATES



D. ANALYSIS AND STANDARDS: Wherever applicable, for non-packaged materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the Asso-ciation of Official Agriculture Chemists.

E. PLANTING SCHEDULE: Submit in accordance with General Conditions.

F. PLANT PHOTOGRAPHS: Submit one color photograph or color digital image of all trees over

2 inch caliper or 7 foot height for any plant materials which are located outside of 30 mile radius

of Denver for approval by Architect prior to shipment to the site or the contractor' holding yard.

G. TREE PLANTING MATERIAL SUBMITTAL: Submit 1 tree collar and 1 sample of tree wrap.

H. CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS: Submit nursery and installation company qualifications in

accordance with paragraph 1.6.B this Section for acceptance by Architect.


A. Comply with Section 014400

B. QUALIFICATIONS

1. Nursery: Company specializing in growing and cultivating the plants with minimum five

(5) years experience, and certified by the State of Colorado Department of Agriculture.

2. Installer: Company with minimum five (5) years successful experience in the installation

of landscape areas similar in size and complexity to this project. The foreman shall be a

Certified Landscape Technician Company shall be a member in good standing of one of

the following organizations:

a. Associated Landscape Contractors of America.

b. American Association of Nurserymen.

c. A member of the Nurserymen's Association of the state in which the work is being

performed.


1. Comply with regulatory agencies concerning classification, transportation, handling and

storage of plants, fertilizer, herbicide and pesticide materials.

2. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer, herbicide and pesticide composition and

application.




3. Comply with the Colorado Nursery Act.

D. REJECTION OF MATERIALS

1. Evidence of inadequate or inappropriate protection after digging, transportation, or im-

proper handling or storage, shall be cause for rejection.

2. Architect will inspect plants for proper shipping procedures upon arrival at the temporary

storage location or the site. The Architect will reject injured plants including those with

dried out roots, broken large branches, broken, or loosened balls or earth, split trunks or

torn areas of bark.

3. The Contractor shall immediately remove and replace rejected plants.

E. PLANT LIST: Plant quantities are provided for the Contractor's convenience only. The Contrac-

tor shall provide all plants in quantities as shown on Drawings despite any discrepancies which

may exist with quantities called for on the plant list.


A. PACKAGED MATERIALS: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis

and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while

stored at site.

B. SHIPPING OF PLANTS

1. Plant Names and Labeling: Botanic and common names given in the plant list are in con-

formance with standard horticultural practice in the area. Deliver all plants to the site with

tags bearing the botanical name and size as indicated in the plant list.

2. Nursery Harvesting: Provide freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery

unless otherwise approved by Architect. Plants shall be dug and prepared for shipment

in a manner that will not cause damage to branches, shape and future development after

planting. Trunks shall be wrapped for added protection. All balled and burlapped trees

are to be dug during the appropriate time of year for the species listed, but in no case af-

ter buds have opened or prior to fall leaf drop. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in

such manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Wounds,

scars or damage shall be grounds for rejection. Do not drop balled and burlapped stock

during delivery.

a. If necessary obtain Architect's approval to dig plants in full leaf. Spray foliage with

antidessicant such as Wilt-proof or approved equal.

3. Transportation

a. Open vehicles used to transport plants to the project shall be covered with tarpau-

lins or other suitable covers securely fastened to the vehicle to prevent damage to

the plants. Closed vehicles shall be adequately ventilated to prevent overheating

of the plants. Do not remove plants from refrigerated trucks into hot weather with-

out allowing time for plants to adjust to heat.

b. Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection required by governing au-

thorities. Comply with regulations applicable to landscape materials.

c. Keep plants moist fresh and protected at all times.

4. Contractor shall exercise care in the handling of plant materials to avoid damage or

stress.

ACCEPTANCE OF PLANTS AT SITE: Unless otherwise authorized by the Architect, the

Contractor shall notify the Architect at least two working days in advance of the anticipat-

ed delivery date of any plant material. A legible copy of the bill of lading, showing the




quantities, kinds, and sizes of materials included for each shipment shall be furnished to

the Architect.

C. STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF PLANTS

1. Keep plants moist fresh and protected at all times, including entire period of transit, han-

dling, and temporary storage.

2. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant

immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs

in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist by cover-

ing with mulch, burlap or other acceptable means of retaining moisture. Duration and

method of storage are subject to Architect's approval. Plants shall not remain on the site

more than 3 days prior to planting unless specific authorization is obtained by the Archi-

tect.



1. Planting Season: Planting shall occur only after April 15 and before October 1 or as

specified on the Drawings without written approval from Architect. Northern Red Oaks

(Quercus rubra) shall be planted no later than May 31.

2. Planting shall occur only when weather and soil conditions permit in accordance with lo-

cally accepted practice. Do not plant during periods of prolonged cold or heat, or during

excessively wet or dry periods.


1. Existing Plants: Do not damage any existing plantings indicated to remain. Plant areas

after final grades are established in accordance with Section 329000, unless otherwise

directed by the Architect.

2. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities. Perform work in a manner to avoid

possible damage. Hand excavate, as required.

3. Excavation: Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon

by parties concerned. When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered,

such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, noxious materials or obstructions, notify

Architect before planting.


A. WORK SCHEDULING: Proceed with and complete landscape work as rapidly as portions of

the site become available, working within the specified planting season and approved schedule.

B. COORDINATION

1. Coordinate with Contractor's work requiring access to site through planting areas.


3. Coordinate Planting with Seeded and Sodded Areas: Plant trees and shrubs after final

grades are established and prior to seeding and sodding, unless otherwise acceptable to

Architect. If planting occurs after seeding or sodding, protect areas and promptly repair

damage resulting from planting operations.

4. Coordinate planting to provide maintenance up to date of Substantial Completion in ac-

cordance with Paragraph 1.11 this Section.





A. GENERAL: Refer to Division 1.

B. PLANT WARRANTY CONDITIONS: Warranty all plant materials, landscape materials, work-

manship and other appurtenances against defects due to any cause except vandalism and acts

of God. The following warranty conditions apply:

1. Replant when plants are no longer in a satisfactory growing condition as determined by

the Architect for the entire warranty period.

2. Guarantee/warranty applies to all originally installed materials, and to replacements made

during the guarantee/warrantee period. Replacement plants shall be of the same kind,

condition and quality as original plants and subject to all requirements in this specifica-

tion.

3. Plants shall be healthy, and in flourishing condition at the end of the warranty period.

Plants shall be free of dying branches and branch tips, and shall bear foliage of normal

density, size and color.

4. Settling of depressions shall be regraded and plant material in settled areas replaced.

5. All expenses incurred in the replacements shall be borne by the Contractor.

6. Make replacements within seven days of notification by Architect.

C. POST CONSTRUCTION Inspection (Review for FINAL Warranty Compliance): Comply with Di-

vision 1 requirements.

1.11 MAINTENANCE

A. GENERAL: Maintain plants by watering, fertilizing, pruning, restoring planting saucers, tighten-

ing and repairing stake supports, resetting trees and shrubs to proper grades or vertical posi-

tion as required, spraying as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease, cul-

tivating and weeding as required for healthy growth or as directed by the Architect.

1. Monitor watering of plants and lawns to verify overwatering is not causing stress to trees.

2. Tree Wrap

a. Apply a coating of insecticide and fungicide to the tree trunk area to be wrapped.

b. Apply wrap to overlap 1 1/2" from ground line up to the lowest branch. Wrap trunks

in late fall (approximately November 15).

c. Tie securely in at least five places with jute twine, placed at least 12" apt.

d. Remove tree wrap the beginning of the growing season (approximately April 15).

e. Do not wrap cottonwoods (Populus spp.).

B. MAINTENANCE PERIOD: Begin maintenance immediately after planting. Maintain plants in

accordance with Section 329350. If necessary sub-areas may be deemed to have achieved

Substantial Completion to allow maintenance period to begin in that area.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. COMPOST: Non-sludge Class 1 STA-certified Compost in compliance with Colorado

Department of Public Health and Environment Regulation 64.

2.2 COMMERCIAL FERTILIZER




A. ORGANIC FERTILIZER: Provide fertilizer of neutral character, with some elements derived

from organic sources and containing the percentages of available plant nutrients given below.

Deliver fertilizers to the site fully labeled according to applicable state fertilizer laws and bearing

the name, trade name, trademark and warranty of the supplier. Fertilizers which are mixed into

soil shall be:

1. Biosol organic granular fertilizer consisting of 96% fungal biomass (dry mycelium), 1%

water, and 3% potassium-magnesia. N-P-K Analysis: 6-1-3.

2. Guaranteed analysis shall conform to amendment requirements as given in Part 3 of this

Section.

a. Manufacturer: Rocky Mountain Bio Products. Supplied by Bowman/Revex, 14440

Mead Court, Longmont, CO 80504. Ph. (970) 535-0863, Fax. (970) 535-0866, or

approved equal.

3. Bone Meal: Commercial, raw, finely ground; 4% nitrogen and 20% phosphoric acid.

B. INORGANIC FERTILIZERS: None.

2.3 WATER

A. Clean, potable and free of substances or matter which could inhibit vigorous growth of plants.

B. Available on-site at no expense to Contractor. Landscape Contractor is responsible for coordi-

nation of water needs for watering and irrigation water with the Owner.

2.4 GENERAL PLANT REQUIREMENTS

A. HEALTH: Plant materials provided shall:

1. Be healthy and vigorous with normal developed branch and root systems, free of objec-

tionable features. Must conform to: American Joint Committee on Horticulture (plant

names); American Standard for Nursery Stock (ANSI Z60.1); Colorado Nursery Act.

2. Be free from disease, injury, insects and their eggs, larvae, parasites of objectionable or

damaging nature.

3. Have a well-developed fibrous root system.

4. Be free of physical damage such as scrapes, broken or split branches, scars, bark abra-

sions, sun scalds, fresh limb cuts, disfiguring knots, or other defects.

5. Be free of weed roots.

B. SIZE AND FORM: Plant materials provided shall:

1. Meet the sizes indicated on the Plant List. Where a size or caliper range is stated, at

least 50% of the plants shall be closer in size to the top of the stated range. Plants larger

or smaller than specified may be used only if accepted by the Architect.

2. Meet the requirements of the reference standards for size, branching, condition, ball size,

number of canes and all other conditions particular to each species.

3. Be well branched and proportioned with respect to height and width relationships, and

characteristic of the exact type called for in the plant list.

C. BALLED AND BURLAPPED PLANTS: Nursery grown stock adequately balled with firm, natu-

ral balls of soil in sizes and ratios in accordance with the reference standards. Balls shall be

firmly wrapped with non-treated burlap, secured with wire or jute. Broken balls will not be ac-

cepted.




D. CONTAINER GROWN PLANTS: Nursery grown in fibrous, plastic or metal containers and

shall have sufficient roots to hold the entire soil mass together after container removal without

being root-bound.

E. COLLECTED PLANTS: Plants collected from native stands or established plantings which

have a root system greater than roots of nursery grown plants. Collected plants require a larger

root ball than recommended for transplanted nursery stock as specified in reference standards.

Collection tags shall be attached to each plant as required by regulatory agencies.

F. SPADED PLANTS: Plants shall be dug with tree spade and directly planted on site, or tempo-

rarily burlapped and placed in a wire basket while plant pit is hand dug on site. Size of tree

spade in proportion to plant shall be as specified in reference standard for collected plants.

G. OPTIONS: If all other requirements are met, a balled and burlapped plant may be substituted

for a container grown plant of the same or larger size at the Contractor's option upon ac-

ceptance of the Architect.

H. Architect shall inspect and tag all deciduous and evergreen trees at tree sources, within 30

miles of Denver, prior to digging and shipment to site. Approval of plant material from sources

outside the 30 mile radius shall be reviewed in accordance with paragraph 1.05.F this Section.

I. SUBSTITUTIONS: Do not make substitutions: If specified landscape material is not obtaina-

ble, submit proof of non-availability to Architect together with proposal for use of equivalent ma-

terial for review and acceptance by Architect.

2.5 DECIDUOUS TREES AND SHRUBS

A. Provide plants of height, size, condition and recommended branching configuration scheduled.

Trees shall be uniformly shaped, quality plants with single leader, and evenly distributed

branching in all directions.

B. If in leaf, trees shall be fully leafed-out with healthy, full and vigorous growth. Leaf damage

caused by insects, hail and/or transplant shock shall be cause for rejection. If dormant, tree

shall have pliable, green twigs and viable buds to indicate the healthy condition of plants, as

appropriate to the species.

C. Adjacent plants of the same variety and size shall be consistent in size, shape, and overall ap-

pearance. Particular emphasis will be placed on this requirement for trees which occur in a

straight row or otherwise formal relationship.

D. Trees with included bark will not be accepted.

2.6 EVERGREEN TREES AND SHRUBS

A. Provide plants of height, size, condition and recommended branching configuration scheduled.

Trees shall be uniformly shaped, quality plants with single leader and evenly distributed branch-

ing.in all directions.

B. Coniferous trees shall be heavily branched, full needled, low branching, specimen quality

plants. Evidence of dormant buds and secondary needles shall be present. Damage caused

by excessive pruning, insect infestation, galls or other plant disorders or damage shall be cause

for rejection. Container grown evergreens will be acceptable subject to paragraph 2.4.D this

Section.

C. Adjacent plants of the same variety and size shall be consistent in size, shape, and overall ap-

pearance. Particular emphasis will be placed on this requirement for trees which occur in a

straight row or otherwise formal relationship.

2.7 GROUND COVERS, VINES AND PERENNIALS




A. Provide plants established and well-rooted in removable containers or integral peat pots with

not less than minimum number and length of canes, runners or blades as required by the refer-

ence standard.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. TREE STAKES: Two-inch diameter round lodgepole stake, straight and true, treated for re-

sistance to rot, 8 foot length. Or Metal heavy-duty T-stakes with white tops, 8 foot length.

B. STAKING WIRE: Annealed, galvanized steel, 17 gauge wire.

C. TREE COLLAR: ½” STRAP-X (flat synthetic webbing material) or ½” Central Bag polyester

strapping.

1. Supplier: Central Bag and Burlap Co., 2715 Blake Street, Denver, CO 80205, (303)297-

9955, or approved equal.

D. WRAPPING MATERIAL: First quality 4 inch wide, bituminous impregnated Kraft tree wrap, cor-

rugated or crepe paper, specifically manufactured for tree wrapping and having qualities to re-

sist insect infestation.

E. PVC: 24” x ½”" diameter white PVC pipe.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS: Examine areas and conditions under which the Work of

this Section will be performed. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to the Archi-

tect. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Com-

mencement of Work implies acceptance of all areas and conditions.

1. Verify that during grading, topsoil spreading and landscape grading operations, the

ground surface was cleaned of materials which might hinder final operations.

2. Schedule a tree delivery and layout inspection with City Foresters by calling (303) 651-

8446. Trees shall be inspected for form, condition and health. Rejected trees to be re-

moved immediately from site and replaced. Replacements are subject to reinspection by

City Forester. Inspection requirements include trees to be off-loaded from trucks to allow

for full access. Binding material and trunk protection to be removed by Contractor prior to

inspection.

a. Tree layout inspection shall be done at the same time the tree materials are deliv-

ered. Utility line locates to be visible in all planting areas. Stakes for proposed tree

locations to be placed in planting areas requiring City inspection.

B. DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF PLANT MATERIALS

1. Shade cloth shall be used to cover trees during transportation. Balled (B&B) trees should

have limbs bound to prevent injury during delivery. Keep root systems moist and protect

plants from adverse climate and transportation conditions. B and B stock shall be heeled

in immediately upon delivery to the site unless it is planted within four (4) hours. Store

other plants in shade and protect from adverse weather and from drying out. When han-

dling, do not lift plants by trunk or stem; handle on ball or container. Obtain City inspec-

tion per 3.1.A.2.a.

3.2 PREPARATION





B. UTILITY LOCATES: Obtain new utility locates if needed – all utilities must be clearly visible at the time of the City plant material layout inspection.

C. LAYOUT: Stake locations of individual plants and outline areas for multiple plantings. Secure

Architect's approval prior to starting Work.

3.3 GENERAL PLANTING REQUIREMENTS

A. PLANTING SEASON: Plant in accordance with paragraph 1.8.A this Section.

3.4 TREES AND SHRUBS PLANTED IN INDIVIDUAL PLANT PITS OR TRENCHES

A. EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS IN INDIVIDUAL PLANT PITS OR TRENCHES

1. Excavate pits, beds and trenches with sides shaped and sized as detailed. Scarify sub-

soil on bottom and sides of excavation.

2. In tree pits without tree pit drains, fill each pit with water to test drainage. Pits shall drain

within 24 hours.

a. In the event non-draining soil is encountered, recommend to the Architect method

to achieve subsurface drainage from details on the Drawings.

b. Drainage system shall be approved by Architect prior to installation.

3. For balled and burlapped and container grown stock, excavate as shown on the Draw-

ings. Adjust excavation to size of container width and depth, shaping excavation as indi-

cated.

4. Preserve soil removed from tree and shrub planting excavations for reuse as tree and

shrub planting soil.

B. SOIL PREPARATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS IN INDIVIDUAL PLANT PITS

1. Clean soil in plant pits of roots, plants, sods, stones over 1.5 inches, clay lumps, asphaltic

materials, concrete, metal and wire fragments and other extraneous materials harmful or

toxic to plant growth. Remove contaminated subsoil.

2. Mix soil amendments with soil from pit at rates specified below:

Two parts topsoil by volume

One part compost by volume

Three parts native soil from planting pits

Superphosphate amendment

3. Uniformly mix planting soil mix, turning several times to achieve a uniform, evenly blend-

ed consistency, free of all pockets of unblended materials and any clods or stones

greater than 1.5 inches in their greatest dimension.

C. PLANTING TREES AND SHRUBS IN INDIVIDUAL PLANT PITS

1. Plant container grown and balled and burlapped (B&B) material in same manner except

where noted. Do not plant B&B trees if tree trunk is loose in root ball or if ball is cracked

or broken before or during the planting process.

2. Place planting soil mix in pit and compact to depth where the root flare above the solid

root ball is four (4) inches above grade in irrigated turf areas. Contractor to contact City

staff if they are not sure where the root flare is located on the tree. Modify depth of pit if

soil conditions warrant and/or per City direction.



32 9300 - 10 PLANTING

3. Set plant on layer of compacted planting soil mix, plumb and in center of pit or trench with

top of ball at required elevation.

4. Place plant for best appearance for review and final orientation by the Architect.

5. Remove non-biodegradable root containers.

a. Wire Baskets: Cut and remove bottom one third (1/3) of wire basket from root ball.

After setting in hole wire basket must be completely removed. Place wire on tree

stakes for City inspection prior to removal from site. Remove remaining wire and

twine. DO NOT pull wrapping or wire from under ball as it may damage the root

ball.

b. Containers: Cut container cans on 2 sides with an approved can cutter; remove

container so as not to damage root balls; A spade shall not be used.

6. When set, place additional backfill around base and sides of root ball, and work each lay-

er to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets. When excavation is approximate-

ly 2/3 full, water thoroughly. Remove top one third (1/3) of burlap. Repeat watering until

no more is absorbed.

7. Place remaining planting soil mix. DO NOT compact backfill mix by tamping. DO Not

backfill over crown of root ball or exceed soil depth of root ball. Crown must be at proper

planting depth. Install five (5) inch high watering basins around trees. Water again after

placing final layer of planting soil mix.

8. Remove and grade out berm around basin after two thorough waterings in irrigated are-

as. Mulch after berm basin is removed.

9. Unless otherwise directed by Architect, do not cut tree leaders and remove only injured or

dead branches from trees and shrubs, if any. Make flush cuts perpendicular to the sec-

ondary branches being removed in accordance with the References.

10. Remove and replace excessively pruned or stock.

11. Stake trees immediately after planting, as detailed using stakes or guying as noted on

planting plan. Set trees plumb. Pound metal or wood stakes into undisturbed soil be-

yond the planting pit sot that stake is secure. Secure STRAP-X or wire through metal

grommets on canvas strap to tree and wrap above first branch on deciduous trees or at

mid-point of tree on coniferous trees. Secure guy to stake so that it is taut but allows

some movement. Where wire is used as a guy, secure it so that no sharp projections are

extending from post and flag it with one half (1/2) inch PVC pipe for visibility. Adjust ten-

sion on guy if needed. If metal t-posts are used, place PVC caps on top of posts. Wood-

en pole stakes may be used without PVC caps. Wrap all trees in fall except for Populus

species.

3.5 SHRUBS, PERENNIALS GROUNDCOVERS AND BULBS PLANTED IN PREPARED

PLANTING BEDS AND PLANTERS

A. SOIL PREPARATION FOR SHRUBS, PERENNIALS AND GROUNDCOVERS PLANTED IN

AT GRADE PREPARED PLANTING BEDS

1. Prior to placing topsoil, disc or scarify existing subsoil in planting beds to a minimum

depth of 6 inches or to a depth as indicated in drawings using a cultimulcher or similar

equipment. Remove roots, plants, sods, stones over 1.5 inches, clay lumps, asphaltic

materials, concrete, metal and wire fragments and other extraneous materials harmful or

toxic to plant growth. Remove contaminated subsoil.

2. Soil Preparation for Planting Beds



PLANTING 32 9300 - 11

a. 1.) Organics: Apply 5 cubic yards per 1,000 square feet of compost by volume.

2.) Fertilizer: Apply 25 pounds of Biosol organic granular fertilizer per 1,000

square feet. Verify application rate after reviewing soils analysis.

3.) Substantiate quantities with delivery tickets and empty manufacturer's bags

on a daily basis to Architect.

b. Incorporate 50% of the required organic amendments and fertilizer. Thoroughly ro-

totill into existing subsoil to a depth of 5 inches to achieve a uniform, evenly blend-

ed consistency free of all pockets of unblended materials and any clods or stones

greater than 1.5 inches.

c. Spread imported topsoil mix in accordance with Section 32 90 00 over amended

subsoil in all planting bed areas. Remove roots, plants, sods, stones over 1.5

inches, clay lumps, asphaltic materials, concrete, metal and wire fragments and

other extraneous materials harmful or toxic to plant growth.

d. Incorporate remaining 50% of the required organic amendments and fertilizer with

topsoil mix. Rototill to a depth of 7 inches. Apply and rototill in fertilizer no more

than 48 hours before planting.

e. Fill prepared planting bed with water and allow to percolate out before planting. If

water does not drain out in 24 hours, notify Architect.

1.) In the event non-draining soil is encountered, recommend to Architect meth-

od to achieve subsurface drainage.

2.) Drainage system shall be approved by Architect prior to installation.

f. Total depth of soil mixture shall be a uniform 10 inches in all planting beds after

light rolling and natural settlement or as indicated in drawings. Compact soil in

planting beds to 90% in accordance with Section 310000.

B. PLANTING SHRUBS, GROUND COVERS, VINES, AND PERENNIALS IN PREPARED

PLANTING BEDS AND PLANTERS

1. Plant container grown and balled and burlapped (B&B) material in same manner except

where noted.

2. Space plants as shown on the Drawings.

3. Place plant for best appearance for review and final orientation by the Architect.

4. Remove non-biodegradable root containers, including wire baskets. Cut container cans

on 2 sides with an approved can cutter; remove stock so as not to damage root balls. A

spade shall not be used. Vertically score root ball using a sharp knife, about one eighth

(1/8) inch deep and about every two to three (2-3) inches in circumference. If stock is

root bound, butterfly root ball by cutting ball in half, halfway up from the bottom; flare root

ball out to sides when planting.

5. Dig holes large enough to allow for root ball container and backfill with amended soil in

the plant beds or soil mix in planters. Set plant plumb and face for best effect. Make

sure crown of root ball is at correct grade.

6. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation

around plants to hold water. DO NOT compact backfill mix by tamping. DO NOT backfill

over crown or root ball or exceed soil depth of container; crown must be at or slightly

above finished ground level. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover

crowns of plants with wet soils.



32 9300 - 12 PLANTING

7. Dish top of backfill to allow for mulching as indicated. Mulch after two (2) thorough water-

ings

8. Completion of planting:

a. Shape surface of finish grade around root ball so water drains away from trunk or

stems and to match finish grade at edge of planting pit.

b. Remove plant tags from trees and shrubs.

9. Unless otherwise directed by Architect, remove only injured or dead branches from

shrubs, if any. Make flush cuts perpendicular to the secondary branches being removed.

10. Remove and replace excessively pruned or stock.


A. TESTS: Costs of tests and material analyses made by the testing agency will be borne by the

Owner when tests indicate compliance and by the Contractor when test indicated non-

compliance.

B. REVIEWS

1. General: Comply with Division 1.


a. Plant Procurement Inspection

1.) Contractor shall notify Architect upon selection of all trees and shall desig-

nate source and location for inspection. Proposed materials shall be flagged

by the Contractor to facilitate inspection.

2.) Architect may choose to attach his seal to each tree or to representative

samples. Inspection and/or sealing of plants by the Architect at the source

does not preclude his rejection of trees for improper handling, transportation,

storage, damage, insects or disease or otherwise not meeting this specifica-

tion at the site of planting.

3.) Do not ship trees to site without the Architect's approval.

b. Plant Inspection

1.) All plant materials must be inspected by the Architect at supplier's or contrac-

tor's nursery and at the site before planting commences. Tag acceptable

plant material with Contractor's numbered tag and verify upon arrival at the

project site. Notify Architect 48 in advance to request inspection of plant ma-

terial. Any materials planted prior to acceptance are subject to rejection. In-

spection of plant materials may be sequenced by major planting areas to ac-

commodate efficient planting operations. All rejected materials must be re-

moved from the site, replaced and re-inspected before any additional inspec-

tions are made.

2.) The Architect may elect to inspect trees and shrubs at place of growth before

planting, for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size

and quality. Architect retains the right to further inspect trees and shrubs for

size and conditions of balls and root systems, insects, injuries and latent de-

fects, and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during

progress of work.



PLANTING 32 9300 - 13

3.) If, in the opinion of the Architect, there is probable cause to suspect root

damage, root binding, or disease conditions in the container stock plants, the

Contractor will remove the container for the Architect's inspection before

planting.

c. Grading: All finish grading shall be inspected by Architect prior to planting com-

mencing. Correct any discrepancies prior to planting.

d. Staking: Stake all tree and shrub locations with flags. Architect shall inspect the

staked locations before digging shall occur. The Contractor shall give the Architect

48 hours notice to request inspection of staked locations.


a. Comply with General Conditions.


1.) Established all planted areas free of weeds, and neatly cultivated. All plant

basins shall be in good repair. Pruning shall be completed.

2.) Verified installed irrigation system is fully operational with heads properly ad-

justed.

3.) Cleaned all walkways and curbs of debris and litter and shall have cleaned

areas of soil and debris left from planting operations.

4. Final Completion: Comply with General Conditions.

5. Closeout Documents: Record drawings: list all plant material installed, including sizes

and quantities as certified by the Architect. Comply with General Conditions.

6. Start Up and Instructions: Comply with General Conditions.

7. Warranty and Replacement: Comply with General Conditions.

8. Post Construction Inspection: Comply with General Conditions.

3.7 CLEANUP

A. DURING LANDSCAPE INSTALLATION - All areas shall be reasonably clean at the end of each

work day. Sidewalks and other paved areas shall be swept or washed down as needed. Keep

pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition.

B. PROJECT COMPLETION: All debris, soil and trash resulting from landscape operations shall

be removed from the site. All paved areas shall be washed down. All tags shall be removed

from plant material.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations, operations by

other contractors and trades and trespassers.

B. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair or replace dam-

aged landscape work as directed.




LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 32 9350 - 1

SECTION 32 9350 - LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Tree and Plant Maintenance.

B. Turf Maintenance.

C. Irrigation System Maintenance.

D. Clean Up.

E. Protection.


A. Section 013300: Submittal Procedures

B. Section 014000: Quality Requirements

C. City Standards: Underground Sprinklers


E. Section 329200: Turf and Grasses.

F. Section 329300: Planting.

G. Section 329400: Planting Accessories

1.3 REFERENCE

A. American Standards for Nursery Stock (ANSI Z60.1 - most recent edition), American Association of Nurserymen, Washington D.C.

B. Hortus III, L.H. Bailey Hortorium and Staff, MacMillan Co., New York, 1976.

C. Manual of Woody Landscape Plants, M.A. Dirr, Stipes Publishing Co., Champaign, Illinois, 1990.

D. A New Tree Biology, Alex L. Shigo, Shigo and Trees Associates, Durham, New Hampshire, 1986.

E. A New Tree Biology Dictionary, Alex L. Shigo, Shigo and Trees Associates, Durham, New Hampshire, 1986.

F. USDA Soil Conservation Service, Technical Guide, Section IV, Standards and Specifications, Critical Area Planting (342), July 1981.

G. ASPA (American Sod Producers Association) - Guideline Specifications to Sodding.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. WEEDS: Includes Goatheads, Bindweed, Twitch, Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Weed, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, Pigweed, Kosher, and Broom Grass.

B. PLANTS: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, annuals, perennials, and bulbs specified in the plant list.



32 9350 - 2 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE



B. Submit in typewritten form:

1. Maintenance company qualification for acceptance by Architect and Owner prior to commencing Work. Include hourly rates for maintenance personnel. Submit 2 weeks prior to Final Acceptance walk-through.

2. Procedures which Contractor shall complete during the maintenance period.

a. Include proposed herbicide, insecticides, fertilizers, and any other chemical treatment to the Architect for review and approval prior to commencing Work.

3. Procedures to be established by the Owner, upon completion of maintenance period, for one year maintenance of landscape. Submit 3 months prior to the expiration of the maintenance period.



B. QUALIFICATIONS

1. Maintenance Company: The work of this Section shall be the responsibility of the landscape subcontractors ONLY. This Section may be performed by the landscape subcontractor or his sub-subcontractor. Company shall be a member in good standing of one of the following organizations:

a. Associated Landscape Contractors of America.

b. American Association of Nurserymen.

c. A member of the Nurserymen's Association of the state in which the work is being performed.

2. Work Force: Contractor's representative shall be experienced in the maintenance and repair of all types of plantings and irrigation systems which are part of this Contract.


1. Comply with regulatory agencies concerning classification, transportation, handling and storage of plants, fertilizer, herbicide and pesticide materials.

2. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer, herbicide and pesticide composition and application.

3. Licenses and Taxes:

a. Licenses: Contractor shall obtain and pay for all licenses required by city, county, state and federal governments that are necessary for the legal conduct of his business.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. MATERIALS: All materials used in maintenance and repair shall conform to these Specifications or shall be otherwise accepted by the Owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL




A. GENERAL: Furnish all supervision, labor, material, equipment and transportation required to maintain the planting and irrigation system called for under this Contract, in an attractive, healthy, operable condition. Contractor shall be responsible for all maintenance and shall provide winter watering as needed to insure healthy, vigorous plant growth. Contractor to provide bid for landscape maintenance for a period of One (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion.

B. PRE-MAINTENANCE INSPECTION: Schedule pre-maintenance inspection prior to the beginning of the warranty period in accordance with sections 329200, and 329300.

3.2 TREE AND PLANT MAINTENANCE

A. WATERING: Maintain large enough water basin around plants so that enough water can be applied to establish moisture through the major root zone. When hand watering, use a water wand to break the water force. Utilize mulches to reduce evaporation and watering frequency. Contractor is responsible for all winter water requirements.

B. PRUNING: None required except at time of planting and as needed to correct damage.

C. STAKES AND GUYS: Inspect regularly to prevent girdling of trunks or branches and to prevent rubbing which might cause bark wounds. Remove and replace stakes and guys as directed by the Owner's Representative.

D. WEED CONTROL: Maintain tree and shrub basins free of weeds and grasses on a weekly basis using a pre-approved herbicide. Frequent soil cultivation which might destroy shallow roots is not permitted. Apply approved pre-emergent herbicide to shrub beds in the spring. Use of mulches to prevent seed germination is permitted.

E. INSECTS AND DISEASE CONTROL: Control insects and disease as necessary to prevent damage to the health or appearance of plants. Use only approved materials and methods.

F. FERTILIZATION: Fertilize trees and shrubs by means of foliar application of an approved water soluble fertilizer. Submit fertilizer specifications to Architect for approval. Fertilize trees and shrubs at the following times when they occur during the maintenance period:

1. Early April.

2. June.

3. Early August.

G. REPLACEMENT OF PLANTS: Replace plant material during the warranty period in accordance with Sections 329200, and 329300. Remove dead and dying plants and replace with plants of equal size, condition and variety of original planting. Make replacements within 7 days of notification from Owner except as prohibited by season and authorized by the Owner, and remove rejected plants within 7 days of notice.

H. TREE PROTECTION: Remove and/or apply tree wrap starting wrap from the bottom up. Wrap all trees, except for Cottonwoods (Populus spp.).

1. Apply a coating of insecticide and fungicide to the tree trunk area to be wrapped.

2. Apply wrap to overlap 1 1/2" from ground line up to the lowest branch. Wrap trunks in late fall (approximately November 15).

3. Tie securely in at least five places with jute twine, placed at least 12" apt.

4. Remove tree wrap the beginning of the growing season (approximately April 15).

I. EMERGENCY REPAIRS: Contractor shall be available to the Owner at any time during the maintenance period to perform emergency repairs that may be necessary. Costs will be negotiated by the Owner and the Contractor at the time based on Contractor's submitted hourly rates.

3.3 TURF MAINTENANCE



32 9350 - 4 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE

A. MOWING AND EDGING: Trim edges of curbs and walks at least twice monthly or as needed for neat appearance. Pick up trash before each mowing. Vacuum or Blow off and remove clippings from walks and streets. Mowing schedule to be reviewed by and coordinated with the Owner. Remove grass clippings from the premises. Trimming up of lower branches of trees and shrubs for ease of maintenance is not permitted. Mow areas as follows:

1. Turf: Mow all turf to a minimum of two inches height. Mow at least every 7 days during the spring and fall seasons, and as needed at other times.

3. Dryland/Detention Pond Grass: Mow dryland grass seeded areas 3 times during growing season. Do not mow until after first blooming of flowers.

B. WATERING: Water lawns at such frequency as weather conditions require to replenish soil moisture below the root zone. Watering shall only be done in the evening hours. Normal watering may entail as much as 1 1/2" of water weekly in hot weather.

C. FERTILIZATION AND WEED CONTROL: Apply the following fertilizers and weed control at the following times when they occur during the maintenance period. Prevent fertilizer staining pf adjacent pavements.

1. Turfgrass: Fertilized with accepted material, 20/15/5 plus 3% iron two times per growing season at a rate of 1 1/4 pounds of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet, once in April, once between June 20 and July 7. Fertilizer application which occurs in April shall also contain a pre-emergent herbicide applied at manufacturer's recommended rates (Balan, Dachtal, Dateasan acceptable).

D. WEED CONTROL: Control broad-leaf weeds in turfgrass seeded areas only, not areas seeded with wildflowers. Use selective herbicides as accepted by Owner. Follow all manufacturer's recommendations and precautions.

E. INSECT AND DISEASE CONTROL: Apply necessary insecticides and fungicides as condition of turf requires and as approved by the Owner.

3.4 IRRIGATION SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

A. REVIEWS AND REPAIRS: Check all systems for proper operation after each mowing. Make all repairs before the next watering cycle. Any damage caused to the system by Contractor's operations shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner.

1. Correct any repairs needed as a result of improper winterization or negligence due to the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING: Program the irrigation controller including schedule, cycles, amount of water, etc. Review watering schedule with Owner.

1. Take extra care to balance the requirements of trees, shrubs and lawns which are in the same vicinity. Adjust watering timing and rates frequently to insure the health of each type of plant material. Adjust sprinkler nozzle settings and sizes to refine application rates in specific areas as necessary.

C. WINTERIZATION: Remove all water from the system using compressed air.

D. SPRING START-UP: Activate the system and demonstrate that it is in full working order. Repairs needed as a result of improper winterization or negligence due to the Contractor shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.5 CLEANUP

A. DURING LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE: All areas shall be reasonably clean at the end of each work day. Sidewalks and other paved areas shall be swept or washed down as needed. Keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition.

3.6 PROTECTION





B. Treat, repair or replace damaged landscape work as directed.

C. Protect adjacent pavements from fertilizer staining.




PLANTING ACCESSORIES 32 9400 - 1

SECTION 329400 - PLANTING ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Examination.

B. Preparation.

C. Rock Mulch.

D. Wood Mulch.

E. Landscape Edging.

F. Weed Barrier Fabric

G. Field Quality Control.

H. Clean Up.

I. Protection.




C. City Standards: Underground Irrigation System.


E. Section 329200: Turf and Grasses.

F. Section 329300: Planting.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM D1557 - Test Method for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 10-lb Rammer and 18-inch Drop.

B. ASTM C117 - Test Method for Materials Finer than No.200 (75-um) Sieve in Rock

Aggregates by Washing.

C. ASTM C136 - Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.

D. ASTM D1557 - Moisture Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 10-

lb. Rammer and 18-in. Drop.

E. ASTM D4318 - Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. WEEDS: Includes Goatheads, Bindweed, Twitch, Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Weed, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Broom Grass.



32 9400 - 2 PLANTING ACCESSORIES


A. Comply with Section 01 33 00. All submittals shall be accepted by the Architect in writing before planting commences.

B. DESCRIPTIVE PRODUCT DATA: Submit catalog cuts, brochures, and analyses of any manufactured items.

C. CERTIFICATES



D. ANALYSIS AND STANDARDS: Wherever applicable, for non packaged materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the Association of Official Agriculture Chemists.

E. MULCH SUBMITTAL: Submit 1 quart sample of each mulch type to be installed, full color range. Obtain Architect's approval prior to bulk delivery to site.


A. Comply with Section 01 40 00.

B. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: Comply with regulatory agencies concerning classification, transportation, handling and storage of landscape materials.



B. PACKAGED MATERIALS: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site.

C. MULCH: Exercise care in the storage of mulches on site to avoid mixing soil with mulch.

D. WEED BARRIER FABRIC: Exercise care in the storage of fabric on site to prevent damage to fabric prior to and during installation.

E. REJECTION OF MATERIAL

1. Evidence of inadequate protection or improper handling or storage, shall be cause for rejection.

2. Any product or material exhibiting signs of damage due to nonconformity to specifications or due to delivery, storage or handling shall be rejected by the Architect. Contractor shall be responsible for hauling off-site and disposing of according to general conditions and codes of the governing jurisdiction.


A. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS: Work shall occur only when weather and soil conditions permit in accordance with locally accepted practice.


1. Existing Plants: Do not damage any existing plantings indicated to remain.

2. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities. Perform work in a manner to avoid possible damage. Hand excavate, as required.

3. Excavation: Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned.





A. WORK SCHEDULING: Proceed with and complete landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the specified planting season and approved schedule.


A. GENERAL: Refer to General Conditions.

1.11 MAINTENANCE

A. GENERAL: Maintain Work in accordance with standard industry practice or as directed by the Architect.

B. MAINTENANCE PERIOD: Begin maintenance immediately after Work is completed. Maintain areas until Final Acceptance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER

A. Clean, potable and free of substances or matter which could inhibit vigorous growth of plant material.

B. Available on-site at no expense to Contractor. Landscape Contractor is responsible for coordination of water needs for watering and irrigation water with the Owner.

2.2 ROCK MULCH

A. Washed 3-6” diameter cobble, free of fines.

B. Submit samples prior to delivery to the site in accordance with paragraph 1.5.E this Section.

2.3 WOOD MULCH

A. Shredded bark mulch, free from deleterious materials and suitable for top dressing of trees, shrubs and ground covers. Mulch shall be of a long fibrous nature capable of matting together and interlocking when moistened and settled. Shredded cedar bark mulch or accepted substitute.

B. Submit samples prior to delivery to the site in accordance with paragraph 1.5.E this Section.

2.4 LANDSCAPE EDGING

A. STEEL EDGING: 3/16” x 4 inches deep Ryerson, green, roll-top steel edging with stakes placed 3 feet on center, or approved equal. Provide steel edging in all locations shown on the drawings.

1. Where metal edging surrounds stone mulch adjacent to building walls provide ½” diameter holes 12” o.c. located at mid-height of edging to provide drainage.

B. MANUFACTURER: JD Russell Company, (800) 888-7425. www.jdrussellco.com.

2.5 WEED BARRIER FABRIC

A. FABRIC: Nonwoven porous fabric Mirafi geotextile or equal, for use as indicated in details.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS: Examine areas and conditions under which the Work of this Section will be performed. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to the Architect. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of work implies acceptance of all areas and conditions.

1. Verify that during grading, topsoil spreading and landscape grading operations, the ground surface was cleaned of materials which might hinder final operations.

3.2 PREPARATION


B. All areas within the limits of planting shall be seeded, sodded, planted with trees, shrubs, groundcovers, perennials or mulched as indicated on the Drawings and Specifications.

3.3 ROCK MULCH. Areas to receive rock mulch shall be rough graded in accordance with Section 310000: Earthwork before Work of this Section is performed. Final fine grading, stone installation and compaction of these materials as required to form a firm, uniform, accurate and unyielding surface at required elevations and to required lines, shall be done under this Section.

B. GRADING

1. Remove existing subgrade material which will not readily compact as required and replaced with satisfactory materials. Additional materials needed to bring subgrade to required line and grade and to replace unsuitable material removed shall be material conforming to this Section.

2. Maintain shape and drainage of graded or compacted areas during construction. Repair, reshaped as required, and recompacted ruts in subgrade greater than or equal to 1 inch deep, before placing stone mulch.

a. Compacted subgrade shall provide positive drainage as indicated on Grading Plan.

b. Set subgrade 3” below adjacent finish grade to accommodate 3” depth of stone mulch.

3. Do not store or stockpile materials on subgrade.

4. Subgrade Compaction

a. For Stone Mulch: Recompacted as required to achieve top 4 inches of materials at a minimum compaction of 90% of maximum density, as determined by ASTM D 1557. Extend subgrade compaction minimum 1 foot beyond proposed edge of mulch.

C. INSTALLATION OF ROCK MULCH

1. General: Install rock mulch only after excavation and construction work which might damage it have been completed, and after steel edging has been completely staked. Damage caused during construction shall be repaired before acceptance.

2. Drainage: Verify subgrade exhibits positive drainage.

a. Any areas which show signs of poor subgrade drainage shall have mulch and fabric removed, subgrade drainage repaired and compacted, and fabric and mulch reinstalled as per these specifications at no cost to the Owner.

3. Weed Barrier: Apply weed barrier fabric to full width of all areas to be mulched as well as wrapping fabric up side of edging, building, wall, etc. Overlap ends by a minimum 6 inches.

4. Rock Mulch Installation




a. Rock Mulch: Spread evenly over weed barrier fabric and prepared subgrade to a final depth indicated in this section. Spread stone mulch evenly so that the surface conforms to the finish grades indicated, and so that the grade is at a uniform slope.

D. TOLERANCES: Variations in smoothness of finished rock mulch shall be less than or equal to 2-in. when tested with a 10 ft. straightedge, applied both parallel and at right angles to centerline of stone mulched areas. Irregularities exceeding these amounts of which retain water on surface shall be corrected by removing defective work and replacing with new material conforming to this specification.

3.4 WOOD MULCH

A. TREES IN LAWN: Mulch areas area around trees in accordance with drawings. Place 4 inches deep (minimum), no weed barrier fabric, keep 2 inches from trunk.

B. SHRUB BEDS: Mulch 4 inches deep (minimum) over weed barrier fabric.

C. GROUNDCOVER BEDS: Mulch 3 inches deep (minimum).

3.5 LANDSCAPE EDGING

A. GENERAL: Install steel edging at locations indicated in the Drawings. Where required, cut edging square and accurately to required length.

B. INSTALLATION

1. Secure edging at beginning and end points to adjacent structure where this is possible as shown on Drawings. Repair damage to concrete or other structures if damage occurs. Repairs shall be in accordance with Section 01045.

2. Securely stake edging in required position and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions

3. Butt adjacent ends and lock together with a widened stake.

4. Set edging plumb and vertical at required line and grade. Straight sections shall not be wavy; curved sections shall be smooth and shall have no kinks or sharp bends.

5. For steel edging bend angles using a jig.

6. For steel edging weld together cut pieces if unable to lock together with stakes.


A. TESTS: Costs of tests and material analyses made by the testing agency will be borne by the Owner when tests indicate compliance and by the Contractor when test indicated non-compliance.

B. REVIEWS

1. General: Comply with General Conditions.


a. All mulches and edging shall be inspected and accepted at the site by the Architect before they are used in planting operations.


a. Comply with General Conditions.


1.) Installed all items in accordance with this Section.

2.) Cleaned all walkways and curbs of debris and litter and shall have cleaned areas of soil and debris left from planting operations.




4. Final Completion: Comply with Section General Conditions.

5. Closeout Documents: Comply with Section General Conditions.

6. Start Up and Instructions: Comply with Section General Conditions.

7. Warranty and Replacement: Comply with Section General Conditions.

8. Post Construction Inspection: Comply with Section General Conditions.

3.7 CLEANUP

A. DURING LANDSCAPE INSTALLATION: All areas shall be reasonably clean at the end of each work day. Sidewalks and other paved areas shall be swept or washed down as needed. Keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition.

B. PROJECT COMPLETION: All debris, soil, trash, and excavated and/or stripped material resulting from landscape operations and unsuitable for or in excess of requirements for completing work of this Section shall be disposed of off-site. All paved areas shall be washed down.

3.8 PROTECTION






WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 1100 - 1

SECTION 33-1100 - WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Additional information concerning water distribution systems may be found on the civil drawings. In case of conflict between the drawings and the information specified herein, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and specialties outside the building for the following:

1. Combined water service and fire-service mains.

B. Utility-furnished products which may include water meters that will be furnished to the site, ready for installation.

C. Work Included: Excavation, exploratory excavation (pothole), backfill, bedding, soil stabilization, ground water removal, connection to existing mains, and installation of pipe, thrust blocks, thrust restraints, valves, fittings, valve boxes, and all necessary appurtenances. Also includes removal and replacement of existing paving or concrete where required, haul and import of adequate backfill material to meet compaction requirements and removal of existing thrust blocks where necessary. Includes abandonment or removal of existing taps and service lines.

D. Related work:

1. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for temporary utilities and support facilities may be included.

2. Division 31 Section “Earth Moving” for soil materials, site grading, site excavation and filling.

3. Division 31 Section “Trenching and Backfilling” for excavating and backfilling of utilities. 4. Division 31 Section “Asphalt Paving” pavement patching over trenches. 5. Division 31 Section “Concrete Paving” for concrete structures, concrete materials and

exterior concrete paving or walks. 6. Division 31 Section “Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control” for erosion and


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Combined Water Service and Fire-Service Main: Exterior water piping for both domestic-water and fire-suppression piping.

B. Fire-Service Main: Exterior fire-suppression-water piping.

C. Water Service: Exterior domestic-water service piping.



33 1100 - 2 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING

D. The following are industry abbreviations for pipe materials:

1. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 2. CIP: Cast iron pipe. 3. DIP: Ductile iron pipe. 4. CU: Copper pipe.

E. Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation.

F. Rock Excavation: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. for Bulk Excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. for footing, trench, and pit excavation which in the Geotechnical Engineer’s opinion cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted:

1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch- (1065-mm-) wide, maximum, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 138-hp (103-kW) flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 28,090 lbf (125 kN) and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,650 lbf (83 kN); measured according to SAE J-1179.

G. All items under this section shall, at a minimum, conform to City of Longmont.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Piping specialties. 2. Fittings. 3. Valves, valve boxes and accessories. 4. Protective enclosures.

B. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From Contractor.

C. Test Reports: Submit two (2) copies of laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials, concrete mix design, asphalt mix designs, and compression test.

D. Permits: Submit copies of all permits issued for project. Contractor is responsible for obtaining all applicable utility agency, City, County, and State Permits for the project.

E. Certificates: Submit two (2) copies of acceptance from Health Department prior to placing water system in service.

F. Locates: Contractor must submit two (2) copies of utility locate drawings/receipts prior to beginning construction.

G. As-Builts: Provide Engineer with copies of redlined, as-built plans upon completion of construction. Horizontal and vertical information is to be certified by a Professional Land Surveyor.





A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, material, and dimensional requirements of piping and specialties and are based on the specific system indicated.

B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water, including tapping of water mains and backflow prevention.

2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable-water-service piping, including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection.

3. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression water-service piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.

C. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

D. Comply with FMG's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire-service-main products.

E. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve and hydrant supervision for fire-service-main piping for fire suppression.


A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:

1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.

B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:

1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage.

2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew-point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary.

C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor when storing inside.

F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.

G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.





A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner’s Representative not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s Representative written permission.

B. Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat falls below 35 degrees F. and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather, temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F. at time of placing.

C. Immediately pump or bail out water found in excavations, whether rain or seepage. Coordination and use of electric power is the Contractor's responsibility. Excavations must be kept free from water at all times.

D. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to take all measures and furnish all equipment and labor necessary to control the flow, drainage and accumulation of water as required to permit completion of the work under this section to avoid damage to all work at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to take all measures and furnish all material, equipment and labor necessary to provide adequate backfill material as specified herein.

F. Water Service shall remain operational at all times until service change over is completed. Provide Owner of residences with water as needed during outages. Provide Owner with phasing plan for project to remain in operation including fire suppression system.

1.8 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintenance of Documents: Store documents apart from drawings used for construction. File submitted documents in accordance with the specification's section numbers. Maintain documents in a clean, dry legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes.

B. Recording: Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not cover work until required information is recorded. Marking of project records shall be legible and with a dark pen or pencil. Ink shall not be water based due to easy smearing. Mark drawings to record actual construction including field dimensions, elevations, details, changes made by a modification, details not on original drawings, horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to a minimum of two permanent surface improvements, and depths of various elements of work in relation to project datum. All horizontal and vertical information is to be certified by a licensed Professional Land Surveyor.

C. Submission: Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate containing date, project title and number, Contractor's name, address and telephone number, title and number of each record document, and signature of Contractor or his authorized representative. Contractor shall




submit two drawings and certified by a licensed Professional Land Surveyor depicting all as-built information to the Engineer.

1.9 PROTECTION

A. Barricades and Safety Provisions: Place and maintain until completion of work adequate barricades, construction signs, warning lights and guards to avoid property damage and protect persons from injury. Flares with open flames will not be permitted. Protect all materials, equipment, pipe and earth piles that may serve as hazards to vehicular or pedestrian traffic by barricades or guards and warning lights.

B. Shoring: Provide and maintain all sheeting, shoring and bracing required to safely retain earth banks. Protect adjoining grades and structures from caving, sliding, erosion or other damage, and suitable forms of protection against bodily injury; all in accordance with applicable codes and governing authorities.

Do not remove any sheeting unless the pipe strength is sufficient to support the trench loads based on trench width measured to the back of sheeting. Remove sheeting and shoring gradually as excavation backfilling progresses to protect the construction or other structures, utilities or property. Do not attempt removal of sheeting in one operation after backfilling is complete.

C. All work must comply with latest OSHA requirements.

D. Utilities: Protect from damage existing utility lines shown on drawings or locations of which are made known to contractor prior to work and utility lines constructed during construction operations of the project. Hand excavate within six inches of known piping or objects to prevent damage from equipment. Before commencing work, obtain information concerning location, type, and extent of concealed existing utilities on the site and adjacent properties. Repair damage to utilities at no cost to the Owner.

E. Granular Fill: Protect existing granular fill adjacent to existing structures from dirt that would impede free drainage. Remove and replace any portions of granular fill that become contaminated with dirt.

F. Drainage: Maintain the excavations and site free from water throughout the work. Remove any water encountered in the trench to provide firm subgrade, to permit joints to be made dry at the final grade, and to prevent entrance of water into the pipeline. Accomplish the foregoing by the use of sumps and gravel blankets, well points, or drainlines. Contractor shall obtain all permits associated with dewatering.

Rock, gravel, and other appurtenances used to keep trenches free from water or used to add support to installed piping is considered incidental to construction and all costs shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

G. Survey Control Monuments and Range Boxes: Protect existing survey control monuments from damage. Contractor will be responsible for replacement or repair of any monument damaged or destroyed. Replacement of monuments must be performed by a qualified land surveyor.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate connection to water main with City of Longmont.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Ductile-Iron Pipe And Fittings sizes 3-inches – 42-inches

1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, thickness Class 52 with cement-mortar lining, AWWA C104 with mechanical-joint, bell- and plain-spigot end. a. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, pressure rating 250 psi,

ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

b. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and high-strength, low alloy steel bolts such as Cor-Ten.

c. All fittings cement – mortar lined, AWWA C104. d. Bituminous outside coating one mil thick.

2. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, thickness Class 52 with cement mortar lining, AWWA C104 with push-on-joint, bell- and plain-spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

a. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

b. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. c. Cement mortar lined, AWWA C104. d. Bituminous outside coating one mil thick.

2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Mechanical Joint Restraint

1. General: All mechanical joint restraints shall be incorporated in the design of a follower gland. The gland shall be manufactured of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536. Dimensions of the gland shall be such that it can be used with the standardized mechanical joint bell and tee-head bolts conforming to AWWA C111 and C153.

2. Description: The restraint mechanism shall consist of numerous individually activated gripping surfaces to maximize restraint capability. The gripping surfaces shall be wedges designed to spread the bearing surfaces on the pipe. Twist-off nuts, sized same as tee-head bolts, shall be used to insure proper actuating of restraining devices. When the nut is sheared off, a standard hex nut shall remain.

3. Pressure: The mechanical joint restraint device for ductile iron pipe shall have a working pressure of at least 250 psi with a minimum safety factor of 2. The mechanical joint restraint device for PVC shall have a working pressure of at least 150 psi with a minimum safety factor of 2:1.

4. Acceptable Manufacturer: The mechanical joint restraint devices shall be of the type listed below or equal, and approved by The City of Longmont prior to bidding: For Ductile Iron Pipe:

EBAA Iron, Inc. Megalug 1100 series (4-inches – 12-inches) Uni-Flange Series 1300 -Mechanical (4-inches – 12-inches) Uni-Flange Series 390C-Joint (Bell) Restraint ROMAC: Gripping




2.3 CORROSION-PROTECTION ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING

A. Encasement for Underground DIP and CIP Piping: AWWA C105, PE film, Type I, Class A, Grade E-1 (ASTM D1248), 1200 lbs per square inch minimum tensile strength, 300% elongation, 800 v/mil thickness minimum dielectric strength, minimum thickness, tube or sheet.

2.4 GATE VALVES AND ISOLATION VALVES

A. AWWA, Cast-Iron Gate Valves:

1. Nonrising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves: AWWA C509, gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray- or ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut. Valve stem shall have a minimum yield strength of 40,000 psi, minimum elongation of 2-inches of 12%, and shall be per ASTM A276, type 304 or 316; or AISI 420. Wrench nuts in accordance with 4.11 of AWWA C509. Stem seal shall consist of two (2) O-rings in accordance with Section 4.8 of AWWA C509. The valves shall open by turning to the left.

a. Minimum Working Pressure: 200 psig. b. End Connections:

1) Flanges: Flanges shall be sized and drilled in accordance with ANSI B16.1 Class 125. Flanges shall be machined to a flat surface with a serrated finish in accordance with AWWA C207.

2) Mechanical Joint: All components of this type of joint shall conform to AWWA C111. The tee-head bolts and hexagon nuts shall be fabricated from a high-strength, low alloy steel known in the industry as Cor-Ten Usalloy, ductile iron Durabolt or equal.

c. Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550. d. Bolting Material: Bonnet and gland bolts and nuts shall be either fabricated

from a low alloy-steel for corrosion resistance or electro-plated with zinc or cadmium. The hot-dip process in accordance with ASTM A153 is not acceptable.

2.5 GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Tapping-Sleeve Assemblies: 4-inches – 20-inches Comply with MSS SP-60. Include sleeve and valve compatible with drilling machine.

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Ford: Style FAST FTSC. b. ROMAC: FTS420. c. Apac: Tapping sleeve 512. d. Muller: Tapping sleeve H-619 (AC PIPE ONLY). e. Smith Blair 622.

2. Tapping Sleeve: Stainless steel, two-piece bolted sleeve with flanged outlet for new branch connection. Include sleeve matching size and type of pipe material being tapped and with recessed flange for branch valve. Steel plate used in fabrication shall conform to ASTM A36 or A285 Grade C.

3. Valve: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, resilient seated gate valve with one raised face flange mating tapping-sleeve flange. Outlet end of the valve shall have a standard mechanical joint end conforming to AWWA C111. The face of the mechanical joint




shall have a sufficiently smooth and even surface to allow a tight O-ring seal with the tapping equipment. Accessories for the mechanical joint consisting of the gasket, gland and fasteners shall be furnished. The tee-head bolts and hexagon nuts shall be fabricated from a high-strength low alloy steel known in the industry as Cor-Ten, Usalloy, ductile iron Durabolt or equal. Comply with gate valve requirements herein.

B. Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER,". Valve boxes shall be the three-piece adjustable screw type. The top section shall be 16-inches long. The following are is acceptable.

1. Tyler screw-type 6-inch cast iron valve box assembly series 6850 with No. 160 oval base. 2. East Jordan Iron Works: 8550 series.

2.6 MORTAR

Masonry mortar shall be Type S conforming to ASTM C270.

The mortar shall consist of one part cement, 0.15 part lime, and three parts sand, measured by volume. The cement, lime and sand shall be first mixed dry to a uniform color in a suitable box or batch mixer and then mixed with water thoroughly; the water being added gradually until the required consistency is obtained. Mortar shall be mixed in batches of such size as will be used immediately. Retempered mortar, or any mortar which has been mixed for more than one-half hour shall not be used. When mortar is molded into briquettes one square inch in cross-section, it shall attain an ultimate tensile stress of 125 pounds per square inch after one day in air and six days in water, and 175 pounds per square inch after one day in air and twenty-seven days in water.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Trenching and Backfilling" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

B. Exploratory Excavation: It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to excavate and locate all existing utilities which may affect construction of the water facilities. All exploratory excavations shall occur far enough in advance to permit any necessary relocation to be made with minimum delay and to verify existing vertical and horizontal location to determine alignment for the proposed water line. All costs incurred by the Contractor in making exploratory excavations shall be considered to be included in the unit price bid for constructing each section of water line or the associate structures.

C. Unstable Trench Bottom

Where trench does not have sufficient strength to support pipe and bedding, or stream crossings are encountered, use one of following methods to repair trench bottom as approved by Engineer. A minimum depth of repair is 2-feet.

1. Embankment: Clear and strip existing surface of all unacceptable material. Place embankment material agreed to by Engineer, compact to 95% AASHTO T99.




2. Aggregate Trench Bottom, percent by weight passing square mesh sieves: 1-½”, 90-100; 3/4", 50-90; No. 4, 30-50; No. 200, 3-12.


A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following applications.

B. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Do not use flanges, unions, or keyed couplings for underground piping.

D. Flanges, unions, keyed couplings, and special fittings may be used, instead of joints indicated, on aboveground piping and piping in vaults.


A. Make pipe joints according to the following:

1. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Water-Service Piping: AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

2. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service-Main Piping: UL 194. 3. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials,

with OD, and with system working pressure.

B. Pipe Jointing:

1. General: Cut pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces in neat and workmanlike manner with no damage to pipe or lining. Leave smooth end at right angles to axis of pipe.

2. Mechanical Joints: Thoroughly clean last 8-inches of spigot and inside bell to remove oil, grit, tar, and other foreign matter. Coat spigot and gasket with solution furnished by pipe manufacturer. Slip cast-iron gland on spigot end of pipe with lip extension of gland toward spigot end. Coat gasket with joint lubricant and place on spigot end of pipe to be laid, with thick edge toward gland.

Push entire section forward to seat spigot in bell of pipe in place. Press gasket into place within bell, even around entire joint. Move ductile-iron gland along pipe into position for bolting all nuts with suitable torque wrench. Alternately tighten nuts 180 degrees apart to produce equal pressure on all parts of gland.

Pipe Size Bolt Size Range of Torque Inches Inches Ft.-Lb.

3" 5/8 45 - 60 4"-24" 3/4 75 - 90

3. Push-on Joints: Thoroughly clean exterior 4-inches of pipe spigot and inside of adjoining bell to remove all oil, grit, tar, and other matter. Place gasket in bell with large round side of gasket pointing inside pipe bell. Apply thin film joint lubricant over gasket's entire exposed surface. Wipe spigot end of pipe clean and insert into bell to contact gasket. Force pipe into bell to manufacturer's jointing mark.




4. Flanged Joints: Thoroughly clean faces of flanges of all oil, grease, and other material. Thoroughly clean rubber gaskets and check for proper fit. Assure proper seating of flanged gasket. Tighten bolts so pressure on gasket is uniform. Use torque wrenches to insure uniform bearing. If joints leak when hydrostatic test applied, remove and replace gaskets and retighten bolts.

C. Thrust Restraint: Install in accordance with City of Longmont Standards and drawings. Removal of existing thrust blocks and rodding is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Any damage caused by the removal of thrust blocks, regardless of size, or rodding shall be paid for by Contractor.


A. General: Deliver, handle, store, and install in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations and the applicable paragraphs of AWWA C600, AWWA C603, and ASTM D2321.

Carefully examine all pipe and fittings for cracks and other defects. Groove in bells of ductile iron pipe to be full and continuous or be rejected. Remove all foreign matter from interior and ends of pipe and appurtenances before lowering into trench. Carefully lower all pipe, fittings, valves, and hydrants into trench piece by piece to prevent damage to pipe materials, protective coatings, and linings. Do not dump into trench. If pipe cannot be lowered into trench and into place without getting earth into it, place heavy, tightly woven canvas bag over each end and leave in place until joints are made. During pipe laying, place no debris, tools, clothing or other materials in pipe.

Keep trenches free from water during pipe laying and jointing. Dewatering of trench considered as incidental to construction and all costs included in contract prices. When pipe laying is not in progress, close open ends of pipe by watertight plug, or other means approved by Engineer.

Dewatering shall be accomplished by the use of well points, sump pumps, rock or gravel drains placed below subgrade foundations or subsurface pipe drains. All water shall be disposed of in a suitable manner without being a menace to public health or causing public inconvenience. No water shall be drained into other work being completed or under construction. Obtain all necessary permits for dewatering.

The dewatering operation shall continue until such time as it is safe to allow the water table to rise in the excavations. Pipe trenches shall contain enough backfill to prevent pipe floatation.

Water shall not be allowed to rise until the concrete has set a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours, and the forms have been removed. Water shall not be allowed to rise unequally against unsupported structural walls.

B. Deflection of Pipe: Do not exceed ½ of deflection limits for each type of pipe as recommended by pipe manufacturer.

C. Water-Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of City of Longmont and of size and in location indicated.

D. Make connections larger than 2-inches with tapping machine according to the following:

1. Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve according to MSS SP-60. 2. Install tapping sleeve on pipe to be tapped. Position flanged outlet for gate valve.




3. Use tapping machine compatible with valve and tapping sleeve; cut hole in main. Remove tapping machine and connect water piping.

4. Install gate valve onto tapping sleeve. Comply with MSS SP-60. Install valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.

E. Extend water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building water piping systems at outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated.

1. Terminate water-service piping at building wall until building water piping systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to building water piping systems when those systems are installed.

F. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports.

3.5 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION

A. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include anchorages for the following piping systems:

1. Gasketed-Joint, Ductile-Iron, Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA C600. 2. Gasketed-Joint, PVC Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA M23.

B. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of installed ferrous anchorage devices.

3.6 VALVES

A. AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.

3.7 SANITARY SEWER CROSSING

A. Normal conditions: Whenever possible lay water mains over sanitary sewers to provide vertical separation of at least 18-inches between invert of water main and crown of sewer.

B. Unusual Conditions: If above separation cannot be met, use following:

1. Sewer passing over or less than 18-inches under water main. a. One continuous length of watertight pipe 20' long centered on water main.

Joints between different pipes encased in concrete 6-inches thick and extending 6-inches either side of joint: or

b. Sewer pipe encased in 6-inches concrete around pipe, and extend 10' either side of water main.

2. Water mains passing under sewers: If vertical separation less than 18-inches provide structural support for sewer.

3.8 UTILITIES ENCOUNTERED

Protection of all existing gas, water, sewer services, drains, cable, telephone lines and electric lines encountered during construction is the Contractor's responsibility. If utilities are disturbed,




they shall be maintained and/or restored to original condition at the Contractor's expense. Backfill around utilities shall be adequately compacted to assure permanent stability.


A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water.

B. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours before pipe is to be tested. All water mains are to be disinfected, flushed, and hydrostatically tested per City of Longmont Regulations.

C. Hydrostatic Testing:

1. General: Make pressure and leakage tests on all newly laid pipe. Test two or more valved sections not to exceed 1000 feet. Test first section of pipe laid to verify if watertight. Lay no additional pipe until first test section has passed tests.

2. Furnish following equipment and materials for tests, unless otherwise directed by Engineer: 1 Graduated containers 2 Pressure gauges 1 Suitable hose and suction pipe as required

3. Testing Procedure: Test each 1000 feet of line installed while trench is partially backfilled and joints are left exposed for examination for leaks. Do not conduct pressure tests until 48 hours after placement of concrete thrust blocks. After pipe has been partially backfilled, slowly let water into line. Vent to allow air in line to be released. Flush line as necessary for cleaning. Leave water in line for 24 hours prior to pressure test. Test at 1-1/2 times working pressure, calculated for low point of test section, or 150 psi, whichever is greater. Valve off pump and hold pressure in line for test. Test for two hours or as agreed to by Engineer. At end of test, operate pump until test pressure is again attained. Calibrate container of water for pump suction to determine amount of water to replace leakage.

4. Leakage Allowance: Leakage is quantity of water necessary to refill line at end of test period. No installation will be accepted until leakage is less than:

ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE PER 1000' OF PIPE IN GPH

Avg. Test Nominal Pipe Diameter - in. Pressure psi 6 8 10 12 18

200 0.64 0.85 1.06 1.28 1.91 175 0.59 0.80 0.99 1.19 1.79 150 0.55 0.74 0.92 1.10 1.66 125 0.50 0.67 0.84 1.01 1.51 100 0.45 0.60 0.75 0.90 1.35

For pipe with 18' nominal lengths. To obtain recommended allowable leakage for pipe with 20' nominal lengths, multiply the leakage calculated from the table by 0.9. If pipeline under test con-tains sections of various diameters, allowable leakage will be sum of computed leakage for each size. Reduce allowable leakage proportionately for sections less than 1000 ft.




D. Prepare reports of testing activities.

3.10 FLUSHING AND DISINFECTING

A. General: In accordance with AWWA C601. Acceptable chlorine disinfectants are calcium hypochlorite granules, sodium hypochlorite solutions, and calcium hypochlorite tablets.

B. Chlorine-Water Solution Method:

Chlorine Required to Produce 25 Mg/L Concentration in 100 feet of Pipe - by Diameter

Pipe 100 Percent 1 Percent Diameter Chlorine Chlorine Solution In. Lb. Gal.

4 .013 .16 6 .030 .36 8 .054 .65 10 .085 1.02 12 .120 1.44 16 .217 2.60

Induce chlorine solution into pipe line at a continuous feed rate to attain a concentration of 25 Mg/L free chlorine.

C. Tablet Method: May not be used on solvent welded plastic pipe. May be used only when all foreign materials have been kept out of pipe. If ground water has entered pipe during installation and tablets have been installed, flush main and use chlorine-water solution method. Do not use if temperature is below 5 degrees C. Place tablets with non-toxic adhesive in each pipe length in top of pipe in accordance with following table:

Number of 5-g Hypochlorite Tablets Required for Dose of 25 mg/L

*

Pipe Length of Pipe Section, ft. Diameter 13 18 20 30 40 in. or less

4 1 1 1 1 1 6 1 1 1 2 2 8 1 2 2 3 4 10 2 3 3 4 5 12 3 4 4 6 7 16 4 6 7 10 13

D. Chlorination Test: Assure valves are closed on existing system to prevent chlorine solution flowing into existing system. Retain 25 mg/L chlorinated water in pipe line for minimum of 24 hours. During retention period operate all valves and hydrants to disinfect. At end of 24 hour period, chlorine in system to be no less than 10 mg/L throughout length tested. When section

*

Based on 3.25 g available chlorine per tablet, any portion of tablet rounded to next higher number.




being tested meets 10 mg/L chlorine after 24 hours, flush main. Water samples taken shall show no coliform organisms. If water in pipe does not meet the governing health agency requirements, repeat disinfection procedure, at Contractor's expense, until requirements are met. Furnish acceptance forms from governing agency to Engineer.

3.11 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground water-service piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. See Division 31 Section "Trenching and Backfilling" for underground warning tapes.

3.12 OPERATION OF VALVES

Contractor is responsible for operating any valves necessary to complete project. Contractor is required to provide Owner 24 hours notice prior to said operation.

3.13 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION

Restore all pavements, curbs, gutters, utilities, fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began, and to satisfaction of Engineer. Deposit all waste material in designated waste areas. Grade and shape disposal site. Complete topsoil and reseeding of site, if required. Where disposal sites are not designat-ed, remove and dispose of all waste material off site.




SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 33 3100-1

SECTION 33 3100 –SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provision of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Additional information concerning the sanitary sewer distribution systems may be found on the Civil Drawings. In case of conflict between the drawings and the information specified herein, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Excavation, trenching, removal of existing manholes and piping, backfill, compaction, bedding, soil stabilization, groundwater removal, connection to existing manholes, and installation of service lines, and all necessary appurtenances and safety precautions.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities.

2. Division 31 Section “Earth Moving” for soil materials, site excavating, filling and grading. 3. Division 31 Section “Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control” for erosion and

sediment mitigation. 4. Division 31 Section “Trenching and Backfilling” for excavating and backfilling of utilities. 5. Division 32 Section “Asphalt Paving” for asphalt pavement removal, replacement,

materials and testing. 6. Division 32 Section “Concrete Paving” for concrete pavement removal, replacement,

materials and testing.

C. Permits and Fees: Contractor to obtain and pay for all permits required for work in this Section. Pay all fees for inspections by local authorities and utility agency for work specified in this Section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for pipe, fittings, and manholes or certifications that products conform with specifications.

B. Test Reports: Submit all field quality control test reports.

C. Permits: Contractor is responsible for obtaining all applicable utility agency, City, County and State permits for the project. Submit copies of all permits issued for project.



33 3100-2 SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING

1.4 REFERENCE TO CITY OF LONGMONT STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS

All work of this section shall be performed in conformance to the current published City of Longmont Public Improvement Design Standards and Construction Specifications and as subsequently revised, which are incorporated into these specifications by reference. Supplementary requirements may be developed by the Engineer to address project-specific conditions, which may supersede the above-referenced specification.




STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 4100-1

SECTION 33 4100 - STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Additional information concerning storm sewer systems may be found on the civil drawings. In case of conflict between the drawings and the information specified herein, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. State of Colorado, Department of Transportation (CDOT): State Department of Highways Standard Construction Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, current edition.

B. City of Longmont Standard Specifications for Design and Construction, Latest Edition.

C. Reference Standards: Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents.

1.3 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes gravity-flow, storm utility drainage piping outside the building, with the following components:

1. Inlets.


1. Division 31 Section “Trenching and Backfilling” for excavating and backfilling of utilities. 2. Division 31 Section “Earth Moving” for Site Grading. 3. Division 31 Section “Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control” for erosion and


C. Permits and Fees:

1. Obtain and pay for all permits required for the work of this section. 2. Pay all fees for inspections by local authorities and utility agency for work specified in this

section.

D. Existing Utilities

1. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to excavate and verify the location (depth, horizontal alignment, etc.) of all existing utilities that may affect construction of the proposed storm utility drainage piping line. All exploratory excavations shall occur far enough in advance to permit any necessary relocation to be made with minimum delay and to verify existing vertical and horizontal location to determine alignment for the proposed storm utility drainage piping line. All costs incurred by the Contractor in making exploratory excavations shall be considered to be included in the unit price bid for



33 4100-2 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

construction of each section of storm utility drainage piping line or the associated structures.

E. All standard details and specifications of the City of Longmont shall apply as noted on the construction permit and as required by the agency.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. HDPE: High Density Polyethylene Pipe.

B. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Pipe.

C. RCP: Reinforced Concrete Pipe.

D. RCBC: Reinforced Concrete Box culvert.

E. CMP: Corrugated Metal Pipe.


A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure, Drainage-Piping Pressure Rating: 10-foot head of water. Pipe joints shall be watertight with gasketed joint.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


1. Inlets. 2. Flared end sections.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments for the following:

1. Storm Water Inlets. Include plans elevations, sections, details and frames, covers and grates.

C. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.


A. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.

B. Handle storm water inlets according to manufacturer’s written rigging instructions.

C. Deliver piping in manufacture’s original bundles, securely strapped, and with protective blocking as required. Label or tag each bundle with type, size and quantity of material.

D. Exercise care to prevent damage to materials during loading, transportation and unloading. Do not drop pipe or fittings.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS




2.6 CONCRETE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. RCP Sewer Pipe and Fittings: According to the following:

1. ASTM C 76 and ASTM C 506 and ASTM C 507 for circular, arch, and vertical and horizontal elliptical pipe, respectively. Pipe shall be Class III, Wall B, unless otherwise noted.

2. Joints: Water tight joints meeting ASTM C443 Standard Specification for joints in circular concrete sewer and culvert pipe, using rubber gaskets.

3. Flared End Sections: No standard specifications apply to concrete flared end sections. Provide manufactures specifications with shop drawings to Owner’s Representative.

2.7 NONPRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS

A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

B. Sleeve Materials:

1. For Concrete Pipes: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443m), rubber.

2.11 STORM WATER INLETS

A. Area Inlets: Type and manufacture as indicated on plans.

2.13 CONCRETE

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following:

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable.

B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious materials ratio, 5-7% entrained air and maximum 4 inch slump. Refer to Division 32 Concrete Paving for additional information.




1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa), deformed steel.

2.15 PIPE OUTLETS

A. Head Walls: Cast-in-place reinforced concrete, with apron and tapered sides as shown in plans.

B. Riprap Basins: Broken, irregular size and shape, graded stone according to Urban Drainage criteria.

C. Flared End Section (FES): Precast reinforced concrete with apron and tapered sides.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Site excavation and filling are specified in Division 31 Section “Earth Moving.”

B. Excavation and backfilling for utilities are specified in Division 31 Section “Trenching and Backfilling.”

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Piping: Prior to installation, verify that insides of pipe and pipe joints are clean and free of dirt, mud, oil, shavings from cutting, or other deleterious materials.


A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate location and arrangement of underground storm utility drainage piping. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B. General:

1. Use only undamaged material. 2. Lay pipe on firm bedding with full length of barrel fully supported. Maintain straight lines

and uniform grades between invert elevations shown. Inside of pipe shall be smooth and clean.

3. Begin all pipe installation at downstream end of pipe run, with lower segment of pipe in contact with specified bedding. Place bell or groove ends facing upstream.

4. Plug ends temporarily during installation, until connections are made to adjoining pipe or to manholes or inlet structures.

5. Trench excavation and placement and compaction of bedding and backfill are specified in Division 31 Section “Trenching and Backfilling.”

C. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer’s written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Plug all lifting holes in pipe with approved rubber plug or grout.




D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

E. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at slopes indicated on plan. 2. Install reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA’s

“Concrete Pipe installation Manual.”

3.4 INLETS, OUTLETS AND CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION

A. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.

1. Cast-in-place or precast concrete in accordance with drawings and applicable agency having jurisdiction standards.

2. Construct inverts of pipe or concrete smoothed inverts same size as pipe up to centerline of pipe. Form perimeter bench as indicated.

3. Embed steel angles or other accessories as indicated or required to anchor and support frames, grates, or covers.

B. Frames, Grates, Covers and Steps: Install accurately to placement dimensions shown on drawings. Anchor castings in place and set in adjustment mortar to assure a firm foundation.

C. Connection to Existing Structures:

1. Cut and patch or rebuild existing manhole, catch basins, or other drainage structures as required to receive new drain lines.

2. Core drill openings to receive new pipe. Chip existing bench to provide sufficient thickness for mortar bed to form new invert.

3. Seal around new pipe penetration with expandable waterstop sealant, completely filling space between pipe and cut opening to provide a watertight repair.

3.5 STORM WATER INLET INSTALLATION

A. Construct inlet head walls, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete, as indicated.

B. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated.

C. Install outlets that spill onto grade, anchored with concrete, where indicated.

D. Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where indicated.


A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section “Earth Moving.” Arrange for installation of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground structures.




1. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures.


A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches (610 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.

1. Submit separate report for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder

of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified.

4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects.

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours

advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. 5. Gravity-Flow Storm Utility Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of authorities

having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following:

a. Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C924 (ASTM C 924M).

C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping, inlets and manholes of dirt and superfluous materials. Flush with potable water.


